Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
com
Ram Concept
1
Introduction
RAM Concept is a program analysis and design using finite element methods for high concrete floor
system, or the foundation system. The system can be floor or the concrete after tensioning (PT),
reinforced concrete (RC), or hybrid (a mixture between PT and RC). Concept is an extremely powerful
program and allows the entire design of a floor model or design strips or each beam.
• The user shall determine: geometric structure, load, load combinations, and stress simulation
after (if possible).
• Concept program calculates (for any combination of load yet): the amount of reinforcement
required for bending and sliding in a way according to the requirements of the relevant code;
style nail reinforcement (SSR) shear strain for cut, puncture stress measurements for the
bending and deflection.
Models include any items from a beam or a simple sustained for the entire floor. The models are
shown in 3D (even the model is deployed to Strip Wizard).
Concept Program generally does not use the strip method unless the purpose of reproducing the
concrete rules, and Strip Wizard interface.
RAM Concept allows the design of next-stressed and reinforced concrete using finite element model of
the whole village. Concept program can predict the behavior of the exact elastic than frame model. In
addition, the finite element method analysis to ensure meet balance requirements, whether irregular
textures.
• RAM Concept for The (RC) analysis and system design of reinforced concrete slab foundation
(the nail plate) with any size and any shape.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• RAM Concept for The High (RC) analysis and system design of reinforced concrete with any
size and any shape.
Increased capacity analysis and design of the program RAM Concept by adding functions to its
selection for one or both of the following mode:
• The function of RAM Concept PT (following stress functions for the sheets or copies)
Analysis and design of the floor or the ultimate stress with reinforced concrete.
Strip Strip Wizard generated from 3D form, but the border automatically in the form of 2-D. The model
will use the finite element method.
You can use the Wizard to design beams Strip or written in a way that does not need a lot of clicks.
With this function, can design the cable bundle and the first cut, but the designer does not need to start
with the estimates.
• beams
• Soap
• the interstices
There may be other steps and changes in the thickness and height for this item.
Concept Program activities are not effective, or you can not use directly on:
• The text I
• the slope
In most cases, you can create models with many steep steps. We do not
recommend you do this to assess behavior following stress, because this is especially
inappropriate.
The classification (**) shows the relative difficulty or relative time in each stage.
Do not use the program concept to final design without sufficient basis in the design of concrete, or
not enough understanding and knowledge about the program.
This tutorial contains a large amount of information. Therefore, you should read it all, but will
probably not practical. We ask you to follow the instructions and read the important chapters.
1.5.1 Guide
Note: Although you do not have access to the PT function, but you should follow one of these
guidelines as a thicker concrete slabs.
• For the (user nail plate): Chapter 44, "Guidelines for the base system". The guide introduces
You should be done under the guidance of version 2. In the program folder files available complete
guide, so you do not have to start from scratch. For example, you can open the ACI 318-02 Guide PT,
remove strip design, and start typing the strip design.
We think you should at least read the next chapter, along with the tips in this chapter before beginning
the first design.
• Chapter 1, "Introduction".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Programs 5presented snap. Almost all problems are caused by the nets are not used to comply
with snap function.
Note: Not all results are considered deflections and creep fracture. Another important thing that you
must understand what the results are and what the results are not.
• The chapter on the relevant rules. See the following: "Understanding the rules of construction".
RAM Concept program does not replace the rules. The program made a few, but not all, of the rules.
Using this program does not mean that you have knowledge of building codes.
• load default
• selection rules
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• implementation rules
Specifically, you should look at the rules being used and how we interpret and implement these rules
look like.
• AS3600-2001 Rules 9.1.2 (detailing the torque bar to 25% negative) and 9.1.3
We recommend that, before using Concept 3.0 program, you should consider part of the
new features below.
It is important before using the program with a file Concept 3.0 old (before version 3.0), you should
consider the upgrade old files.
reinforced Layer
Reinforced Layer allows you to add (or replace) the reinforcement due to design programs by drawing
the actual group stick to the plan view with the different tools.
You can also edit the group of programs designed by, and the structural analysis taking into
consideration the changes you.
See Chapter 24, "Drawing rebar" and Chapter 49, "The Note on Reinforcement" for more detailed
information about the reinforcement layer.
Details
rhythm
In this new version, more detailed rules to be reinforced in the present pace than in the previous version.
These can also create detailed rules on the use of rhythm.
Concept Program is considering deployment length (the anchor) reinforced by both the program design
and the user-reinforced design.
Load combination "group" encapsulated by a large number of load combinations, each combined with
a different payload inside.
For example, for model 3 due to wind loads (Wa, Wb and Wc), a group of load combination 1.2 D +
1.6 L + 1 W is equivalent to the envelope of the load combination "are" after here:
1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 Wa
1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 Wb
1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1
WC
The group combined load is particularly useful when a large number of the load.
Concept program implementation covering the ranges. This is most useful for the range of deflection
and load-bearing capacity of the soil. For example, in the model of the nail (nail plate), is a set of design
rules, including the planned load of soil, presenting the maximum pressure load and minimum land for
all the load combination used.
ACI 318-05
Improved 3D Graphics
The perspective of Concept program presented in more detail (including reinforced and SSR) and
includes all the new options, such as transparency.
The plan view of Concept program immediately displayed as zoom, pan and change text ratio.
• No conventional color
Most of the improvements in the Concept version 3.0 is fully compatible with 2.x files Concept
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
We do not recommend you to upgrade your old files containing the model was fully designed
or close reach to the final design.
We recommend that you upgrade the file containing the incomplete design.
RAM International
Bentley Solutions Center 2744
Loker Avenue Carlsbad We toist,
CA 92008
USA
Tel: 1-800-726-7789
Fax: 1-760-431-5214
email: support@bentley.com
Europe
India
Bentley Systems,
Adelaide, Australia
Tel: +61 (8) 8362 9013
Fax: +61 (8) 8362 8519
email: support@bentley.com
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Workspace
This chapter presents the basic orientation for RAM Concept interface.
Figure 2-1 A. Standard Toolbar for general operations. B. Bar menu includes a menu of the program.
Includes menu File, Edit, Criteria, Layers, the CUS, Process, Report, View, Window, and Help. C. The
impact tool to manipulate the current projection. D. Toolbar snap to set the coordinates for the
projection step is working flat. E. The common tools for editing plan view window is active. F. The
tools for editing separate layer plan view window is active. G. Contents of the report window to
observe, open, and rearrange the report. H. Active window. I. The status bar gives information of the
state program. J. Command line (command prompt) display instructions and tools related to the
current position of the cursor in the projection plane coordinates.
When creating a new file, you must define your model in the New File dialog box, click the Choose
File> New. Specify the type, code and unit use. You can copy files or template Concept is available by
clicking on the Copy File New File dialog box.
2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click OK.
1 Run the program RAM Concept, and Select File> New. 2 Click
Use File> Open to open the file available RAM Concept. For quick access, Concept always track ten
most recent files you opened and listed them at the end of the File menu.
Note: See the "Upgrading old files" on page 4 To learn more about how to use the files from an old
record.
1 Choose File> Save As (because the file is not saved, so you can also select File> Save). 2
3 Enter the file name and click Save. Concept will add the file name extension. CPT otherwise.
1 Choose File> Save (if you have not saved the file, and the Save As dialog box appears, follow the
steps to save the first time).
3 Enter a name for the template and click Save. Concept will add the file name extension. Cpttmp (if
any) and save the file without the object.
Use the Save As command to copy the file and change the file name or location. Original and copy
files completely separate and any actions performed on a file will not affect the remaining files.
For version management, Concept program creates a copy of the last saved when you save the file so
you can go back to a previous version if necessary. Concept creation program files with the file name
extension. Cpt.bak1.
If you need to return to an older version of a file, use the backup copy of the program concept.
For safety, Concept program will automatically save a copy of the file is working in the same category
as the original file with the file name and extension. Autosave. Just about every 2 minutes, Concept
program autosave file will update if you change the original file. Once you save the file, the program
will delete Concept autosave file for your saved version has been updated. We suggest you save often
to avoid losing data.
If the incident occurs computer malfunction or power failure while using program concept, when you
restart the program concept, the program detects the latest autosave file and automatically open the file.
If you open a second copy of a concept while running, the second copy can be detected by the autosave
file and open it first. In this case, just close the autosave file and continue working.
2.4 Template
A template file contains all the things that an ordinary file (such as setting parameters, the projection
plane, etc.) but no objects. You can create a template from RAM Concept any file by selecting File>
Save Template. Concept will backup your files without any object with the file name and extension.
Cpttmp. For more information on how to save a template, see "Save the file as a template". Copy the
existing template file by selecting File> New and click on the Copy File to create a new file based on a
template. For more information on how to start a new file from the template, see "Start a new file".
Figure 2-2 Left-click the Selection tool in a second pop-up menu appears.
Note: Undo command can not reverse the Generate Mesh and Calc All command. Any changes you
make will be confirmed once you do one of these activities.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 Knowledge of layer
In the program RAM Concept, objects (such as walls, columns, hand written, the dome base, the load,
the cable bundle, strip design, etc.) to create a structural model. Due to the number of objects involved
in the structural model, should Concept uses layers to organize objects.
A layer is a collection of related objects and each object in the Concept program in one and only one
layer. You can handle all objects on a layer as a group or individually.
When drawing objects on the projection plane, RAM Concept program will automatically create
objects when you create the finite element mesh and run the analysis calculations. If you object wall,
column, and layer on the surface Mesh Input, Concept will make the wall object element, column
elements, and the corresponding element in the Element layer when you create the finite element mesh
.
If you want to create or edit objects on a layer, use the flat projection on that layer. When you draw the
column on the Input Mesh layer reference standard, which means you are creating objects on the layer
Mesh Input. These objects will be in the layer and not in the plan view. Can edit them using any flat
projection on Mesh Input layer, rather than the flat projection on any other layer. Each object is an
entity, so you can manipulate objects with individual or other objects on the same layer.
Note: You can create and edit a separate group of subjects lines, dimensions, and notes on each layer.
Drawing Layer
Import
This layer of information is entered into the CAD drawing. Concept program will automatically save
any motifs that are entered on this layer.
Layer objects are used to determine the geometric structure. Concept program using
objects to create the finite element objects on the layer corresponding Element.
The specific object layer: column, wall, hand copies of copies Clearance, Beams, The pillows, pillow
Road,
The imperial arches, domes Empire Road,
The dome base.
Element Layer
This layer is the finite element object. It is possible to create these objects from the information-based
Concept Mesh Input layer, or can be created manually.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The specific object layer: column element, wall element, the element, The pillows, pillow Street, The
Empire
arches, domes Empire Road, The
dome base.
The load layer (Static load balancing, static Superman, Temporary Construction (stress at
work), static load, load another activity (can be reduced), Work load (can not be reduced),
Works load (cumulative), Live Load (Tran) and user-defined)
The information layer is used to determine the load on the structure. In Concept program, the load is a
load acting as a group, such as work load. The layer can also load the load analysis results.
The Concept is the layer static load, balancing, and redundancy default and you can not delete them.
You can define an unlimited number of loads and Concept program will create a layer corresponding to
each load.
The specific object layer: point load, line load, surface load.
Note: You can not adjust the load on the Layer object static load, balance, and supercomputing.
Layer Pattern
Layer
This layer is the strip design, the design and the test for structural breach.
The layer-specific object: The component range, rhythm Border, Border strips, parts design, puncture
test.
The composition of this layer tendons stretch and stand behind the structure. Despite two-layer cable
bundle, Latitude and Longitude, but do not require the use of both layers. You can draw on the layer
cable bundle cable bundle in any way you want.
The load combination layer (Fully Static, Static and balance, initial activity, activity, activity
continuously, factored, LT did not crack deflection and defined by the user)
Note: The load combination is listed for ACI318. AS3600 and BS8110 use different terminology.
The layer design rules (minimum Code, User minimum, initial activity, activity, activity
continuously, Endurance, Flexibility)
Note: Design rule for listed are ACI318, AS3600 and BS8110 use different terminology.
This layer includes a summary of the design results. The program will automatically Concept
summary information when you run the Calc All. You can not create, edit, or delete objects in this
layer, but you can show them.
Some icon near the name of a layer in the layer window content dots on "sheet". This indicates that
there is at least one object in that layer. In other words, the dot means there exists at least one object in
the layer. This is different than any tangible object on a projection of the plane of the layers, which
may or may not be part of that layer.
Note: There may be a lag time (like 10 seconds) after the first item on the drawing
layer.
Note: This feature was added to the layer to search for the files to see if they support any items which
do not.
Note: The dots do not appear on the load combination layer because this layer does not have to be
drawn in that category. This does not mean that using a combination of design loads.
Figure 3-1 shows that the layer icon is the object on the layer below: Input Mesh, Element, static load
and load activities (can not be reduced)
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The object is drawn and edited using the tools in the Layer-Specific toolbars, and menu tools. The tools
are available depending on the plan view is active window in the workspace. Once you draw objects on
a flat projection, the objects that belong to that layer of flat projection.
Note: For more information about how to draw and edit objects, see the following
chapters.
2 Enter a name for the plan view. (Concept will automatically create and attach layer name
from "Plan" to). 3 Select the layer that you want to plan view and click OK.
4.3 Watch
perspectives
The perspective in the form of three-dimensional modeling view. You can view the model from any
angle by rotating the perspective that the axes x, y, and z. Model can be viewed as parallel projection or
perspective views can create the model and the block structure or structural wiring.
You can be the model in parallel projection or perspective views. In parallel projection, parallel lines in
the original model and the parallel drawn in three-dimensional images. In perspective projection,
nearby objects appear larger than distant objects with the same size. The change between the parallel
projection ( ) And perspective projection ( ) Controls the direction in which the image is
shown. One, and only one, of these changes are to be installed.
The change between the wire frame model ( ) And block model ( ) Controls how the image is
shown. Wireframe only the edges of the object is visible in the present block model of the object
surface visible. Block model more realistic, but the picture frame
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
often more useful by wire can allow you to see through the model. One, and only one, of these changes
are to be installed.
Use around the x-axis and y ( ) And tool around the z axis ( ) Model to rotate around the axis x,
y and z of the screen.
Rotate the
model:
1 Choose tools revolve around the axis x and y ( ) Or tool around the z axis ( ).
2 Click once in the perspective window to start and move the cursor until you identify the location of
the desired pattern.
Create a new
perspective:
2 Enter a name for perspective. (RAM Concept will automatically create and attach layer
name from "Perspective"). 3 Select the layer that you want to plan view and click OK.
The plan view and the perspective presented display model only. Control the types of objects and can
see colors, fonts, and line types for each plan view and perspective.
Use the zoom function to amplify or miniature projection display flat or perspective. If the mouse
wheel button, rolling wheel to zoom in and zoom at cursor position. Zoom ( ) And Zoom
Rectangle ( ) Amplifier display. Zoom ( ) Thumbnail displayed. You can set the display to
surround the entire model using the Zoom Extent ( ). To go back to previous zoom ratio, using the
Zoom Previous ( ).
1 Set cursor position on the plan view window is active or perspective. There is a focus point
amplifier.
2 Roll the mouse button wheel away from you to zoom in, and towards you to shrink.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Pairing allows you to smooth the position shown in the plan view or perspective window. If your
mouse has a wheel button, pressing down on the wheel and show smooth transplantation. You can also
use the Pan tool ( ) To move the display. In addition, the plan view with the scroll bar at the
bottom and right side window you can use to locate the position display.
1 Press the wheel mouse button down on the plan view window is active or perspective. 2 Pair
2 Click once on the ground plane to start polishing compound, click again when the show was at the
desired location.
4.5.3 Reconstru
ct
Reinvent display are essential when the projector is currently disabled. When you create grid analysis
model or change the settings, open the window can be updated. In most cases, RAM Concept program
will automatically recreate for you. If the display is not updated, click Redraw ( ) To reconstruct the
display window is active.
Using Visible Objects dialog box to set the type of object can be seen in a plan view or perspective.
The plan view and perspective can display objects from any layer, but you can only edit objects on a
flat projection of the object layer.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
4 Check the box to display the objects and do not check to mark the object, then click OK.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see include Visible Objects command.
Each plan view and perspective are a form of scheme of color combinations, fonts, and line types are
used for the objects shown. When a plan view or perspective is the active window, you can select and
edit the schema it uses a form of Appearance dialog. If you change the schema declaration form, then
it will affect all plan view and perspective using that scheme. You can create multiple schemas form
that you need to customize the appearance of the plan view and perspective. When you create a plan
view or perspective new window will use the default schema first.
Appearance ( ).
3 Select a schema from the Schema list on the left and Appearance dialog box, click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: You can also right-click to see the popup menu includes commands Appearance.
3 Enter a name for the new schema and select the schema base. The set of base schema will launch
strategy
new
map.
2 Select the schema you want to delete from the list of schemas in the Appearance
dialog. 3 Click Delete below the list of schemas to delete schemas are highlighted.
2 Select the schema you want to create a new default schema from the Schema list in the Appearance
dialog.
3 Click Set As Default under the list of schemas to generate schemas are highlighted in the new
default schema. RAM Concept Program will use this scheme to launch the plan view and a new
perspective is created.
You can choose the color of each object is drawn for each form schemas. You can also set the
background, grid and highlight color. If the object type is not selected color ( ), RAM Concept will
use the settings for the color of the object layer. For example, you can set the color of objects that do
not bundle cable color, and then set the layer cable bundle Latitude is red and tendons Layer
Longitude is blue. RAM Concept will be well-used color (foreground color) in the event that you do
not choose the color for the color of the object or the default layer.
2 Choose schemas form (if the plan view or perspective is the active window, the Summary
map has been selected for that
window).
3 Select a category from the drop-down list (the drop-down list) (if color change paint, then skip this
step).
The straight draw objects can choose the solid line, dashed or dotted line. The calibration curve is linear
features and line width parameters independent set of schemas form.
You can change the font size in two ways. In the schema form, you can select font size for all text
outside the text note. The font button, you can temporarily change the font size.
Note: Changing the text size only temporarily affect the active window and program RAM Concept
will cancel changes when closing the window.
You can choose the rate to change font or font size unchanged when you zoom in and zoom out on a
flat projection.
2 Choose schemas form (if the plan view or perspective is the active window, the Summary
map has been selected for that
window).
Note: Percentage of zero fonts make the font size remains fixed despite flat rate projection is. The
value other than zero will increase the rate of decrease font size equivalent to when you zoom in and
zoom out.
View> Grid.
Note: If you want the grid to be visible on all plan view, the mark for all Plans Set.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see including the.
View> Grid.
3 Enter values in the Grid Setup dialog box and click OK Plan.
Note: If you want to apply these settings to all grid plan view window, then check the Set for all Plans.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
To create or edit objects on a layer, use the flat projection on that layer. You draw and edit objects on
the projection plane using tools from the toolbar-Specific layer.
Use the snap is the quickest way to determine the exact location on an object without drawing the
horizontal lines or vertical (construction of the line is called) or do not know the exact coordinates .
Whenever you move the cursor over the object, RAM Concept, the program will identify the point
snap on snap to the running. To open the snap feature, click on this button and click the button again to
turn off the snap feature.
Getting stuck on the road ( ) Snap into the road of any two lines which include polygon vertices.
Getting stick to the point ( ) To snap to any given point as the middle column, the end of the line,
or the top of a polygon.
Snap to end point ( ) To snap to the end of the line (including the vertices of polygons).
Getting stuck in the middle point ( ) The snap to the midpoint of the line.
Can snap to snap the nearest ( ) The snap on the object to be painted at least close cursor.
Getting stuck orthogonal ( ) The snap orthogonal axes x or y direction of the local grid. Not
necessarily parallel to the global x and y axes.
Getting stuck in perpendicular ( ) The perpendicular snap since the last click to a
straight line.
Getting stuck wide open () does not create snap mode, but can affect the behavior of a few
parameters set another snap.
Generally, the parameters set snap expansion makes the other snap calculations behave as if the line is
extended to show the infinite straight line. The change snap settings are specific:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Roads: the road between the infinite straight line (as determined by the Joint
straight line can be seen) is the point can snap.
• Scores: no effect.
• Last: the endless line side (as determined by the section line can be seen) that can snap.
• Orthogonal: no effect.
• Perpendicular lines: perpendicular point on the infinite line (as determined by the section line
can be seen) that can snap.
• Focus: no effect.
If you're drawing with tools and want to get rid of what you drew, click the right mouse button, or
press the Esc key.
If you need to reposition the location or amplifier shown in the drawing and do not want to get out of
the work you are doing, use the mouse button or wheel to zoom snap. See "Control display "on page
12 for more information on how to use the mouse wheel button.
Enter the
coordinates:
1 With the appropriate tool selected, enter the coordinates x and y are separated by commas (eg 10,
5).
1 With the appropriate tool selected, enter the letter "r" followed by the x and y coordinates are
separated by commas (eg r10, 5).
Before you can edit objects on a flat projection, you must select them. Using the Selection Tool ( )
Or Utility tool ( ) To select objects on a flat projection. Choose tangible objects surrounded by
the range in which objects. For example, if you have a gap (on the Mesh Input layer) in the middle
of, surrounded gaps and gaps both because of the rectangle and will run throughout the surrounding
surface gaps. If you just want to pick the gaps, double-click the gap. You can select any object by
double-clicking on the object. To add objects to the currently selected object, hold down the Shift
key while selecting.
2 Click in the opposite corner of the rectangle. Choose objects and run smoothly within the scope of a
rectangular selection. (Press and hold the Shift key while clicking the first to add objects to the current
selection.)
2 Double-click the object you want to select (Press and hold the Shift key when you click to add
objects to the current selection). When selected, the program RAM Concept will be interpreted in a
very small rectangle when the mouse double-click.
2 Press and hold the Shift key when you surround the object you want to select. Uncheck the selected
object has been running smoothly and within the scope of the rectangle, and select any object within the
rectangle that has not been selected.
To deselect an object:
2 Press and hold the Shift key when you double-click the object you want to select. When unchecked,
the program RAM Concept will be interpreted in a very small rectangle when the mouse double-click.
To cut or copy objects, first select the object, then select the appropriate command from the Edit
menu. RAM Concept will put the object that you cut or copied to the Windows clipboard. The position
coordinates of the object is pasted from the clipboard similar position coordinates from where you
copy or cut them. RAM Concept program to paste the object into the current selection, so you can
reposition their position after pasting.
Cut objects:
2 Choose Edit> Cut (or right click and select Cut from the popup menu).
Copying objects:
2 Choose Edit> Copy (or right click and select Copy from the popup menu).
1 Choose Edit> Past (or right click and select from the popup menu Past).
You can also copy and move, rotate, or stretch the image to create symmetrical objects in one step by
pressing the Shift key while you use the Move tool ( ), Stretch ( ), Rotate (
) Or Mirror ( ). See "Move, rotate, stretch, and symmetric imaging objects" for more
information.
To select an object or group of objects before using the move tool ( ), Stretch (
), Rotate ( ) Or Mirror ( ) (See "Selecting objects"). If you hold down the Shift key while
clicking the first move, rotate, or imaging symmetry operations will be performed on a copy of the
options is to choose it.
Moving options:
3 Enter from which to move (hold down the Shift key when you click to move the stars for
select
ed).
4 Click on the point where you want the object or group of objects to move.
Stretch options:
3 Getting stick to the point you want to stretch the selection (limited to the control of motor
morni
ng).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
4 Click on the point where you want the object or group of objects to stretch.
Rotation
options:
3 Enter the center rotation (hold the Shift key when you click to rotate the selected copy).
3 Enter two points to create straight lines that cross each image you want to create symmetry for (the)
object
selected. (Press and hold the Shift key when you click to create symmetrical images selected
for the copy.)
Utility Tool ( ) Is a versatile tool that is used to select, move, and stretch objects. See "Select
objects" for more information on how to select objects with Utility tool. When you select an object or
group of objects, you can move or stretch the holder (grip point) to the point by snap on choice.
3 Getting stuck in the holder and position the cursor in the upper half of the range snap until you see the
cursor appear to move cross ( ) Then click. (Press and hold the Shift key when you click to move
the selected copy.)
4 Click on the point where you want the object or group of objects to move.
3 Getting involved in the handling and cursor position in the bottom half of the range until it snaps
cursor appear stretched ( ) Then click.
4 Click on the point where you want the object or group of objects to be stretched.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The Model Move tool (), Mirror Model ( ), And Rotate Model ( ) Have features similar
activities Move tool (), Mirror ( ), And Rotate ( ), Except that they affect the entire model (all
layers). You can also determine the rate of the entire model using the tool Scale Model ( ).
2 Enter the center rotation (hold the Shift key when you click to rotate replica model). 3
4 Click on the end of the rotation or enter new CYA last corner.
2 Enter two points make a straight line crossing the image you want to create symmetric models (hold
the Shift key when you click to make image copies symmetric model).
3 Scale Model dialog box, enter the factor proportion and click OK.
2 Choose Edit> Selection Properties, or right click and select Properties Selection. 3
Specify the property value in the Properties dialog box and click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
1 Double-click the drawing tool or the tool selected, choose Tools> Current Tool Properties. 2
Specify the default value of properties in the Properties dialog box and click OK.
Now, when you use the tool, it will draw the object with the default characteristics have been identified
regul
ation
s.
Note: Changing the default characteristics of the object drawing tools do not alter the characteristics
of the objects that have been drawn.
5.13 Add the calibration curve, the size, and the note text
Line Tool ( ), Dimension ( ), And Text ( ) Are used to add information to the plan view.
The object is not part of the structural model and RAM Concept program does not consider them
when creating or grid computing results. As with all objects, line objects, and text size of the layer in
which they are drawn.
Draw a straight
line:
2 Click on the start line (or enter the coordinates in the command line). 3
Click at the end of the line (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
4 Click at the point where the line size offset will be located.
Draw text:
Selection.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For example, you can open the document for the Wall Below the Input Mesh layer by choosing
Layers> Mesh Input> Tables> Wall Below.
Customize columns and rows by clicking the Customize button on the table. In the Customize dialog
box, you can select rows and columns can be seen in the table. Check columns to view and check
mark the column.
Show or column
marks:
2 In the Customize dialog box, display columns, select the check box. To hide columns, select the
check box is not selected.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 Click OK.
You can resize columns by changing the width of the column header.
1 Place the cursor on the line between two columns in the table header and left-
click. 2 Drag the table header to the new width and release the left mouse button.
The table will print as displayed on the screen so that your column width settings will appear similar on
paper.
To sort and classify goods according to values in a column, click on the column heading once to sort in
ascending order. Click the column header again to sort and classify according to descending order.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
7 Choose Unit
RAM Concept program allows you to work with three system units: U.S., SI and MKS.
Many designers, the U.S. system of units known as "conventional U.S. unit", and others are called
"unit rule". The SI and MKS metric units, the MKS uses weight rather than volume.
Depending on the system you want to use must comply with the rules, local practices.
The actual selection of the more subjective. For example, after selecting the U.S. system, a designer
can use the unit to load the default scope pounds per minute (feet) square, and others can change
recipes to use on a square feet (1 kip by 453.59 kg).
7.1 Unit
RAM Concept program performs all calculations with the SI system of units. The program will convert
the property values in SI units before calculating equivalent. When finished, the program will convert
the value back to the unit chose to report.
It can combine multiple units (eg, pounds and feet), but should not do so.
7.2 Choose
units
A new file with the default application that you can change at any time.
Unit depending on how the default file creation. When you use a template or file is available,
The default unit is the unit source.
When you create a file using the New command, you can just select the default unit for ACI 318 (U.S.
or SI). For other rules, the default SI units.
Change units:
1 Choose Criteria>
Unit.
o Choose unit system by clicking on the U.S., SI, MKS or above the window.
Note: Often there is a long list of option units. Scroll drop-down menu to see the options.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: When using this feature may lead to errors, because when you assume the latter value will be
eliminated exactly zero.
1 Choose Criteria>
Unit.
Note: You can also turn off the value of drawing as Fr and Fs with plot menu. See "Setting up the
draw results "on page 137.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
8 Choose notation
convention
RAM Concept program allows you to choose the sign convention for loads, analysis and feedback.
RAM Concept program using Cartesian coordinate system with the following notation
conventions for the axis:
Conventional notation tells you how to enter parameters like RAM Concept program and display the
results happen. For example, conventional symbols of applied load order data entered value is positive
or negative.
It should be noted that the sign change settings without changing the actual value of any data which has
been previously identified. For example, if the load down +10 team is determined when the program
RAM Concept with conventional positive sign down load and then load conventional notation is
changed to positive direction, the load value at This will be reported as -10 kip, but the load will still be
down 10 kip load. Similarly, changing the conventional notation does not affect the true value of the
results.
When you increase the load after changing the conventional notation, you must comply with the new
notation conventions.
Conventional symbols depending on how your default file creation. If you use a template or file is
available, the convention will be the default symbol of power.
When you create a file (not from the template), conventionally denoted as
follows:
Positive load
Figure 8-1 From left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My.
four quadrants).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
to the rules.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Positive Analysis
Figure 8-2 Top row, from left to right: Cutting force element standing, bending element, element axis,
deflection
standing. Bottom row, from left to right: Power cut, twist, side deflection, deflection
angle.
Horizontal shear force in the x-positive cut positive (equivalent to cutting force on the positive x-
positive).
Twisting torque on the positive x-axis x-positive (equivalent to the torque on the y-axis negative-
positive).
The positive
feedback
Figure 8-3 From left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, coordinate axis, Mx, My,
Mz.
to the rules.
Note: The only difference in these parameters between the default and the positive load feedback is
positive Fz. That is because the load usually downward if positive, and the feedback along often
upward if positive.
You can change the conventional symbols for any load or any results, but each time only one.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Changing notation
conventions:
1 Choose Criteria>
Signs.
2 Positive change each sign by clicking on the appropriate graphical notation. Direction change.
8.2 Conventional
drawing symbols
Except for vertical deflection, the line chart showing positive results are plotted on the axes. This
ensures that the chart is not upside down. For the axis parallel to the y axis (and thus no direction "the
backbone"), the line chart for a positive result on the left axis.
Note: The chart lines for positive vertical deflection below the axis.
The perspective is drawn with a positive result on the global z direction (considered positive depends
on the conventions of Value plotted symbols). For example, the perspective of deflection shown
positive upward deflections.
You can use the supplied material or create your own. For example, you may want to re-design with the
durability of concrete floor was poured reality check on the construction site. In this case, you will
create a new concrete mixture is determined with such strength.
View materials:
9.2.1 Concrete
Mixtures
Name Mixed Use label to identify concrete mixture. Name mixture is not necessarily the
durable concrete. Each columns, walls, and beams are the properties of
concrete mixtures.
The density of the concrete mass density (used to calculate the weight of itself and sometimes the
elastic modulus).
f'ci intensity characteristic cylindrical samples of mixed concrete when prestressing effect (also
known as the initial intensity).
Note: f'ci and f'c be used for all codes except BS8110.
fcui cube strength characteristics of the concrete mix when prestressing effect (also known as the
initial intensity).
Negative Poisson's ratio of the rate of deformation across the axial deformation of the axial load
materials. Typically 0.2 to concrete.
Ec Calc method is used to calculate the deformation module (Young's Modulus) (for both initial
strength characteristics and intensity characteristics). It is possible to follow a code of rules are
listed or defined value.
Eci Modulus of deformation used by the user to determine the initial cross-sectional analysis.
Ec of the user module deformed by the user are used to determine the global analysis, section
analysis and design activities intensity.
Name Use label system to identify PT system. Often described systems, such as size and fiber
links.
Aps area of the fiber cross section. Because usually composed of seven wire strands, so
more complex section DD2 / 4.
FSE assumed effective stress in the fiber after reduction. Use size to override this assumption.
See "The Size" on page 121 for more information.
fiber.
Width width or diameter pipe tubes reinforced with prestressed adhesion to concrete.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Maximum number of threads a tube maximum number of fiber reinforced prestressed concrete
can stick with (using 1 strand for prestressed reinforced with concrete does not stick).
Minimum radius minimum radius vertical arrangement allows the cable bundle on the field. You
should consult with a local supplier PT. Non-zero value for the radius test for the PT system.
Stress size / anchor Friction / Friction pendulum / Friction angle / distance off size / long term
loss
Use this feature to reduce friction calculations. They are not affected unless the use of prestressed
reinforced stimulus. See "The size characteristics" on page 121,Chapter 25, "Defining core prestressed
" for more information.
9.2.3 Bracing
Using bar name labels to identify enhanced sound. Typically refers to the diameter of the bar.
bar.
Names Using SSR label system to identify SSR system (stud type shear reinforcement). Often
described systems, such as the size of the nail.
The area of cross-section area of the nail itself nail is used in the calculations
durability
The area of the nail head nail size, generally about 10 times the surface area compared to the
nails. Concept program parameters used to calculate the diameter of the nail to smooth the gap.
The smallest gap smoothly smallest distance between the nails along the length of the price
help. Design will not be achieved if this value is
too large.
Distance The distance is determined desire to design nails SSR. If the parameter is set to
"none", the program will automatically Concept distance nail designs.
Rounding distance Determine the number of nails in the nail design all are rounded down. For
example, the identification of greater number of larger design had to be the same distance, the
ability to create "groups" designs in different columns.
Number nail at least one bar Determine the number of nails at least Concept design program in
any public bar. This can be useful in some situations. For example, if a column of the small
protrusions that designers do not want to increase SSR, you can increase this number at least
nail designs to avoid the bar on that side.
You can add materials to determine the characteristics of the concrete mix, the sound system and
enhanced PT. You can remove the material on the condition that at least one of each type of material.
Additional material:
2 Concrete Mix Click Add or Add PT System, or Add reforcing Bar, or Add SSR System. 3 In
the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new material and click OK.
Enter the property values for each cell in the new row.
2 Concrete Mix Click Delete, Delete PT System, or reinforcing bar Delete, or Delete SSR System.
• The system does not stick to the concrete, yarn lubricated sheath inserted in the plastic layer.
• The adhesive system for the concrete: bare fiber in the mortar tube.
The seven-wire strands typical coiled together. Generally there are two types of fiber size
used in the construction of the building:
To know more about the system following stress, see Chapter 25, "Determination of prestressed
reinforced".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
10 Load
Determination
Load a set of points, lines and surface load is applied as a group.
Determine the load characteristics of the load window. Draw the actual load on the load plan view.
You can add loads (eg seismic, snow, earth and wind).
It can remove the load (unless the particular type, as described in section "Payload type"
below).
RAM Concept Program designations can perform load (or ignored) and you determine the coefficient
of the process control in the load window.
This static load is the weight of the concrete itself. All other static loads are extra.
Load balancing and Tendons anchor tensioned internal impact loads on concrete structures. We
call this combination of load balancing loads for conventional strain designed to balance or offset
after the load acting on the other.
Static loads super super load is static load theory considering the effects of compression on the
rack structure when trying to deform due to the tension after. Many people use the word
"women" instead of "indeterminate". Loads are not necessarily women. Concept program
calculates the impact of ultra-static load for all objects (elements, the dome base, the rack, the
part design, design strips segments and puncture test) as described in section "Download after
significant strain "on page 312.
Temporary construction loads (when the effects of stress) complex this extra load before the
impact of the effects of stress fiber bundles following stretch. Seldom used this kind of load, and
you should not consider it for the reinforced concrete structure.
The static load of the additional static load acting on the structure PT after-effects of stress fiber
bundles following stretch. They are simply additional static load for the reinforced concrete
structure.
(cumulative)
Load (ceiling)
North wind load operation due to wind load combination in the north-south direction (only for
default panels).
East wind load operation due to wind load combination in the east-south (only for the default
the plate).
Seismic load limits north complex seismic loads due to the north-south (only for default panels).
Load limits on the east seismic load combination due to earthquake in south-east direction (only
for default panels).
See loads:
Analysis of redundancy is used only for super static load as described in section "Download The
default key ".
For more information on the SE side, see "Analysis of self-balancing" on page 313,Chapter 46, "The
note analysis".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Form factor ratio impact loads are positioned in the load pattern when performing load
calculations pattern. See "Load pattern" for more information.
Coefficient of form factor does not affect the load is positioned in the load pattern when
performing load calculations pattern.
Note: Program Concept ignore the factor pattern coefficients if both have the same value. Both
parameters set to 2.0 coefficient similar to setting both parameters to 1.0 coefficient
See "Rebuilding the load combinations" on page 35 for more information on how to create the
Concept program load combination.
Self weight load of concrete herself textures are created with this kind of load. Always have one
and only one load of this.
Balance As discussed in section "Load default". Always have one and only one load of this.
Super static As shown in the "Load default". Always have one and only one load of this.
static load stress load of this additional load is before the impact of the effects of stress fiber
bundles following stretch.
Seldom used this kind of load and generally not be considered for different load conditions. You do not
need to consider it for the reinforced concrete structure.
Static load this type of fixed static load unless the load from the weight of the body.
Load (Maybe rebate) this kind of work load typical load floor can rebate. See Chapter 48, "notes
down load" for more information on how to down load each rule handle this kind of load.
Load (can not rebate) this kind of work load typical load floor can not rebate (typical payload
assembly - see "Snow load, parking and assembly").
Load (cumulative) load this kind of typical load floor can be reduced when using cumulative
reduction rules in particular. To reduce the work load for all the code, so using this kind of load
on load of parking is appropriate (see section "Snow load, parking and assembly").
Load (ceiling) Load This type ceilings typical load - except snow - maybe rebate. RAM Concept
Program rebate never done this loads (RAM Structural System can reduce the load of this
extract).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The other load load load of this nature have not been determined. RAM Concept program ever
consider this load unless the load combination is created or edited by hand (or load
combinations created in the previous file). All loads from the Floor version 2.3 and earlier, and
RAM Concept Program version 1.3 and earlier (except static load balancing and redundancy)
are of this type, usually the kind of load changes weight of the load from the previous version of
the program more useful.
Wind load operation of this wind load at the operational level. Assuming wind load operation
N is equivalent to the wind load limit N (if any).
Wind load limit this kind of wind loads in limited supply. Assuming wind load limit N equivalent
wind load operation N (if any).
Seismic activity can load this kind of seismic loads in the operational level. Load Assumptions
seismic activity N equivalent seismic load limit N (if any).
Seismic load limit this kind of seismic loads in limited supply. Assuming seismic load limit equal
to N Load seismic activity N (if any).
Most of the loads are also available in the variants "move". See "Di transfer the load type " for more
information.
Note: All load types except self weight, balance and redundancy can be used for more than one load.
Generally snow load should draw the snow load on the load layer (Can not concessions).
Loads of parking and assembly to the appropriate factor, you should draw the load on the
parking garage layer load (cumulative) load assembly and load layer (not concessions).
See load reduction are listed below for more information on how a particular rule handle this kind of
load:
Almost all types of loads presented above are available with variations "move". The variations
described moving loads moving from the level structure considered (by columns or walls). Some loads
are not available with variations movement, or with slightly different variations on the move. That is:
Balancing mobility variation of this is to load the load generated from the cable bundle on the
structural level review. Unlike the kind of balance does not move: this kind of complex loads
may exist, the load without load generated from the cable bundle, and this kind of load can be
adjusted by the user. This type of load to be considered when calculating the impact of
redundancy.
Static load stress load of this type can not be moved variables.
Changes of load:
1 Choose Criteria>
Loadings.
Change analysis:
1 Choose Criteria>
Loadings.
appears.
3 Choose a new
analysis.
Add loads:
3 Enter a name for the new load in the dialog box and click OK Loading
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
5 Enter the form factor and the form factor of the new load.
Delete
payload:
A sample load creates a sample load (not visible) only was filtered load for each load standard. The
coefficient of the sample and the sample did not control the filtering process.
The inclusion and exclusion in the area of load patterns determine the sample weight. The Concept of
internal load area model with the form factor and the external load area model with no form factor.
Actual sample size depends on the finite element mesh. See Chapter 20, "Creating sample load", To be
explained further.
Figure 10-2 Sample loads for maximum positive moment (around YY) at the end of the rhythm
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 10-3 Sample audio load for maximum torque (around YY) in the first column.
For the picture above, if the load is 100 psf, according to the form factor is 0.8 and not the form factor
is 0.1, then the two load patterns generated with a load of 80 psf in the area of the tile ball and the load
10 psf in the rest of the.
Concept program using the sample load for a load - along with a full load - to determine how the design
of the strip segment design, the design and the puncture test.
Whether you use it or not, the sample load is still the issue of rules that you are using and assess your
building. Some rules allow you to bypass the load patterns for certain types of structural load and
intensity. Normally you would use the appropriate template loads produce torque, shear forces and the
response is very close to the moment, shear force and the greatest response.
In most cases, you just do the load pattern. There are also cases where you make model for other
loads.
For modeling the load, usually in the form factor is 0.75 and the value-form coefficient value is
usually zero.
For not load modeling, the two-factor should be 1.0. In special cases, the form factor can exceed a
value of 1.0.
When in doubt, the form factor and the sample should be 1.0. This leads to no sample load.
You can move most of the load using the load model.
1 Specify the form factor is 10 and the form factor is not zero.
2 Specify the load factor (in the window load combination) to "move" the load by one-tenth of the
actual value.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Program Concept still load combination analysis with all loads in the envelope. This is the
reason for the rate coefficient of the form, not the form factor and weight-reducing effects of the "load
all" in the load combination.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The default load combination of program RAM Concept depending on how you are creating a file.
When you use a template or file is available, then the default load combination is the source.
When you create a file using the New command, the default load combination depending on the
selected rule. The load combination is often appropriate for the selected rules, but you may need to
modify the system of adding loads and loads.
The default load combination for each rule as described in detail in the relevant chapters:
RAM Concept program will not automatically update when the load factor of the load changes. RAM
Concept Program disclosing only the load factor when creating the load combination.
Dialog box appears asking you to specify whether the load combination for the high or the foundation
system.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new load combination
and click OK.
Dialog box appears asking you to specify the plan view that you want to create program RAM
Concept (the stress, deflection and force Japan Version). The plan view appears in the list of new load
combination.
4 Choose the plan view that you want to create and click OK.
6 Enter the load factor and the load factor for each alternating loads in load combinations.
Delete
payload:
Select the load combination you want to delete and click OK.
• Group party: This kind of flooring is used for part of the horizontal bearing system [especially
the foundation system (the nail plate)].
Note: The primary purpose of the load combination of the extracts reduced the number of horizontal
load combination. A secondary purpose is to provide another easy way how to produce the results of
soil bearing pressure.
• Stress - zero: the load combination does not have the alternating load factor and not see Review
sample load.
Parameters declared operational rules management rules declare parameters used to calculate
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
the design. Can combine up to four parameters declared operational rules for each load
combination. See Chapter 12, "Choosing The design rules" to be explained.
Coefficient contours alternating You should only use this if you factor out the relevant principles
throughout. No declaration of zero coefficients that do not understand how to use. If you are
unsure, report by the corresponding load factor. See "The factor which alternating ".
In fact, the result of a combination of load groups envelope of all the results from the single load
combination that can not be N, when N is the number of loads for horizontal loads have to.
Complex linear load group has a number of standard and alternate load for each load level is not, and a
load factor for the standard and alternate horizontal load of choice. No repeat zero stress.
Complex load stress group - with a zero load factor for each load unit is not horizontal, and a single
load factor for horizontal load of choice. Having repeated stress - zero when needed for load
combination may not be visible component (inside), and will be the outline of all the load combination
with a combine. Do not consider load pattern.
example,
In this case, the structure should be analyzed with and without full load. But can accomplish this by
creating a different load combinations, RAM Concept program is a much simpler solution - which is
how the alternating factor (AEF).
Figure 11-3 The support beams static load (not shown) and load (shown). Load torque is reduced
when positive rate. With the use of a lower coefficient AEF corresponding load factor, you create a
load combination to load the concession. It should be noted that the AEF system affects the entire
load, not just load on the beam.
Conceptually, the program considers Concept of alternating boundary by analyzing time load
combination 2L (where L is the number of payload) - one for each permutation of the load factor and
alternating coefficient contours for all loads. Then the program will be surrounded Concept design
strip bars, rods and sections designed jet shear puncture for all load combination analysis. Program
Concept Factoring lines used later to design.
You can also draw lines around the bar or display them in the table.
Concept fully consider the impact load model while considering the load factor.
It should be noted that the overall sound analysis program that concept is not used as the sound design -
such as the bending moment and the deflection standards - saved only for the load combination
considered the standard load factor .
As mentioned above, you should only use the envelope system of alternating smoothly if you
understand the principles involved. Do not declare them to zero without knowing how to use them. If
you are unsure, you should declare them with the corresponding load factor.
Figure 11-4 suggested using the ratio of intensity to design ACI318-05 is the load combination factors.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 11-4 is the load combination factor, load factor and the coefficient of alternating boundary.
• The load factor for each standard and • Standard load factor for each load
alternate load • repeat as needed zero stress
Applic
• Do not repeat the zero stress • Skip load samples
ation
• Considering the sample load
• The load factor for each standard and • Standard load factor for each load
alternating horizontal load is not level is not
• The load factor for the standard and • Standard load factor for selected types
alternate horizontal load of selected of horizontal load
• Do not repeat the zero stress • repeat as needed zero stress
• Considering the sample load • Skip load samples
Group • No results for the base of the arches, • No results for the base of the arches,
domes base line, the pillow, the domes base line, the pillow, the
pillow, the wall. pillow, the wall.
• No results "Standard" for any • No results "standard" for any
any number of public any number of
• See Figure 11-2 for more information. • See Figure 11-2 for more information.
For example, ACI 318-05 11-1 Elevated file load floor with additional horizontal
To simplify the example, four load has been removed from the standard file.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 11-5 Table ACI 318-05 load for Advanced Flooring - three additional wind loads (static loads
and stresses and three works were removed Tais)
After adding and deleting several loads, load combinations have been recreated. See "Creating the
structure load combination ".
Add load combination "Wind is the coefficient LC: 1.2D + 1.6W + 0.5Lr f1L +", as shown in Figure
11-6.
Figure 11-6 Load combination is made to: The wind is the factor LC: 1.2D + 1.6W + f1L + 0.5Lr
Concept Program expanded this load combination and calculates the load combination: 1 Static load 1.2
+ 1.2 + 1.0 Super Static Static Load + 0.5 Live Load another (possible rebate) + 1.6 Wind
east
2 Static load 1.2 + 1.2 + 1.0 Super Static Static Load + 0.5 Live Load another (possible rebate) - Wind
1.6
east
3 Static load 1.2 + 1.2 + 1.0 Super Static Static Load + 0.5 Live Load another (possible rebate) + 1.6
Wind north
4 Static load 1.2 + 1.2 + 1.0 Super Static Static Load + 0.5 Live Load another (possible rebate) - 1.6
north wind
5 Static load 1.2 + 1.2 + 1.0 Super Static Static Load + 0.5 Live Load another (possible rebate) + 1.6
trade winds
6 Static load 1.2 + 1.2 + 1.0 Super Static Static Load + 0.5 Live Load another (possible rebate) - 1.6
trade winds
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
RAM Concept Program also uses the same approach. Sort and classify norm in each group rules and
apply them on the chart how the force of the load combination. Thus, the design criteria of one or more
rules affect how the force diagram of one or more load combinations.
For example, a standard formula for the bending strength and durability cut is a set of standards for
durability. The concept of this standard apply to the diagram how all the load combination "is the
coefficient" (or limit). A durability standards not applied to the load combination operations.
Most of the floor or the component is designed to use one or more of the norm. For example, the floor
is usually stress after stress testing of the initial activity, stress and endurance activities with different
load combinations.
Assign each load combination is the standard design of windows operating load combination.
1 The load combination which creates the chart for the total force (and torque, cutting force, the axial
force and torque).
2 All charts cover the same load combination with the standard design turn around.
This is how the chart design standards.
3 For each chart include standard design, design strips create the chart how the design capacity
standards.
4 Each strip designed to determine the appropriate rules for each standard design. The range of design
features affects the use of specific rules.
5 The design rules and checks are applied to the chart include standard design section.
6 A design brief surrounds the reinforcement requirements and status sectional chart for all
How sectional design standards.
For
exam
ple:
The following example shows how to select the program RAM Concept design rules for beams ACI
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Two load combination which creates the chart for the total force.
• In standard design activities (design work, the design minimum standards, minimum design by
the user, the design strength and design flexibility) how to create charts from the load
combination important.
• Each design chart how to create a standard chart how the design standards section.
• The design features the band "System structure: beams" and "be seen as the force behind"
identified
the following rules apply from ACI 318-02:
o Design strength: Rules 18.7.2 (flexural strength) and 11.4 and 11.5 (intensity
shear) is used to beam accounts.
• These rules are applied to the chart include standard design section.
• The reinforcement requirements and status sectional chart for all sections include design
standards turn around for a design brief.
Names Related to the standard design. In most cases, similar to those operating rules, but there
may be exceptions (see Additional design standards - below).
The rules for minimum reinforcement (shrinkage, details, etc.) in more geometric stress or torque level.
Do not include shear reinforcement.
Reinforcement steel reinforcement ratio based on user-defined. View the presentation of the design
features in the range Page 84 the 21.5.
Stress Testing the PT floor only after prestressing effect (if static load is minimal).
Design activities
Design of continuous
operation
Design intensity
These rules ensure sufficient cross section bending and shear strength for the torque is multiplied by
the coefficient (or limit), and the minimum shear reinforcement.
Design flexibility
Used in a nail file (nail plate) to create favorable conditions for how the graph of soil bearing pressure.
Do not use any activity rules.
(1. Static and Dynamic; 2. Static, Dynamic Extraction and Snow is reduced; 3. Seismic)
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
then you can keep the results separated by creating two new design standards with names like "Snow"
and "Earthquake" using the rules durability. This way, you can observe the particular requirements of
reinforced durability.
You can delete the design standards do not apply to simplify file. For example, in ACI 318-02, the
original design activity and design activity requires continuous stretch after floor no. Another example
is DL + Design 0.25LL not require UBC data is not used or not.
3 Enter a name for the new design standards in the Add Rule dialog box and click OK Set
Design.
It will show a dialog box asking you to specify the plan view that you want to create (top and bottom
reinforcement, shear reinforcement and Breaches).
4 Choose the plan view that you want to create and click OK.
Choose the design criteria you want to delete and click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
13 Using CAD
Drawings
You can quickly determine if the model geometry with CAD files (with file name or open rong.dwg.
Dxf) is available for use as background. You can follow the CAD drawing tools to create objects that
facilitate the creation of the finite element mesh. You can also use CAD drawings to locate objects such
as payload. The tool snaps to help the implementation of the imported CAD drawing easier.
Note: RAM Concept program itself does not know the meaning of real linear motifs.
However, do not necessarily have to use the CAD file. If the floor is not too complicated, or drawings
are not available, you should skip this chapter. For the same model range does not warrant the use of
CAD files, it is better to use Wizard Strip.
You can enter the drawing at any time. Enter a drawing to override any drawings that were previously
entered. RAM Concept program can work with the files. Dwg or. Dxf. It is best to use the file. Dwg.
Units File dialog box will appear with a list of units. Units related to CAD files, not the files Concept.
Note: You can import CAD drawings for a set of units in a model with other units.
When you enter the drawing file, you can see the projection of Layer Standard Drawing Import. You
should check the rate of the plane is correct or not.
2 Click the Zoom Extent ( ) To ensure that you observe the entire CAD surface.
3 Select the Dimension tool ( ) And draw a straight line between two points size can snap a
known distance. Appearing as the distance between two points is a size.
If this size is not as expected, the rate of the file can not be imported correctly. Consider enter
drawings for the various units to remedy this error.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
You can enter the drawing can be seen on any flat surface through Visible Objects dialog box. Often
you want to make the drawing visible in the plane Mesh Standard Input (to determine the geometry of
the floor), and possibly in the plane load (for the location of the line and point loads) . You can turn off
some layers if they impede CAD drawings. If you accidentally open an architectural drawing, it can
disable the feature. See "Control the display "on page 12 for more information on how to make objects
visible marks or objects.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
RAM Concept Program can enter information and concrete structures from the payload RAM
Structural System (9:01 or higher version) into RAM Concept files.
RAM Concept program can also support component of the force back to RSS.
Figure 14-1 and Table 14-1 presents the relationship between the selected layer, and the type of the
imported version. It should be noted that the underlying story is set. For example, the 2nd floor is a
floor stand high on the second floor.
Figure 14-1 The version shown above (A, B, C, D) will be entered in the selection below.
Type Date
Floor
Mong Nail the
high
Wedn A C
esday
Mond B D
1
ay
Table 14-1 Relationship between selected stories, type of publication, and the imported version.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The determination of the perimeter of the selected type. Only with the support of the RAM Structural
System in circumference import will be imported. For example, in Figure 14-1, If you enter the first
floor to the height of the declared parameters "column above," the two farthest right column between
the 1st floor and 2nd floor will not be imported because they are not located within the perimeter of
the floor of the high- 1.
1 copy
Any columns (below and / or above) with epicenter located inside the perimeter
enter. 5 Walls
Any public walls (below and / or above) is located in the focal line or cut across the circumference of
any kind whatsoever.
6 Grid
Note: All structural components are Layer Mesh Import into RAM Concept program. Grid Drawing
Layer Import entered.
The specific components of the load components are ignored when importing. The components are
ignored depending on the type, whether the part is supported or not, and whether the force component
from gravity loads and horizontal loads.
The following table summarizes the components forces entered the base and the
height.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For purposes of the Table 14-2, Concept as any column, or wall bracing will be supported if it is based
on columns or walls.
The wall is converted into power load at each end of the wall. On the wall in the set can be "sponsored"
by the different (because of a possible head against the wall or column and the other end resting on
beams can), in this case, the first human ever to enter Last seen as the front-end support conditions
separately.
1 Download directly
gravity
The gravity load point, line and area information are directly applicable to imported copies.
Table 14-3 shows how the case load RSS painted the Concept layer payload.
Case load RSS Layer Payload RAM Concept
Static load Static load
Load Skip (entered as a separate load 3)
Works can download rebate Works can download rebate
Works can not download Works can not download rebate
rebate
Cumulative load Cumulative load
Events at Pearl Events at Pearl
Static load building Static load building
Building load Ignore
Static load volume Ignore
Concept Active load power is transmitted from the above components of the RSS. Including weight
loads itself into the force transmitted to the load. Loads are entered as point loads on the separate layer
payload concept.
A layer of load power transmission concept is created for each load case RSS, as in Table 14-3, But
with a string "(transmission)" have names attached. For example, the load transfer from the static load
cases are entered RSS Layer Load "Static load (transmission)" Concept. The load layer
"(transmission)" Concept not be created if the load does not enter power transmission.
Enter the horizontal force components (such as wind and seismic) from components above and below
to be entered as a point load. Load Layer ingredients into a new load for each load case is analyzed in
RSS. Concept will create a name for the new layer payload from the user's label and loads of RSS.
Note: The load nails imported from the structural system RAM will always be in entering concession.
For this reason, you should always choose the load reduction rule is "None" in this file.
Note: Concept program can not enter data accurately if not through the RSS file operations "test
data" in RAM Modeler module. We recommend that your RSS file not guilty before entering Concept
program.
If the file does not open RAM Concept, the dialog box "Open RAM Structural System Database" will
appear. Browse and select the database file RSS (. Rss) and click OK.
When you select a database file RSS valid, the RAM Structural System dialog box in Figure 14-2
will appear.
RSS has been selected file appears after "File" at the top of the
window.
You can click on the "Browse" button at the top of the window to select another file with the file
browser.
Note: If you select the file to the previous version 9.0, will show error and you will be returning to file
browser. Click on the Cancel button to cancel the import.
Note: If you are running version 9 RSS, Select the database files with the extensions RSS. Ram.
Dialog box unavailable "Below Slab Columns", "Below Slab Walls", "Beams" and "Openings and
Penetrations" for the foundation system.
Dialog box unavailable "Direct Gravity Loads" for the foundation system. 5
After entering your RSS file, the dialog box enter RAM status, similar to that shown in Figure 14-3,
Will appear with brief messages and any warning.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The determination of the geometry and load RSS was entered into RAM Concept Program.
Now, you can create the finite element mesh. See Chapter 17, "Creating Grid".
Note: If you are entering, there will be different dialog box appears with the warning.
Note: Enter the horizontal load analysis from the RSS model has a large number of cases of horizontal
loads Concept will make the program create a large number of load combination, resulting in delayed
implementation .
Maybe it will take the composition changes and load the program RAM Concept entering RSS file, so
be careful to avoid loss of information.
If the file loads Concept is currently incompatible with RSS payload will be imported, a dialog box
similar to the Figure 14-4 will ask you whether you want to keep or delete the current load.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
If you have identified (painted) Load Concept program suggested that clear, then you should keep that
load of Concept program proposed deletions. If you want to export the jet from the pre-load is
available in RSS, you'll need to copy the load from the source to the load corresponding to the load
that RSS will be entered (after you've deleted by Hand loads are not RSS).
Note: If you use the Export Geometry characteristic structural system RAM (the 34.2) Before you
enter, you will always see this warning. Workflow proposal is drawing loads of RSS or drawing loads
of Concept program after entering from the RSS, with this workflow, you can safely remove the load
request.
RAM Concept program would also suggest you should determine if you are required to make the load
combinations and design standards, as shown in Figure 14-5.
• Recreate: the load combination and the design criteria in the file will be recreated RAM
Concept
• Not Reproduce: Load new cases are added to the file RAM Concept, but not in the load
combination.
Note: When you enter a specific component, such as the beams, the entire group of entities that will be
removed from the file before importing RAM Concept. For example, if you enter the girders, beams,
all in RAM Concept files will be deleted first. Any beams that you added manually in the program
RAM Concept will be lost. If you choose not to enter the beam, the beam of RAM Concept files will not
be affected when the file is imported.
Note: if any group is selected loads, it loads all of the imported layer payload will be deleted. Any
weight that you added manually load the layer will be entered will be lost. You can choose to
reconstruct the load combination or not.
RAM Concept program always ask you to re-enter to confirm, because the information can be lost. The
program will warn you if data is entered will differ significantly from the data has been entered before,
or important information is lost or not. For example, RAM Concept program alerts you when to re-enter
the system after entering the basement the previous high, or vice versa.
A dialog box will open with the file name of the file that you have the latest RSS into RAM Concept
this file.
The file can be a different RSS files, which can have significant influence (and possibly negative) to
RAM Concept model.
RAM Structural System Import dialog box will appear with a list of options. The default option will be
the type of floor and the latest entries.
Load new confirmation box may appear in the present load RSS file that is not in RAM Concept
existing files. Click Replace, Add, or Cancel.
Confirmation box appears warning about the differences with the data previously entered.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 14-6 Examples of warning entry operations with the level and type of different textures
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Appears RSS Import Status dialog box with the message and warning
• Not all the information is stored in a database system RAM structures are can be transmitted to
RAM Concept Program.
• Program RAM Concept modeling data RAM Structural System using rules Construction ACI
318-99, ACI 318-02, and BS 8110: 1997. A database system structure RAM using BS 6399 or
Eurocode will be imported using building codes BS 8110: 1997, if not used appropriately ACI
rules.
• RAM Concept program does not model the thermal resistance of the beams.
• RAM Concept program modeling the fixed columns if column structural system RAM is
arranged along the axis formation or side.
• RAM Concept Program only model with fixed height wall. RAM Concept program will create a
wall with the average height of the wall in the RAM Structural System.
• Do not enter the horizontal load acting on the structure in RAM frame analysis.
• Concept ignore the hole in the wall modeled in RSS version 10.
14.6.2 Default
RAM Concept program uses the following default characteristics are not defined in the RAM Structural
System.
The beam
Column
• Compressive true.
• Roller is not real, except the nail on the.
• The column on the foundation are tied at the top despite the declared parameters in the database
RAM.
Walls
14.6.3 Assumptions
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• The force components are reported as two effective point load at the end of the wall similar to
the wall power and torque.
See Table 14-4 and Table 14-5 to draw the RAM load cases and the load of the power supply and RAM
Concept program.
Load RSS
Wind Wind Activity *
Seismic Seismic * Limit
Other Seismic * Limit
Virtual Ignore
assumed to be
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Staad Interface Concept allows you to run immediately to export data or save data to a file for
importing into Concept GCFF later.
If Staad file changes (can load or change the column size), you can update files Concept by exporting
to Staad information.
Please see the instructions Staad for more information about Staad interface.
RAM Concept Program can enter information Staad by four ways: 7 Concept
9 In the File menu of the Concept, select New from Staad items GCFF file to create a new file.
10 In the File menu of the Concept, selected items from Staad GCFF Updte file to update files Concept
opened.
When creating a new file from Staad information - in New from the File menu item or by Staad Staad
GCFF Concept launch, the dialog as shown in Figure 15-1 appearance.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The first option on the dialog window similar to creating any new files Concept and no matter what
new here.
The box at the bottom of the window allows you to enter one or more layers of the following
information: the version (including beams), walls, columns and load.
When updating a file with information Staad New Concept - by Category updates from the File menu
or by Staad Staad GCFF Concept launch, the dialog box shown in Figure 15-2 appearance.
The choice of window similar to the options presented in the "The choice New files in RAM Concept
program ", But is somewhat different behavior by manipulating the "update". For example, if you
select the "Columns", then the current column will be deleted and new columns are determined by
Staad information. If you do not select "Column", the Concept columns in the file will not change
anything.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
16 Structure
Determination
A simplest and easiest to identify concrete structures is to use automated tools nets RAM Concept
program (also known as "Mesher"). This method requires you to specify the bearings, and the
(different thickness), the beam and the gap with the Mesher object used to create finite element
models. Perform this operation on layer Plane Mesh Standard Input.
If you import CAD drawings, drawings on display Input Mesh surface texture before
painting.
16.2 Columns
and walls
RAM Concept Program for drawing the single layer model determined by which column and on the
bottom and side walls. The no bearing on the slope, only horizontal bearings and bending resistance.
Height The distance from the central vertical element of the first column
to the remote.
The width is measured along the axis of the column r. Declare to zero for
circular columns.
Angle plane angle is measured counterclockwise from the x-axis global clock. Define r axis of the
column (and usually zero).
Bending stiffness coefficient is used to edit bending stiffness without changing the size or height.
For example, you can expect an edge crack and rotating column of more than one column, and
you can declare the value of this parameter is 0.5. You can use BSF to increase the stiffness of the
column, but not very effective.
Layout There is a link near the torque (around the x and y axis) between the column and, if not,
be pinned.
There is far arrange a link torque (around the x and y axis) at the far end, if it is not pinned.
Note the column compression to extend the z direction by Hooke's law, otherwise there is no
compression. The column compression usually results in more accurate.
16.4 Draw
colum
n
Each column is positioned with x and y coordinates. Two columns can not have the same coordinates
unless a column above and below the column.
Note: Be sure that you work on Mesh Input layer, not the layer element.
Note: See the "Set the default properties" on page 18 to know more relevant information.
Draw
colum
ns:
). 2 Click on the
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
middle column.
2 Choose Edit> Past. Paste the new object in the column at the same position as the original object in
the column
first. The column is selected this paste operation.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 Support Changing characteristics Declare parameters from "lower" to "on" in the column properties
dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the set of parameters, the Declare Support columns are not allowed to
copy the model runs correctly. If you have copied a large number, then turn right to delete the second
column in each position (column a).
Height The distance from the central vertical element to the wall at the far end.
Thickn
ess
Shear wall "Lock" to the wall horizontally and thus keep the back, if not, could the "slip" through
the wall.
Set near the moment there is a link between the wall and the wall of the r axis; otherwise be
pinned.
Set away from there a link torque axis r of the wall at the far end, if it is not pinned.
Notice pressurized wall to extend the z direction by Hooke's Law, otherwise there is no
compression. The pressurized walls often provide more accurate results.
16.6 Painting
the wall
Tools column wall similar tool unless the tool to use than the straight line. Wall can run through the
column, or other wall cross.
Note: Be sure that you work on Mesh Input layer, not the layer element.
Note: Tools walls ( ), Wall to Tools ( ) Tools & left wall ( ) Have the same button on the
toolbar Specific Layer. See "Extending the tool buttons" on page 6.
Draw
wall:
Copy.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Choose Edit> Past. Paste the new wall objects in the same position as the original object wall. The
walls are pasted selection activities.
3 Support Changing characteristics Declare parameters from "lower" to "on" in the properties dialog
box wall.
All bearings are horizontal stiffness should be placed in the middle of the depth can warp or
unforeseen external horizontal stiffness of them (layout depth between parameters by declaring "raise
the level underneath the arches "to a depth of one-half).
Usually do not need to use the horizontal heat resistance at the knee point and a straight line, because
the program automatically RAM Concept stable structure in the x and y (you can turn off the automatic
stabilizers This Calc Options dialog box). One more case where you can use a horizontal bearing
structural bracing against a party but modeled without strut bracing components (possibly other
components against concrete wall bracing ).
Need to be very careful when determining any component other than "fixed z direction" for the pillow
and the "shift towards fixed z" for the knee in a straight line. For knee on the point, the knee fixed in the
direction of r and s can warp / membrane. For the knee in a straight line, the fixed or moving along the
crossing bearings can warp / membrane.
The dome on the underside improve the vertical distance between the knee and the
bottom of the dome.
the axis. R is fixed in the direction along the axis Avoid transmitting
global z axis. Go around the fixed axis r r Avoid turning around local
axis.
Each pillow is positioned on the x and y coordinates. Two pillows on the location coordinates can
not be the same.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Tools on the pillow ( ) And knee in a straight line ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar
Specific Layer. See "Extending the tool buttons" on page 6.
Drawing on the
pillow:
The dome on the underside improve the vertical distance between the knee and the bottom line on
the roof.
Moving along the fixed bearing (OFF on the line of symmetry) Prevent transmission along the
shaft.
Shifting cross bearing fixed (ON for the symmetry line) Prevent the transmission cross shaft.
Shifted towards fixed z (OFF on the line of symmetry) Prevent or down in the hammock on
shaft.
Go around the fixed shaft (ON for the line of symmetry) Avoid turning around the longitudinal
axis of the bearing.
Go around to the constant bearing Fixed (OFF to the symmetry line) Avoid turning the horizontal
axis of the bearing.
Note: Tools on the pillow ( ) And knee on the straight line tool ( ) Have the same button on the
toolbar Specific Layer. See "Extending the tool buttons" on page 6.
16.12 Way to
surround
Results determined by the sole surround the base of a single dome at the intersection of the finite
element. Results determined that surround the base of one or more base line that arches are positioned
at each street edge finite elements. RAM Concept program using the thickness of the element is
considered when determining the minimum height of the dome base. For this reason, the base should
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The dome has the sole stiffness should be placed horizontally in the middle of the depth can warp or
unexpected side horizontal stiffness of them (layout depth between parameters by declaring "raise the
level under the arch of the "one-half the depth). For the focus of the different height, can be added to an
inertial drag on the substrate using the surround and the horizontal bearings.
Usually do not need to use the horizontal dome base, because the program automatically Concept stable
structure in the x and y (you can disable this automatic stability in Calc Options dialog box). One more
case where you can use the dome base is horizontal structural bracing against the side but modeled
without bracing against the elements (earth may have anti-friction braces).
Need to be very careful when determining any component other than the force constant z. The force
constant r and s can be webbed.
The dome on the underside improve the vertical distance between the base of the dome and
surround the bottom.
Corner sole surround (r = x, y @ s = 0) the local orientation of the axis. Plane showing the
orientation
surround the
base.
Note: Tools of the imperial arches ( ), The soles Surround Tools ( ), Tools surround the base
triangle ( ), And Tools surround the rectangular base ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar
Specific Layer. See "Extending the tool buttons" on page 6.
Here is a list of properties surround the base of the program RAM Concept:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The dome on the underside improve the vertical distance between the dome and the base under
the arch.
Corner sole Surround (R = X, Y @ S = 0) orientation of the local axes. Plane showing the
orientation
surround the base.
Constant force constant R surround the base in the direction of the local axis
in each of the first r. Constant Constant force S in the direction of the dome's
base locally in each head. Constant force constant z empire surround the z-
axis direction in each of the first globally. Constant torque constant R corner
dome axial base in each of the local r. Constant Constant torque S corner
Note: If the force constant (or constant torque) does not change, you just need to enter a value. If not
you need to enter two values separated by commas (endpoints 1 and 2). This allows a linear variation
of the force constant (or constant torque).
Note: Tools of the imperial arches ( ), The soles Surround Tools ( ), Tools surround the base
triangle ( ), And Tools surround the rectangular base ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar
Specific Layer. See "Extending the tool buttons" on page 6.
The dome on the underside improve the vertical distance between the base of the dome and under
the arch.
Corner sole Surround (R = X, Y @ S = 0) orientation of the local axes. Plane showing the
orientation
surround the base.
surround.
Note: If the force constant (or constant torque) does not change, you just need to enter a value.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Constant power (or torque constant) can vary in any linear direction.
Note: If the force constant (or constant torque) different, you need to enter three values, separated by
commas (angles 1, 2 and 3). This allows a linear variation of the force constant (or constant torque) in
two directions. See Figure 16-2.
Note: If you use the tools surround a rectangular base to identify different force constants (or constant
torque), Concept program calculates the value of the angle only Wednesday (three points define a
plane).
Figure 16-2 The roof substrate characteristics vary from 100 to 200 to 300 units in the first three
corners.
For the square cross section, the builder too Concept calculates the angle value
Wednesday.
Use the tools surround a rectangular base ( ) To locate the corner of the base section of
roof.
Note: Tools of the imperial arches ( ), The soles Surround Tools ( ), And Tools surround the
rectangular base ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar Specific Layer. See "Open large tool
buttons "on page 6.
2 Click at the top of the dome base (or enter the coordinates in the command
line).
3 Close the polygon by typing the letter "c" in the command line or by clicking on the first
vertex.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Objects can surround the base larger structures that sustain it.
At any position of the floor, using only the thickness (depth), and the object has a high priority that
determine the thickness.
For example, you want the overall thickness of a drop panel columns to be placed in priority to the
thickness. By establishing the priority for each object, automatic mesh generation function to
understand how to create the finite element.
The lowest priority is 1. This is so you can continually add beams, the density and the cross section
with a higher priority. There is no limit to the highest priority (unless the computer overflow and your
writing).
Note: The overlapping objects on the map, the beam and the gap to the level
different priorities. These numbers should not be the priority sequence.
Figure 16-3 Objects Version, beams and gaps identified in the standard plane Mesh Input
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 16-4 summarizes plane element after generating the mesh from Figure 16-3.
You determine the thickness of the thick, like drop cap and drop panel, determined by the
thickness increases.
Typically surface height parameters declared height is typically 0. The height parameter
declarations to a very large value (eg, 100 feet or 30 meters) can lead to rounding errors in the
value analysis. You make the step surface and the underside of the dome by using different
surface heights for different sections.
R axis determine the orientation. If you are a two-way with the same properties in all directions
("isotropic"), the r-axis is not appropriate, because there is no orientation of the capital.
However, if the non-isotropic, then this axis (defined by the angle counterclockwise from the 3-
hour clock) r axis is determined with the use of the property to determine the behavior. S axis is
90 degrees counterclockwise from the axis r clock.
• The two methods The isotropic and behave the same way in every direction.
• The method according to one version with conventional bending stiffness along the axis r
and around axis s (Ms). The only minimal bending rigidity perpendicular (Mr). The well
concession twisting rigidity (Mrs). The hardness of the surface is not affected by this parameter.
• The two methods do not have to twist The behavior is similar to the two-way, except it
only has minimal torsion rigidity (Mrs).
• All Custom stiffness (related to the stiffness of the isotropic) can be defined by the user.
These values are called KMR, KMS, KMrs, KFR, and KFs KVrs. Generally, we do not
recommend using this option.
See "Right behavior" on page 306 for more information about using behavior characteristics.
16.21 Drawing
on the
Use Slab Area ( ) To determine the version by clicking on each point (top) row. To close the
polygon, click on the first point or polygon type "c" and press Return.
Drawing on
the:
3 Go to the top of the first stick and click closed polygons (or type "c" and press Return).
Note: You can almost create a series of curves with straight edges.
The following is a paraphrase of the beam characteristics of the program RAM Concept:
Typically surface height parameters declared height is typically 0. The height to set great value
(like 100 feet or 30 meters) can lead to rounding errors in the analysis. Create the step surface
and the underside of the dome by using different surface heights for different sections.
The characteristics of the beam behaves very similar to the characteristics of the. R-axis beams
automatically be declared
the horizontal beam
axis.
• Standard Beams isotropic and behave the same way in every direction.
• No torsion beam behaves like a two-way, except that it has only minimal torsion rigidity
(Mrs).
• All Custom stiffness (related to the stiffness of the isotropic) can be defined by the user.
These values are called KMR, KMS, KMrs, KFR, and KFs KVrs. Generally, we do not
recommend using this option.
You painted beams by clicking on the first and last points of the focus by using beam tool ( ). Each
beam has six control points. Four other point is automatically positioned to the end of the beam is
perpendicular to the edge. You can stretch the point to keep the angle to determine the angle.
Draw
beams:
2 Getting stuck in the corner to keep the beams and stretch them into
place.
3 Go to the top of the first stick and click closed polygons (or type the letter "c" and press
Return).
Note: You can almost create a series of curves with straight edges.
Once you have painted the floor and objects bearing the Input Mesh plane, you have to create the
finite element mesh really. The structure does not exist until you create grid.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
17 Creating
nets
There are two ways to create the finite element mesh in the program RAM
Concept:
• Using automated tools nets with the mesh object information as shown in Chapter 16,
"Determining the structure".
The first method easier and faster. This is the recommended method for most models.
The second method allows more ability to control the intensity of the net. Mesh size can have different
widths in different floor areas, but the adjustment will be more difficult. The instructions for the
second method (by hand) is presented in Program 18, "Draw the finite element by hand".
17.1 Automatically
generate net
The finite element does not exist (and therefore no structure) until the mesh is created. You need to
identify the object mesh information (using the same method as shown in the previous chapter) before
creating the mesh.
Create nets as soon as possible, although it may draw more objects on other layers (such as weight)
before creating.
When creating the net, you need to determine particle size used. The maximum size is 32.8 feet (10
meters).
To accelerate the analysis, choose coarse mesh for preliminary design and fine grid for the final
design. Coarse mesh size can have a length element of rhythm / 6. The mesh size can have elements
length of span / 12. If you are unsure, you should check the influence of the size
different element mesh.
Click Generate.
The time it takes to create mesh depending on the floor size and mesh element size is determined
regulations. For most models, generated net within 15 seconds.
Note: Every time you create a mesh, RAM Concept Program will delete any grilles are available and
create a new sheet.
The limitations of the woven mesh is automatically a minimum particle size of 50 mm (0164 feet).
Concept program can usually overcome this limitation by adjusting the information objects to create a
mesh grilles. The concept of moving objects mesh information (eg, walls, pillows on the line) to fit the
object (eg, column, above the knee).
Concept program will automatically adjust the mesh object information if:
• Control points close to the line than the minimum size element.
Note: Concept program will warn in the nets if it needs adjustment. You can stop and edit nets. If you
continue, you should check whether the grid has been adjusted to meet the requirements yet.
Note: Concept Program will present a warning if two (or beams or gaps) with priority levels similar
overlap. You can stop and edit nets. If you continue, you should check whether the grid is adjusted to
meet the requirements for the selection not of the type (or beams) of the control element is random.
Note: Concept Program moved two columns to the same point that you draw closer to the minimum
element size.
• Two columns or walls along the same support (allowing the intersecting wall).
1 Adjust the object plane reticles information to a minimum particle size (or more) separate them.
2 Adjust the level of priority to the publication, the beams and gaps with the same priority level are
not overlapping.
You can view the finite element mesh on any flat surface, but should use the standard surface layer
element.
Grids are created at this stage appear somewhat random. This is normal and in fact, for the mesh size
sensitive, giving the designer the results highly satisfactory. However, sometimes such net effects
(adverse) to map the contours drawing.
17.1.4 Improved
grid
You can significantly improve the net once the design has been drawn strips. The following diagram
shows the difference.
Figure 17-3 after drawing the mesh strip design and Reinvent.
Using 17.2.1 and above the knee in a straight line to improve grid
You can draw on the pillow or on the line of "false" to ensure that the finer mesh will in specific areas.
You must ensure that the boxes are not heat the mark, as shown in Figure 17-4 and Figure 17-5.
Figure 17-4 Dialog box with pillows on the heat resistance is not checked.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 17-5 Dialog knee in line with the heat box is not checked
Figure 17-6 Two identical copies in each direction on the knee unless done to improve the grid lines.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
There are two ways to create the finite element mesh in the program RAM
Concept:
• Using automated tools nets, as shown in Chapter 17, "Creating mesh", There information
objects mesh, as shown in Chapter 16, "Determining the structure".
The first method easier and faster. This is the recommended method for most models.
The second method allows more ability to control the intensity of the net. Mesh size can have different
widths in different floor areas. However, this method is more likely to create user error and the
correction will be more difficult.
Do not use the manual method to add mesh nets with automated tools. That's because the craft element
will be lost if you use the grid tool. For example, if you add a column element in the layer above
mentioned elements, it will be lost when you re-create it.
If you import CAD drawings, showing the standard plane before drawing element
structure.
Height The distance from the central vertical element of the first column
to the remote.
The width is measured along the axis of the column r. Declare to zero for
circular columns.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Angle plane angle is measured counterclockwise from the x-axis global clock. Define r axis of the
column (and usually zero).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Bending stiffness coefficient is used to edit bending stiffness without changing the size or height.
For example, you can expect an edge crack and rotating column of more than one column and
therefore you can declare this value to 0.5. You can use BSF to increase the stiffness of the
column, but do not recommend this solution.
Set There is a link near the torque (around the x and y axis) between the column and, if not, be
pinned.
Set away from there a link torque (around the x and y axis) at the far end, if it is not pinned.
Note the column compression to extend the z direction Hooke's Law, otherwise there is no
compression. The column compression usually results in more accurate.
Note: If you draw the elements, you need to draw the column element at the intersection of the
element.
Draw element
column:
2 Choose Edit> Past. Paste the new column element in the same position as the original column
element. The column element is pasted selection activities.
3 Change Support Features Set from "below" to "above" in Column Element Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the set of elements Support Set the same column does not allow the model
to run correctly. If you have copied a large number, you must delete the second column elements in
each position (column a).
Height The distance from the central vertical element to the end element away from the
wall.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Thickn
ess
Shear wall "key" element to the wall horizontally and thus keep the back, if not, you can "slide"
through the wall.
Set near the moment there is a link between wall elements and the r axis of the wall element,
otherwise it is pinned
There are a fixed distance around the shaft torque link element r of the wall at the far end, if
not,
was pinned.
Note the compression element to the wall extends z Hooke's Law, otherwise there is no
compression. The pressurized walls often provide more accurate results.
element can run through the column element, or cut other wall elements.
Note: If you draw the elements, you should paint the wall elements along the edges of the elements.
The end of the wall to put the element in the element nodes. The wall element can not pass through the
finite element.
3 Specify the number of elements in the Wall Element Tool dialog box and click
OK.
2 Choose Edit> Past. Paste the new wall elements in the same position as the original object element
wall
first. The walls are pasted element is selected activities.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 Change Support Features Set from "below" to "above" Wall Element Properties dialog box.
Advanced Knee determined way. For this reason, should not be positioned on the pillow or pillows on
the line in the step.
All bearings are horizontal stiffness should be placed in the middle of the depth can warp or
unexpected side horizontal stiffness of them (layout depth between parameters by declaring, "The
Advanced under the arch on the "one-half the depth).
Usually do not need to use the horizontal heat resistance at the knee point and a straight line, because
the program automatically RAM Concept stable structure in the x and y (you can turn off automatic
stability This Calc Options dialog box). One more case where you can use the horizontal bearing
structural bracing against one side but modeled without strut bracing components (possibly other
components outside wall concrete strut bracing).
Need to be very careful when determining any component but "is fixed in the direction of z" on the
pillow and the "shift towards fixed z" for the knee in a straight line. For knee on the point, fixed point
on the pillow in the direction r or s can warp / membrane. For the knee in a straight line, the fixed or
moving along the crossing bearings can warp / membrane.
Note: Point Support Tools ( ) And Line Support Tools ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar
Specific Layer.
Note: If you draw the elements, you need to draw on the pillow at the intersection point of
the element.
Drawing on the
pillow:
Note: Point Support Tools ( ) And Line Support Tools ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar
Specific Layer.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: If you draw the elements, you need to draw on the knee of the straight line along the edge of the
element. The end point of the knee in a straight line to the intersection located at the element. Pillows
on the line can not pass through the finite element.
18.12 Way to
surround
Results determined by the sole surround the base of a single dome at the intersection of the finite
element. Results determined that surround the base of one or more base line that arches are positioned
at each street edge finite elements. RAM Concept program using the thickness of the element is
considered when determining the minimum height of the dome base. For this reason, the base should
not position the dome at the steps.
The dome has the sole stiffness should be placed horizontally in the middle of the depth can warp or
unexpected side horizontal stiffness of them (layout depth between parameters by declaring "raise the
level under the arch of the "one-half the depth). For the focus of the different height, can be added to an
inertial drag on the substrate using the surround and the horizontal bearings.
Usually do not need to use the horizontal dome base, RAM Concept for automatic program to stabilize
the structure in the x and y (you can disable this automatic stability in Calc Options dialog box). One
more case where you can use the dome base is horizontal structural bracing against one side but
modeled without bracing against the elements (earth may have anti-friction braces).
Need to be very careful when determining any component other than the force constant z. The force
constant r and s can be webbed.
Note: Point Spring Tools ( ), Spring Line Tools ( ), Spring Line Tools triangle (
), And Quad-Area Spring Tools ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar Specific
Layer.
Note: If you draw the elements, you need to draw the base of the dome at the intersection point of the
element.
Note: Point Spring Tools ( ), Spring Line Tools ( ), Tri-Area Spring Tools ( ), And
Quad-Area Spring Tools ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar Specific Layer.
Note: If you draw the elements, you need to draw the line imperial arches along the edge of the
element. The base of the dome by the end of the line must be placed at the intersections of the
elements. Empire arches line can not pass through the finite element.
Trails surround
base:
Use the Tri-Area Spring ( ) Or Quad-Area Spring tools ( ) And locate the corner section of
the dome base.
Note: Point Spring Tools ( ), Spring Line Tools ( ), Tri-Area Spring Tools ( ),
Quad-Area Spring Tools ( ) Have the same button on the toolbar Specific Layer. And
Draw a rectangular
dome base:
You define the slab and beams with hand tools the nets. Drawing elements manually requires more
thinking than in the drawing process. These parameters can be determined incompetent to make a
significant correction and double work.
Drawing elements also requires manually using tools carefully to ensure that each element of the same
length as the adjacent elements. In other words, each element must be the intersection located at the
corner of any element that touches it. The element can not overlap each other.
Modeling the beam element is a dense element by element copy tools like. Modeling the gaps are the
gaps in the mesh.
You determine the thickness of the thick, like drop caps and drop panels, determined by the
thickness increases.
Typically surface height parameters declared height is typically 0. The height parameter
declaration to great value (like 100 feet or 30 meters) can lead to rounding errors in the analysis.
You make the step surface and the underside of the dome by using different surface heights for
different sections.
R axis determine the orientation. If you are a two-way with the same properties in all directions
("isotropic"), the r-axis is not appropriate, because there is no orientation of the capital.
However, if the non-isotropic, then this axis (defined by the angle counterclockwise from the 3-
hour clock) r axis is determined with the use of the property to determine the behavior. S axis is
always 90 degrees counterclockwise from the axis r clock.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
KMR, KMS, KMrs, KFR, KFs, KVrs The relative stiffness (compared to the isotropic stiffness).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
See "The right of Conduct" on page 306 for more information about using behavior characteristics.
Note: Slab Mesh Tools Rect Elements ( ) And Slab Tools Poly Mesh Elements ( ) Have the
same button on the toolbar Element layer.
3 Specify size Rect element in the dialog box and click OK Slab Mesh Elements.
3 Go to the top of the first stick and click closed polygons (or type the letter "c" and
press Return). 4 Specify the element size Slab Poly Mesh Tool dialog box and click OK.
3 Go to the top of the first stick and click closed polygons (or type the letter "c" and
press Return).
Do not click Generate Mesh ( ) After drawing the mesh elements by hand. It will delete all the
elements that you drew.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
19 Load Draw
RAM Concept program enables you to draw the load points, lines and surfaces and the torque on any
surface that load. The load may be under the direction of the axis x, y and z and the global momentum
may be around the global x and y axes.
Each load of the load layer, such as downloading activity. You define each load in the load window,
and drawing on the plane load.
Load independent of the finite element mesh and has no effect on automatic mesh generation. This is
satisfactory for most loads. However, for the point or line load is heavy (as in the transmission or
copies) should load correlated with the intersection finite element mesh. You can do this by drawing
the columns and walls are pinned on the floor, and drawing load at this position with the support of the
snap tool. Or, you can improve local grid objects using a "fake". See "Improved selective grid" on
page 62 for more information.
The horizontal loads can generate torque applications depending on the height above the surface of the
load. If the load is positioned at the surface of the step, the program uses RAM Concept thickness of the
elements are numbered to identify the lowest load height. For this reason, the load should not be
positioned at the point or straight line step.
Load line may cross or overlap each other, but can not have the same length and the same position on
Layer payload.
Surface load can overlap each other, but can not have the same shape and the same position on Layer
payload.
The height above the surface of the vertical distance between the load point and
the surface.
Note: Although not need to load set point at the intersection of the finite element, but you should
consider locating the huge load at the intersection. Download key must be positioned on the finite
element; Concept will show warning if you violate this rule.
Note: sign convention is defined in the Criteria> Signs. See Chapter 8, "Choosing convention signed
effect ".
Note: The horizontal force (Fx, Fy) generate torque applications unless the height above the surface
be declared to the load applied at the focus.
surface of the vertical distance between the load line and the surface. Force Fx line towards
Fy force lines toward the global y-axis in each of the first (horizontal
forces). The force Fz line towards global z-axis in each head (vertical
force). Mx line torque around the x-axis in each of the first globally.
Note: If the line force (or torque) does not change, you just need to enter a value. If not, you need to
enter two values separated by commas (endpoints 1 and 2). This allows a linear variation of the line
force (or torque). See Figure 19-1.
Note: Although the load line does not need to put on the finite element intersection, you should
consider positioning huge loads at the element edges. Load lines must be positioned completely on the
finite element; Concept program will alert if you violate this rule.
Note: The horizontal force (Fx, Fy) generate torque applications unless the height above the surface
be declared to the load applied at the focus.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Load Line Tools Point Load tool similar except that it uses two points rather than one
point.
2 Click at the end of the load (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
Perimeter Load Line Tools to facilitate more drawing objects load line around the perimeter, with or
without deviation.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter Inset Distrance, and click Apply.
The height above the surface of the vertical distance between the payload section and the surface.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: If the power section (or torque) does not change, you just need to enter a value for an
axis.
Note: Force section (or torque) can differ in any linear direction. Variations section can be force for
snow or steep slopes.
Note: If the power section (or torque) different, you need to enter three values, separated by commas
(peaks 1, 2 and 3). This allows a linear variation of the line force (or torque) in two directions. See
Figure 19-2.
Note: If you use more than three vertices, Concept program calculates single value at all vertices (three
points determine a plane).
Note: The surface load must be located at least partially on the finite element; Concept program will
alert if you violate this rule. Program Concept ignore any part of the payload section is not on the
finite element.
Note: The horizontal force (Fx, Fy) generate torque applications unless the height above the surface
be declared to the load applied at the focus.
Figure 19-2 The section features various loads from 10 to 20 to 30 units in the first three peaks. Concept
program calculates the value in the different peaks.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Although obviously painted to match the load to the floor surface, but should be done for oversized
loads. RAM Concept Program ignore any part of the payload section is not on the real element. The
excessive size increase will affect a lot of scope to zoom in and automatically.
Draw payload
section:
2 Click at the top of the payload section (or enter the coordinates in the command
line).
3 Close the polygon by entering the letter "c" in the command line or by clicking on the first
vertex.
3 Choose Edit> Past. Paste the new load in the same location as the plane load initially. Load
the paste operation is selected.
Note: You can also copy, paste and edit complex loads.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
20 Create a form
load
RAM Concept Program created by the sample weight load patterns that you draw. "Load Model" in
Page 32 presentation load template rules.
Figure 20-1 The weight of the beam pattern. It should be noted that we do not need to create the
biggest negative moment, but they will create the torque is close to the maximum torque and
presenting practical solutions in most situations.
1 Choose Layers>
Templates.
2 Open one of the sample plane load (load from Form 1 to Form 10 loads). 3 Double-
4 Specify the template you want to use (the number corresponds to the sample plane load
weight
).
6 Go to the top of the first stick and click closed polygons (or type the letter "c" and
Note: Regardless of the load model plane that you are using, then the form will be the last thing
identified. You will need to change this number for each different sample plane.
Thus, the scope of the model calculations show that the most RAM Concept range pattern you draw.
You should consider this when drawing the sample load and select mesh size because it will affect the
actual load pattern is created.
The nature and intensity of the grid are finite element affecting the process sample loads. The following
example shows the best process.
Figure 20-2 To My greatest creation in between beats, you will use this template
loads.
Figure 20-3 Loads and loads of additional section in the form load.
Figure 20-4 The finer mesh screen, will not load, and the load will have little additional section in the
form load.
Figure 20-5 The mesh is created with sample load range similar to the sample load.
The painted strips designed to significantly improve the net. See Chapter 17, "Creating nets" for more
information on network improvements.
Note: The mesh will have more if you created or recreated after drawing the strip design.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The finite element analysis often generates high torque and stress concentration factors are not suitable
for rebar calculation and evaluation capacity.
Generally, the rule is for the strip method of calculation assumes an average (or "blur") torque and
shear forces through fixed width, such as column range. RAM Concept program using the range of
designers and designed to link the finite element analysis with the regulations on concrete and
concrete design.
• usually the length of the span, and a rhythm section, but in fact there is any way possible long in
structure
• consolidation of synergy (the torque, shear, and axial force, torque) for all load combinations
along each section (and, therefore, cut the width of the strip design)
Segment rhythm section straight-line entity used to indicate the whole rate structure or rate
structures. The characteristic "support" of the rhythm section that position and stop start
rhythm.
One or more rhythm strip sections are linked together to form a single span structure. Nearly all
requests beat a rhythm section.
One or more frame rate are linked together to form a continuous line of rhythm.
The collection spans the band sections are combined with the rhythm. Rhythm section might
have to beat the band bcac (left, middle and right). Known as the range of designs.
Figure 21-1 The band designed for flat plate in two directions.
Concept program split into segments range designed by the following parameters:
Concept Program section located at the top of each strip design ranges from plus section at the end. The
length of each section is equal to the width of the design strip at that location. See Figure 21-2.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: You can specify the minimum separation is zero, with a maximum distance, the number of sites
is zero. This can be useful for helping to make the width of the span.
Program Concept adjusted geometric characteristics of each strip section design parameters declared
Refining and limited cross slope section inside.
The concept of total force integration for each load combination along the length of each strip sectional
design (and thus cut the width of the strip design). See Figure 21-3.
The program uses the concept of individual characteristics to determine the rate applicable rules (or the
beams, or reinforced after stress) for the corresponding design ranges.
Concept Program applies the rules for how the load combination is the integral part of the norm. The
other characteristic rhythm section (rebar sizes, protective layer) to create favorable conditions for the
actual calculation rules. See "The characteristics of the rhythm " for more information.
Program Design Concept divided the strip into two parts: latitude and longitude. The two parts in order
to facilitate and recognize that the concrete floor should be designed in two ways.
Note: With all of the plane, you can rename the strip plane designs plane latitude and longitude range
designed by choosing Layer> Rename.
Figure 21-2 column strips and two mid-range of a rhythm section with visible.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-3 torque around the y-axis (My) is a cross-sectional drawing of the three-strip designs.
The rhythm section features different purposes. RAM Concept Program features used to determine:
Declare Environment environment affects the operating rules of the selected concept of the rule.
• The 51.5.4 inpage 374 and Section 51.6.10 inpage 380 related ACI318-02.
• The 53.6.15 inpage 419 related to AS3600.
• The 54.5.4 inpage 429 related to BS8110.
• The 55.5.4 inpage 452 related to IS 456.
Consider the design axial force intensity using net section axial force when designing the
ben
ding
.
This is a very important report related to the effect of axial force general (not necessarily axial load) in
cross section. If you choose this option, the Concept is the interaction of the axial force when
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
typical column design with deformed compatibility. Generally we recommend considering the design
axial force in intensity. For the cross section is pure axial compression, which tends to reduce the
requirements for reinforcement in the cross section is pure axial stress, it will increase the required
reinforcement.
Hailed as the force behind Concept Allows programs defined rules are used.
This determines whether the segments have been designed strip design rule check initial operations
(for initial LC activity) and whether to use concrete or PT rules (rules do not differ much too).
Note: If no response is seen as the force behind Concept program will ignore the prestressed
reinforcement in strength computations.
No decrease M and V are incorporated by changing notation purpose of this plan is designed to
pay attention to the safety and preservation, which is the domain of cross-torque (or shear) with
the notation opposite, recorded torque (or shear stress) on the lower section of the side cut
shorter.
If you choose this option, the design capacity is always more secure when not selected plan. Do not
use this option carelessly.
See "Using the plan" is not a concession M and V are incorporated by changing the sign "" in page 317
for more information.
Calculate width rhythm Concept Determine how the program calculates the width span.
o The boundary rhythm (with the same parameters latitude / longitude as the rhythm
section)
o the next version
o halfway to the next beat or wall
• Instructions: override the automatically calculated and determined by the width of items
rhythm rhythm nearest border (with the same parameters latitude / longitude as the rhythm
section). See "Draw of the strips by hand " for more information.
Note: When using the hand parameters declared in the band segment, all segment boundaries rhythm
strip must be determined. Segment width rhythm strips create zero length segments when there are not
any boundaries defined rhythm.
Calculation Determination column strip width column strip width is determined how. The term
"band width" column is used for multiple columns up there and strip center. The choices are:
• Full width: this is typical for the PT is designed for ACI318 and TR43.
Width of column strip width is similar to the
rhythm.
• The standard: this is typical of the concrete in two directions, and the PT in two directions are
designed to AS3600. Narrower band width columns:
o span width
o border strip (with the same parameters latitude / longitude as the rhythm section)
o fraction of the distance to the rhythm or the adjacent bearings (for the current standard
now, this fraction of 0.25)
o fractional length spans on each side of the line rate (for current standards, this fraction
of 0.25)
o span width
o border strip (with the same parameters latitude / longitude as the rhythm section)
o plate plus 8 times the width of wing thickness on one side beams (ACI standards only)
o 25% of span length (ACI standards only)
o plate with plus length 0:07 time span on one side (only for AS 3600 and BS 8110)
o span width
o border strip (with the same parameters latitude / longitude as the rhythm section)
Bevel angle between the design and cut strips perpendicular to the rhythm. Typical values are
zero.
For compost N N +1 design section. In general, choose N is an even number. The upper part of the
separator is precision designed higher, the ability to find the key location and design of reinforced
length of the program is the amount of RAM Concept separated. The bottom of the separator is the
calculation takes more time, for large models, you can use a small amount of separation (eg, 4) and
then increase the number of design Last (but you should consider the impact of the next feature).
All the bands are not designed with the same amount of separation. If you are designing beam
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
transmission in the flat, probably should have separated beams designed to strip.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Distance separates biggest Overwrite the smallest separation with the upper line of separation
distances.
Automatic detection of edges and bearings (bearings declare the width and below) Searching for:
• the bearing at the end of the strip and override the "end is considered bearing" and "bearing
width".
• position near the edge the neck pace and "pull back" section closest to the "x", where x is the
position protection layer end of the stick plus 1 inch / 25 mm.
o If the end of the neck near the edge bearings found, it does not perform edge detection
version (and use the bearing width calculations are).
Come the end of one's bearings tick boxes allow the program Concept determine the
interpretation of "rhythm" in texture. The determination of this rate affect the application of
Concept program rules related to rhythm, including help identify the domain, the domain and
range rate is used to reduce the work load.
Width at end 1 bearing the bearing dimensions parallel to the strip design. Width locate
bearings put the strip section designed first and last. The position of them with a half-width
bearings (measured in the direction of rhythm) from the end of the strip design, create favorable
conditions for the concession of torque to the bearing surface (thus starting and termination of
the strip in the middle of the design is very important bearings). Enter the bearing width is zero.
Tweaking the extract reduced the cross-cut strips geometric design. See "Tweaking section" for
more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Limitations section of the slope in Zhejiang reduce the strip section design based on slope limits.
See "Tweaking limited cross slope inside" for more information.
Use the bar on CS label to identify the top of the bar is used to enhance the design meander.
Using CS bar below the label to identify the underside of the bar is used to enhance the design
meander.
Label is not necessarily the size of the bar. The label of rebar (and their properties) defined in the
Criteria> Materials. The range of different designs can have different bars.
After the process is finished calculating, RAM Concept Program will require reporting of strip
reinforcement bars are designed to determine the characteristics of the design range. See also the
section of the reinforcement required in the charts and tables.
See "Considering twist" on page 330,Chapter 47, "Design Considerations section" to be explained.
CS System design System design (beams / written by a local / written by two) for the design
range.
Reinforced smallest and the rules differ depending on the type of system used in rhythm. For example,
the minimum requirements for the other beams reinforced with a request for the method.
Using detailed system CS rate details. See "Details rhythm" on page 341,Chapter 49, "The Note on
Reinforcement".
• Not
• Code
• As users identify
The high: Some rules smallest tensile reinforcement does not consider the curvature stress conditions,
we determine the minimum reinforcement is based on geometry and surface tension "is expected". For
example, ACI 318-99 provisions of Rule 18.9.3.3 minimum reinforcement in columns on the high side.
This parameter is guaranteed RAM Concept program that uses face.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The foundation system: Similar to above, the minimum reinforcement in the column to the underside.
Hand stress: This parameter for details on the minimum reinforcement tensile or compression surface
with a minimum amount.
Above: The figures indicate the smallest details in the reinforcement on, whether concrete stress.
Below: The figures that reinforced the smallest details at the bottom, even though the concrete
Reinforcement rate on the smallest CS reinforcement ratio defined by the user for the above.
Program Concept will the cross-sectional area has been tweaked to rate this.
Reinforcement ratio in the smallest CS reinforcement ratio determined by the user to the bottom.
Note: Range is between a range of properties for the column again. The remaining similar
characteristics, but may have different values for the column strip.
Range between range use characteristics Declare column features the band ranges between
columns.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Reduce maximum load View Chapter 48, "notes down load" for more information on the
implementation of load reduction of Concept program.
The LLR parameters defined by the user View Chapter 48, "notes down load" to
For more information on the implementation of load reduction of Concept
program.
Unless you have a concrete floor in a true direction, usually the first to create a rhythm section (and
therefore the range of design) in the plane of rate design latitude, and then the parameters declared
report on the plane orthogonal to the rhythm of the design.
OK.
The sensitive period appears (with the specified direction) in the plane of rate design
Sometimes need to draw or manually adjust the rate for non-straight or complex floor.
5 Continue clicking the end point of the segment until you finish painting the sections
Note: The start point and end point is usually the bearings. However, there are exceptions, such as
strips designed to be used for concrete strip to differentiate between the PT and the concrete section,
or be used for the reinforcement rate is determined by the user in the separate location.
Note: The command Generate Strip does not make any band that can beat the mark Lock Generated
Strips. This is beneficial when you are satisfied with just a few, but not all, of the design range.
Note: Each rhythm section can create up to 3 range: mid-range ("columns"), the left strip ("between")
and the right strip ("between"). The three band together to create a whole range of rhythms.
Concept program will recalculate the rate range for the selected pace.
21.8 Determine the width of the strip width and beat by hand
Program Concept widths often create the rhythm and the band requires adjustment. This trend becomes
apparent when you repeatedly create a rhythm section. Always check the strip width to determine if
they can not meet the requirements.
It can determine the width manually calculate the rate when the rhythm width does not automatically
bring satisfactory results.
4 Continue clicking the rhythm of the border until all beats are identified. 5 Right-click
Note: The boundaries have declared rhythm parameters latitude (longitude) only affects the rhythm
strips latitude (longitude).
Example
21-1
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The formation 21-10 to the 21-12 presented using rhythm to control the border width
the rhythm.
Figure 21-11 range is made up of the rhythm in Figure 21-10. A rhythm strips designed for
unreasonable rate calculated width excessive.
Figure 21-12 Reinvent the design strip width after adjusting beat rhythm with boundary (shown inside
the ellipse).
Figure 21-13 The band with the same rhythm section tends to tilt ninety degrees. This does not require
hand beats the border.
You can manually define the boundary strip "column" when calculating column width strips
provide satisfactory results.
The uneven pace makes the column of different width. You can accept that column strip width
calculation program Concept, or make adjustments.
"The middle column of panels are not the same: If the support is usually two plate sizes so that
the range of a plate does not match the range of the other panels, you should remove the plate
separation of the common areas for support will be calculated for plate columns wider range. "
The formation 21-14 to the 21-16 presented using the border strip to control the width of the column
strip
Figure 21-16 Border strips made the shift column width strips
Note: The short span of the Figure 21-16 Column Width Strip with the declared Calc Manual
Example 21-3
The formation 21-17 to the 21-20 presented using the border strip to control the width of the column
strip.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-18 range is made up of the rhythm in Figure 21-17. A rhythm (with gloss gray) with a width
of column strip width rhythm and unreasonable.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-19 Border rhythm beats make reasonable width, but the column strip width is still a
problem.
Example 21-4
The rhythm and short beams is the problem because the program design concept creates a narrow
column strips. The standard recommends that the column strips no wider than half the rate. Concept
Author Program
the (often used) that the equivalent length of the beam is 2L. Thus, the strip width
beam column is L. This may be quite narrow for short beams.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-22 range is created from the rhythm section in Figure 21-21.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Real shape of the cross-section can be uneven due to the step and the other shape or architectural
issues. While create geometric models of concrete in the shape of a building is built, it should not
always make use of geometric designs. It is usually better to edit the section considering both the
shape of the cross section and the next layer of concrete.
Program Concept refine proposed two sections: single and Tweaks section limits
inner slope section.
Tweaking consider a single cross-section adjustable separately and sections based on the type refine
determined by the user.
The limit on the section of slope tweak section above and / or below the adjacent sections, height, and
spacing between sections.
Limited cross slope inside always tweak after tweak menu section.
21.9.2 Heart
cut
Program Concept define the center cut as part of the refining section includes the vertical piece extends
down from the cross section, as shown in Figure 21-24.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
How to calculate a power cut to the program's concept is based on the entire shear force and cutting
center. For example, the T-beams, shear calculations based on cross-sectional area of the wing rib
beams and girders on the side beams.
The cross section may have more individual attention. For example, in the double-T beams, girders and
ribs center two wing sections on the two side beams beams. The concept is similar as heart care unit of
the same width (total).
Note: Centre cutting the pipe tension adjustment as described in the following section "Determination
"Heart" Concrete "on page 330.
Many sections do not have the heart shaped cut. In such cases, the program can not calculate the value
Concept capacity (eg power cut). See examples in Figure 21-25.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-25 A cross-cut with a narrow mind and a center section is cut to
zero.
Concept program often report the shear reinforcement in the unforeseen changes to the declarations
section without proper tweaking parameters.
Section is the heart that can shred a large amount of shear reinforcement or even design, even small
shear forces. See a cross section 21.9.5 to declare tweak parameters to edit.
Figure 21-26 shows a section of the concave center cut (right). "The piece" narrow cut interest often
lead to the shear reinforcement and design.
See the section perspective strip design is a useful measure to check the validity of the declaration
tweak parameters sectional design range.
Figure 21-27 Perspective section strip design. The portion of the center section is not cut each other
color.
The largest rectangular upper and lower sections of the tune, and the other piece can be
removed to create a cross-section with a uniform height above bottom, and the largest section.
"Rectangle" is made up can actually be the individual rectangles of the same height above the
bottom. See the example in the picture 21-28 and 21-29.
Figure 21-28 The show has not been tweaked section (left) and center cut (right).
Figure 21-29 Tweaking "the largest rectangular" shows cross-sections have been revised. Now, cut
the center section is similar.
The piece along beams of rectangular cross section will be eliminated until the rest of the large
rectangle height possible. This rectangle can be separate rectangles of the same height above the
bottom.
The T-or L-shaped upper and lower sections of the tune, and the other piece can be removed to
create a cross-section with a uniform height above, and only two height below (under fields and
beams underneath). T and L-shaped and is formed that can be linked together (like two tee) or
separately. The rectangle is considered similar to the T-beams without wings. See the example in
the picture 21-30 and 21-31.
Figure 21-30 beams not tweak that section (left) and center cut (right).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-31 tweak "T or L" shows were edited section (left) and center cut (right).
The biggest cut in the center and / or bottom of the section to be tweaked to create a section with
the largest cross-cutting center. See the example in the picture 21-32 and 21-33.
Figure 21-32 beams not tweak that section (left) and center cut (right).
Figure 21-33 Tweaking "the largest cutting center" that were edited section (left) and center cut (right).
You must determine what tweaks section is most appropriate, but here are the instructions:
Tweaking is usually best T or L word, but assuming that the cross-sectional area smaller than the drop
cap drop cross-section panel.
After the Calc-All, you can see the actual sectional perspective. See "View of perspective strip section
design ".
Once the section has been tweaked, we will tweak related to each other. Tweaking limit slope within
this section refine the effective height below the adjacent section to limit the slope between them.
Need to do this because of the compression and traction forces can not "melt" at the sharp corner from
this one section to the next.
The formation 21-34 to the 21-37 presents two examples to limit the cross section of the slope of
0.25.
Figure 21-34 The comparison of the thickness. Perhaps not the depth of the design using t2 at section
A-A.
Figure 21-35 The thickness of the projector is designed with efficient use of limited slope of 0.25.
Limit slope is 0.0 will not allow any change of height above and below the height of the adjacent
section. Tweaking the effective cross-section of a rhythm strip to the bottom of the same height.
Figure 21-36 hand-shaped projection of the ladder. Maybe not using the full depth to
the cross-sectional
design.
Figure 21-37 The thickness of the projector is designed with efficient use of limited slope of 0.25.
21.10 Improved
grid
The presence of the strip design can significantly improve both the quality of the finite element mesh.
We suggest that once you have completed the design range, you should re-create the mesh. See
Chapter 17, "Creating mesh" for more information.
More complex geometries, the more you have to think about the layout and design of the strip to make
changes manually.
If there are repeated geometry on a floor is not necessary to use the strips around the design. You
should only use the amount required to design appropriate flooring. For example, if the floor beams
have the same weight, branching section, rhythm and size, it is not necessary to use the range for each
beam design similar. That's because you do not make calculations by hand for each twenty identical
beams. Although the beams can or similar, ongoing impact and other considerations can have
significant impact and results may vary.
It is better to determine the proper design range in the critical section rather than with the strip flooring
inappropriate.
If in doubt, strip paint design, but keep in mind that the design of the strip affects the computation
time. Always assess building performance.
Always remember that any information that does not strip area will not have the finite element is
improved when you re-create the mesh.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
In general, the design for a range of parameters declared rhythm (latitude and longitude) should not
overlap each other.
For the beam and the system may consider placing the strips parallel design and between the beams.
That's because the only set of beam range torque and shear forces along the width of the strip. If the
beam is not a significantly stiffer, which can be designed for the reinforcement.
Note: See the "The other advice" for more tips and hints.
Includes:
2 If the component prestressed reinforcement from either direction affect the design
The up / flat panels should be designed in two directions at intervals from 75 to 105 degrees, meaning
the bevel should not exceed fifteen degrees.
Oblique angle characteristic rhythm section allows you to manipulate the rhythm section that the band
section is designed to return to normal in each direction. This is presented in the form 21-38 to the 21-
41.
Figure 21-38 The beat 2-2 with a 15-degree angle. Oblique angle is zero, so the cross-section (shown
in Figure) perpendicular to the rhythm.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-40 The beat 2-2 with a 15-degree angle. Oblique angle is negative fifteen degrees, so the
cross-section (shown in Figure 21-41) Along with the rhythm section of the adjacent
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
21.12.2 The impact of these components on prestressed reinforced the strip cross-
section design
In these examples, the prestressed reinforcement "latitude" and "longitude" can be detailed and built in
a way not orthogonal. Often ignored in the calculation range, but the real problem here is that can affect
the design conditions, such as operation, durability and flexibility.
RAM Concept program to review all the force of prestressed reinforced cross section strip design (or
design section). See example below.
Figure 21-42 range oblique design with three-section design. The prestressed reinforced latitude is
not orthogonal to the prestressed reinforcement longitude.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-43 Perspective shown in the middle section perpendicular to the prestressed reinforcement
at the lower latitudes. Due to the layout, so bands set components prestressed reinforcement at peak
longitude. This configuration can cause problems in the design.
The following example shows the strip layout design for grid misalignment. Example
The formation 21-44 to the 21-46 column presents the process and create strips between the irregular
grid.
Figure 21-46 presents the design range, the number does not meet requirements. In particular, the bands
rhythm section 3-2 does not consider the columns near the "irregular".
The formation 21-47 to the 21-50 presents a better solution for manual adjustment.
Figure 21-46 The band was created from the design concept. 3-2 rhythm strips are not designed to meet
the requirements.
Figure 21-48 The rate of hand painted (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering
Figure 21-49 Reinventing the strip design is based on the revised rate.
Figure 21-50 Reinventing the strip after using the design tool "Orient Span Cross Section".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Example 21-6 The full range of plate designs for an irregular grid (ACI318 and after tensioning design
TR43)
Figure 21-53 The band was created from the design concept. 3-2 rhythm strips are not designed to meet
the requirements.
Figure 21-55 The rate of hand painted (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 21-56 Reinventing the strip design is based on the revised rate.
Figure 21-57 Reinventing the strip after using the design tool "Orient Span Cross Section".
There are several points to note when drawing the strip near
the wall design.
Because a wall is an ongoing support system, so usually there is no need to design on the floor, and
parallel to, the wall to be durable.
However, should pay attention to the minimum reinforcement requirements and therefore need to
ensure that the design range.
Sometimes the range above or below the top of the wall will have no real stress due to the power and
torque are transmitted continuously back and forth between the wall elements and the elements.
Therefore, many designers remove the top and bottom of the wall strip.
Figure 21-58 Column strip between the strip and the wall is ignored.
Normally the floor is a mixture of PT and RC section. For example, the concrete strip (no cross-linking
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For most standards, the design criteria for the standard spare parts for concrete. You should use the
design in a rhythm strip.
Figure 21-59 presents two examples of the reinforcement has stopped in the prestressed concrete strip
(in gray).
On the left, the 2-1 rhythm is generated from the system and extend this support to other support
systems. This means that all segments are designed according to the plan "is seen as the force behind".
If this option is checked, the concrete strip design is incorrect.
On the right, the range of 1-1, 1-2 (2) and 1-1 (3) hand painted. The plan "Look terminal x is the
measuring system" is not checked, and the bearing width is zero, if the last "x" in the concrete strip.
The plan "is seen as the force behind" is checked 1-1 and 1-1 (3), but not tested 1-1 (2). Such concrete
strip is designed as prestressed concrete, not after stress. Program Concept design of the PT range for
the dominant operating performance and stress testing initially, but not the concrete section.
Figure 21-59 Many of the beats are used to pour concrete model range.
Note: You can specify the concrete strip to the vertical behavior which is very flexible in the direction
Y. Do this in the information layer mesh. See "The characteristics of the" in Page 56,Chapter 16,
"Determining the structure".
Width between system similar length of the strip associated column. If using strips of width between
the different support systems (eg, zero), it is necessary to draw by hand the range for the column and
middle strips, and use rhythm instruments border.
Rhythm section with a width equal to zero if the Span Width Calc is "manual" and many long
segments without any boundaries defined rhythm.
You can specify the minimum number of bands separated by zero designs. Combined with a maximum
distance, the number of sections may be zero.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
This can be beneficial when creating impact on the rate of other bands, without slowing down the
computation. (The overall sections have a significant effect on the calculation time).
An example of this application, see the steps 13th to 15th Page 291 Chapter 44, "System Guide nails
the ".
• In many areas, you can simply design information in a cross-sectional rather than for the entire
span.
• Strip design may not be appropriate. For example, a step you can not directly communicate
with the rhythm (And the strip design) and you want the reinforcement force is perpendicular to
the step design. In this case, the cross section can be drawn parallel to the design steps.
• You will find that hard to identify a range of designs for the configuration area learn very
complex.
Depth ignored in the above layer of concrete is ignored when designing bending and shear in a
way. See "Depth ignore" for more information on this important issue.
Depth ignore underneath the concrete layer beneath is ignored when designing bending and
shear in a way. See "Depth ignore" for more information on this important issue.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Border on the fps for prestressed reinforced with concrete adhesive does not follow the
conditions selected rules (these conditions often includes the length of the rhythm).
Create a branch length of the reinforced area that by design cross section required to be
provided (the length of development, if required, beside this area).
Length area to the right section of the design is less than two values:
• Length nhanh/2.0
Length region in the left section of the design is less than two values:
• Length nhanh/2.0
The purpose of the limit is based on the percentage rate to limit the area of reinforcement rate, either at
the top section of the design or the end of the beat.
Note: You can use Visible Objects dialog box shows the area to be reinforced brick outline and
shadow. The area also displays the percentage of rate review. The area does not display tiles before
calc-all.
Rate ratio Locate the section related to the design of the bearings and the center span. If the ratio
is less than 0:25, the program RAM Concept will apply any rule for the bearings.
The design section is positioned by line with a start point and an end point.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
section.
Note: You can use the relative coordinates to determine the exact length. Or, you can paint User Lines
to snap points to determine the exact length.
22.4 Depth
ignored
Structures designed using concrete sections fully available unless overwritten by "ignoring depth
above" or "below Depth ignored."
In many instances, the use of cross-sectional characteristics of the full concrete section designed to
bend and slide design as a method is not suitable due to improper concrete.
Note: The parameter declaration "depth ignoring" designers section corresponding to the parameters
declared 'Tweaks section "design strips. See "Tweaking section" on page 91,Chapter 21,
"Determination of design strips" for more information.
Sometimes the result is clear when using depth ignored. However, conventional evaluation should be
developed to determine the use of depth ignored.
You should determine whether the concrete is not appropriate based on the rules and evaluate real
scenarios. There are too many permutations concrete formwork to set the rules, and so are presented
below for reference.
The following are examples of when the bypass section design a cross section of
concrete:
Examp
le 1
A second method is as thick as the rules do not comply with the building drop panel. That drop cap.
You should ignore the thickness of the drop in output below the cap. RAM Concept Program only use
drop cap to puncture test.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 22-3 The two methods with the drop cap should be ignored for the bend.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Example 2
A support beam and the vertical part is not an appropriate part of the concrete section. You should
enter the value "ignore depth in the" appropriate.
Example 3
Beams or deepened and the full depth of concrete can not be applied to the bend. You should enter a
value of "Depth ignored under" appropriate.
Figure 22-5 presents the bending moment in the beam perpendicular. For this layout, you need to
determine if it is designed for the bending moment in the beam, and the beam.
If the will is designed for bending moment in the beam, the only problem is the navigation section in
the depth of the design.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
If the will is designed for bending moment in the beam, then you should consider the actual depth that
can be applied to bending.
Figure 22-7 The beams are then not fully consistent with the bending. Depth bypass should be used for
the design section to use a shallower section.
RAM Concept Programme positioning reinforced by the protective layer and the depth parameter
ignored. You should consider this to ensure that the rebar was designed at the appropriate depth.
Figure 22-8 Using depth skip to locate rebar at the correct height.
RAM Concept program may incorrectly identified the critical section. For the special geometry, RAM
Concept program can not check the appropriate section and / or can not check the appropriate section
which is the appropriate rate higher stress. You should see the options section and use critical
assessment of the building RAM Concept program to determine whether the selection and application
of ACI 318 model of program RAM Concept is appropriate or not.
23.2.1 General
Radius largest search radius to determine the scope of the search program RAM Concept for
positions not likely. Analysis preserved when you declare a very large radius, but here there are
two disadvantages: Concept program on the need to see the larger and therefore take time to
check over breach position. More importantly, the program will look at the concept clearance
away from the column to determine the critical section which can lead to a smaller critical
section.
Distance CGS layer of protection will be deducted from the depths in each region to determine
"appropriate depth" to calculate the critical section.
As for the column below, usually the distance from the top to the bottom of the top bar. Concept
Program will be deducted from the gap thickness to determine the distance "d".
If depth in any area smaller CGS layer of protection is determined, then the area is considered a loss.
This angle is the angle of the first beam is measured counterclockwise from the x-
axis global clock.
The number of sections in a region A region can be visualized as the outer columns, drop cap,
beams, etc. The connection of a simple column will have only one region. The columns connected
with the drop cap will have more. This feature allows the program to quantify Concept section
that you want to create in each "zone" is.
You can use this feature to remove unwanted sections, but care must be taken to reduce the number of
unwanted information. The section was created based on cross-sectional area minimal importance, and
not really until after the analysis made. With the declaration of value is 1, you seem to only the most
important section in each region, but this can not be guaranteed.
Determine how to handle edge to handle edge and knowledge gaps of RAM Concept program.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The edges of the handle Void Sector always conserved. However, for the column near the edge, Sector
voids will terminate the critical section before the next version (in the middle column to the next ray of
length equal to the radius search).
The handling of the edge plane defects can produce better results for the critical section at the edge
and corner positions. However, this parameter requires you to review the results carefully to ensure
that the program Concept checked the appropriate section.
The edges of the handle edges Skip generally not preserved. Parameters can try this to see if the
program can find out more concept important area that has been overlooked or not with other
parameters.
Determine the type of affiliate program Concept columns that used to calculate the stresses
allowed. Type angles using rules corner column (after the tension is ignored).
Type column next to use next rules (after the tension is ignored).
Type in the rules used in the column (see section Program Concept is stressed then if P / A exceeds
125 psi).
Type column automatically determine the type of corners, edges or angles within the entire space
around its edges. If the angle is less than 90 degrees, the space is inside the column. If empty corner
from between 90 to 180 degrees, it is the next column. If more than 180 empty corner of the column is
a corner.
See "Link type" column on page 486,Chapter 57, "The design shear note pierced"
for more information.
Using SSR system reinforcement system design nail type, if required. Can calibrate these systems
on Materials.
Aligning with rectangular columns Aligning corner to corner check pierced rectangular columns
in the "calc all".
Create Design designed SSR SSR needed (if possible) where there is not enough strength not
reinforced.
SSR axis aligned with puncture test with SSR Aligning axis puncture test. For example, when
the next version will not be used in parallel with the columns and horizontal bars aligned with
the geometry of the column instead.
Note: This last option is not available for AS3600 for SSR is always aligned with the axis puncture
test.
ACI 421.1R-99 Use My proposed be increased up to the maximum allowed greater use for SSR
design.
Using ACI-421.1R-99 recommendations Vc Allows the user to increase the value vc to use higher
strength calculations for SSR design.
Using ACI-421.1R-99 stud spacing is recommended to increase the maximum allowed distance
maximum spikes higher, depending on the level of stress in the critical
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
section.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Although the ACI 421.1R-99 ACI is a publisher, but not officially recognized by ACI 318
standard. Therefore, use only the opinion of the engineer assessment knowing full knowledge of the
regulations and its recommendations.
The torsion shaft plugged in the range R / S Use this option if you have the secret button on the
minimum torque range by AS3600. The design concept is not really reinforced this, but the rules
used to calculate the appropriate capacity puncture. You should ensure that this reinforcement
will be provided if using this option.
For reinforcement ratio parameters "" for 6:47 equations. You should enter the values in the
equation 6.4.4, EN 1992-1-1:2004.
Presents Beta coefficient ratio maximum stress on critical section (including cutting force and
torque transmission) for the maximum stress due to shear only. This option allows users to select
"Auto Calc", 1.15 (inside), 1.4 (side), 1.5 (top), or enter any positive value directly to the Beta.
The coefficients for each column is given in terms of 6.4.3 (6), EN 1992-1-1:2004 and meant to be used
only when the horizontal stability does not depend on the influence of the frame and where the adjacent
spans a length not more than 25% different.
"Auto Calc" using models and calculation methods as described in Chapter 57, "The design shear note
pierced".
Surrounding the
column 3.
Radius of the circle described appear in each column within the surrounds.
24 Draw the
reinforcement bar
Note: No need to draw the reinforcing bar but there is a high level character that you want to use a
program when used.
• additional reinforcement program by drawing the actual bar (users) on the surface using
different tools
There are two types of reinforcement bars: program and users. The reinforcement is tagged
(identification) is a type or another.
When performing design calculations, creating programs Concept Strengthening Program in addition
to the reinforcement of existing users. In the following calculations, the program will remove all
Concept reinforcement program before starting calculations.
You can switch focus Reinforcement Reinforcement Program into focus by users rarely know how to
change the card (in the properties window of the object). You can also perform this operation to adjust
the design of the Concept program. When performing the following calculations, the program
reinforced Concept design only required external reinforcement is tagged identify users.
You can also try changing my "users" to strengthen "the program", but not so valuable Concept
program has removed all of the existing reinforced when creating the program reinforced the "Program"
last.
• The bar menu - the menu bar is created from Reinforcing concentration and distribution.
• The bar menu - the menu bar (rebar belt / link / binding) is generated from Horizontal
Reinforcement
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Reinforced shear stud type (SSR) Callouts - the horizontal bar fixed to the SSR anchored.
• The SSR bar - the bar menu is created from SSR Callouts.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
You can directly create (by drawing) Reinforcement Reinforcing concentration and distribution. You
can not directly create any other type of reinforcement.
• Absolute height is related to zero data known. Do not suggest this option unless for very
complex geometry.
• Hand under the arch above: Height is measured from under the arch height of the middle bar.
• surface: Height is measured from the surface to mid height bars. The value is almost always
negative
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Class of protection on: Height is measured from the height to the top surface of the bar. The
value is always positive.
• Protected class under: Height is measured from under the arch height of the bottom edge of the
bar.
The value is always positive.
• Straight:
• Hook 90:
• Hook 180:
• Anchored:
The hand used to (1) graphics display (2) The design standards. The choices
are:
• On
• Under
• Both
• Automatically
Note: Special Note - Reinforced set the "Auto" will not appear on the reinforcement plane "above" or
"below". If using reinforced the "Auto", then change the default declaration plane (or more planes) to
make sure that all reinforcement is used can be seen on the surface of report.
Using bars label to identify Bracing. Label is not necessarily the size of the bar. The label of
reinforcing bars (and their properties) defined in the Criteria> Materials.
Drag the slider User oblique bar in the angle range (only for reinforcing focus - see "Extent Tools
Skew Reinforcement" for more information).
The number of bars can be adjusted only if the declared Type Quantity
Quantity
Plane orientation angle reinforcement (reinforced only for distribution - see "Orient
Reinforcement Tool" for more information).
Note: See the "Reinforcing concentration and distribution of callouts" for more info on the second
tab (Presentation).
24.3 Draw
reinforce
d
You can draw reinforced by the
way:
• A group of one or more reinforcing bars focus on using one of three tools Reinforcement focus.
• A group of reinforcing bars distributed using one of three tools Reinforcement distribution
It is expected you will convert reinforced "program" to "User" and revising it. The one exception is
that you can specify the reinforcement underneath. It's not hard if you convert some direct draw
reinforcement and reinforced others.
Original parallelogram rectangle with width by default, but you can use the tool to stretch the width
and adjustable tool to reshape oblique.
You can draw rebar focus by identifying and determining the end point and a point between
end.
Note: See the Example 24-1 "Draw the focus bar at the bottom" for more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: See the Example 24-2 "Draw the focus bar below the mid-point by defining" to
more information.
You can draw rebar focused in two directions by determining the midpoint and endpoint.
).
Note: Create two objects reinforcement: a reinforcement layer objects in an object-latitude and in
longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: See the Example 24-3 "Draw the focus bar at the bottom in both directions" for more information.
Drawing distribution reinforcement of a polygon. Identify polygons by clicking the mouse once or use
the perimeter.
3 Go to the top of the first stick and click closed polygons (or type the letter "c" and press Return).
Note: Create two objects: a polygon object and an object layer reinforcement in reinforced latitude or
longitude.
Note: When the file is run you can see the menu bar with Visible Objects dialog box.
Note: See the Example 24-4 "Draw the bar at the bottom of the distribution on the floor" for more
information.
Note: Create two objects: the object matching the bounding polygon and the object of the
reinforcement in the reinforcement layer latitude or longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: When the file is run you can see the menu bar.
Note: See the Example 24-5 "Draw the bar at the bottom of the distribution over the entire floor" for
more information.
).
2 Click a point on the map.
Appearing as a polygon shape of the. When the file is run you can see the menu bar.
Note: Create three objects: polygonal objects that match the contour of the object in the reinforcement
layer reinforced latitude and reinforced in the object layer reinforced longitude.
Note: See the Example 24-6 "Drawing on the entire floor below" for more information.
Figure 24-3 Draw the focus bar by clicking on the points A and B with the first tool Concentrated
Reinforcement.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Example 24-2 Draw the focus bar below the mid-point determined by
Figure 24-4 Draw the focus bar by clicking on the points A and B with Concentrated Reinforcement
Tools Monday.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 24-5 Draw bars focused in two directions by clicking on the points A and B with tools
Concentrated Reinforcement Cross.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Example 24-4 Draw the bar at the bottom of the distribution on the floor
Figure 24-6 bar Draw polygons on the part of the distribution by clicking on the top 5 with Distributed
Reinforcement tool. Enable drawing tiles.
Figure 24-7 The components of the application are presented via Visible Objects dialog. OFF function
drawing tiles.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Example 24-5 Draw the bar at the bottom of the distribution over the entire floor
Figure 24-8 Draw polygons on the distribution of the sound by clicking on the points A and B for
Distributed Reinforcement of Perimeter tool. Enable drawing tiles.
Figure 24-9 The components of the application are presented via Visible Objects dialog. OFF function
drawing tiles.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 24-10 Draw polygons in the distribution below by clicking on the points A and B on the
Distributed Reinforcement Cross in Perimeter tool. Enable drawing tiles.
Figure 24-11 The components of the application are presented via Visible Objects dialog. OFF
function drawing tiles.
This tool allows you to draw straight line segments to show the desired direction of the sound
application of the selected object reinforcement.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
After drawing the line, Concept program will rotate any object chose reinforced focus and direction for
any distribution that reinforced parallel lines were drawn. Reinforcing bars were selected to create the
same application after calculating orientation.
Change oriented
reinforcement:
4 Click on a place on the plane to create straight lines parallel to the desired direction of
reinforcement.
Note: Select both objects are created with reinforced Concentrated Rebar Tools Rebar Distributed
Cross or Cross of Perimeter oriented tool for both reinforcing objects.
Note: See the Example 24-7 "Orientation focused reinforcement" for more
information.
This tool allows you to draw straight line segments to show the direction desired range of subjects
chose reinforced focus. This tool allows you to create domain parallelogram Reinforcement focus. Can
not drag oblique reinforcement distribution.
4 Click the location in the plane to form a straight line parallel to the desired line.
Note: See the Example 24-8 "Pulling focus oblique reinforcement" for more
information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 24-12 Using Reinforcement Orient tool to determine the straight line AB parallel to the desired
direction
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 24-14 Using Skew Reinforcement tool to determine the line AB parallel to the oblique pull the
desired end
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 24-15 Reinforcement focus range is pulled oblique line parallel to the line AB.
Example 24-9
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 24-16 Using Tools Stretch Point A to expand reinforced focus parallelogram
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
There are five calculated parameters affecting the layout and detailing of reinforced Concept program.
See "Reinforcement layout and the detailed parameters" on page 127,Chapter 27, "Results calculation
".
The formatting functions defined reinforcement distribution focus and use the critical value below
here:
• $ Q - Number of bars
• $ F - Front bar
• $ B - Name bar
• $ L - Length of bar
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The following example shows the generated text to different standards. 24-10 For
The function defined by SSR Callout format using the following key values:
Identification of SSR format Callout "($ R) $ S @ $ T First Spacing = $ F $ U \ n $ N" to create text on
a plan view as:
(12) 8 @ 3 First Spacing = 2.5
inches 3/8 "SSR
For SSR Callout similar, determining the format "$ R $ S rails with studs" create text: 12 bar
with 8 anchor
25 Determination of prestressed
reinforcement
Note: You should skip this chapter if you design structure with reinforced steel core.
No amount of stretching or following layout designed to create a satisfactory PT. This is especially
true for each design must stress before, where concentrated strength, deflection and crack control than
active stress hypothesis.
In the past, many programs have used 2D strain allows active control algorithms for the solution PT.
Many rules have but do not use active stress (assuming) as a design criteria, and other criteria (such as
ACI 318) made in that direction. Many layout prestressed reinforced by computer-generated designs
are not practical for real.
While the program can generate 2D design prestressed reinforced feasible in the rhythm, and the
payload section, the coincidence of the bearings in 3D design makes this extremely difficult.
Thus, the program RAM Concept, to determine prestressed reinforced by drawing them in the plane
and determine the parameters such as the cut and stick. You should use one of the following
requirements for the first votes:
• experience
• Preliminary runs with Strip Wizard
• reasonable conjecture request before compression (P / A)
• random guessing (the strip drawn designs accurately signaling the incorrect guess, and you can
use the "Auditor" to support the repeat)
longitude. By using two layers of prestressed reinforced Concept program, you can separate
the prestressed reinforcement into two groups. Separating prestressed reinforcement allows orthogonal
editing easier and clearer presentation.
It is also possible to separate the PT system (eg, prestressed reinforced with and without adhesion to
concrete) on the second layer.
Note: Latitude and Longitude are just names. You can draw all prestressed reinforcement may be at
different angles on a flat plane.
Note: The declaration of default properties for a drawing tool prestressed reinforcement will declare
characteristics for all the drawing tools prestressed
reinforcement.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
System PT Use label to identify each system PT prestressed reinforcement. Label is not
necessarily the size and type of sound. The material parameters determine the characteristics PT
system. Maybe a combination of the system on a prestressed reinforcement layer.
In concept and program of construction following stress, "bar" is a unit of tension reinforcement after,
similar sound is strengthening of reinforced concrete units. In fact, the industry identified PT
prestressed reinforcement bars as a group have the same anchor. "Group" can only be a sound, as it is
the case for most systems do not stick to the concrete, or "a stick".
While the total number of bars in the Concept and program structures must actually fit together, then
the group of bars in the prestressed reinforcement should not be the same in concept as the program on
the actual structure. Normally not necessarily create a model for each real prestressed reinforcement
for prestressed reinforced Concept - a couple of prestressed reinforced Concept (with the larger bars in
a Prestressed Steel Reinforced) is often used . Except for specific rules requiring reduction in pipe size
cross-section. In this case, the pipe should specify exact size and number of bars on a prestressed
reinforcement.
For example, if the six-tube model 4-bar tube with 2 bars each, for three 4-bar tube with 4 bars each
tube, to show Concept will look exactly the bar (12), but only three of six tubes.
Section (at the end of section 1 and section 2 at the end) section prestressed reinforcement is the
vertical distance between the floor and under the arch of the central prestressed rebar. Another
name for the section "cgs" (the center of gravity bar).
Note: cgs not as deep in the middle of prestressed reinforced tube with adhesion to
concrete.
The size of the floor under the arch (in-plane position accuracy) to cgs is the size of the cut. Thus, if a
point is on the cutting surface is made of thick (drop cap, beams, etc.), the need to pay attention to
dense. The concept is not used in pipe size to the next, or protective layer, to determine the cut.
Path of prestressed reinforced with bars identifying the forces that reinforced prestressed concrete
impact. The cross points (usually the high and low points prestressed reinforcement) define this path.
If necessary, start the intermediate section.
The prestressed reinforcement of the segments. For the elevated floor, each segment has a high point
(endpoint 1) and a low point (end point 2). For copies, just the opposite.
Most of the beats are pre-stressed reinforced with two segments. Beams and rhythm of prestressed
reinforced with a segment
When selecting, consider the layers of protection and load balancing. The different sections along the
length span.
Determine the ratio of bending distance, x, from one end to the point where the inflection point
reinforced prestressed change sign. The rate of bending is proportional to the distance x from end
1 to end 2. 0.2 Value 10% inflection point set distance from the end of one span if the span
between the last 2. These values are often used.
Identify segments harped prestressing reinforcement when a straight section (as opposed to
parabolic section).
If two segments prestressed reinforcement in a rhythm with different values for the last 1 then option 2
point position for sectional balance loads are moving to a low point in the plane to balance the
Advanced analysis of the calculation.
Note: Do not select this option when the end section 1 and 2 at the end of the same height. A segment
with such sections will be increased by zero and so can not formulaic.
• Prestressed reinforced single segment at a time of Half Span Tendon tool (used for beams).
• The prestressed reinforced segment at Half Span tool used Tendon Panel.
• The prestressed reinforced at a rate instruments used Tendon Full Span Panel.
Use the tools in the different cases. It can draw a reinforced and prestressed after
that copy, faster than using the polyline tool and panel.
You can use tools reinforced prestressed beams and half rate for short spans. Section at the end of the 2
values is typically half the size or thickness of the beam focus.
reinforcement.
Note: The sequence of clicks is very important when drawing the prestressed reinforcement rate half
point bending test tools from the high point (end point 1).
2 Click at the two high points prestressed reinforcement. The low (Endpoint 2) automatic positioning
at the midpoint of the prestressed reinforcement.
Note: You can adjust the low point with Stretch Tool ( ) Or select "Location of section 2
for load balancing are "Tendon Properties dialog box.
Tendon Polyline tool ( ) Allows you to draw a series of prestressed reinforced full rhythm with
few clicks.
2 Click a series of high-prestressed reinforcement. The low point (end point 2) automatic positioning
at the midpoint of the high points.
3 Click the mouse to click on points after the last high. 4 Press
Enter
Figure 25-1 The prestressed reinforced with parallel layout and spacing shall not exceed five feet.
Figure 25-2 The prestressed reinforced with oblique layout and spacing shall not exceed five feet.
Distance prestressed reinforcement options are Fixed, Equal and Auto Connect.
"Fixed" draw the prestressed reinforcement at the spacing determined accurately. Prestressed
reinforced skewers without this feature.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
"Equal (not to exceed the maximum level)" drawing the prestressed reinforcement is equidistant at most
distances.
"Auto connect (based on the last edge)" drawing the prestressed reinforcement is connected to the next
point on the final cross section of prestressed reinforced panels.
Do not start prestressed reinforcement / not end prestressed reinforcement Skip edge of
prestressed reinforcement.
2 Click in the high and low points of prestressed reinforced prestressed reinforcement in the first
section of prestressed reinforced panels.
3 Click in the high and low points of prestressed reinforced side panels opposite section prestressed
reinforcement.
2 Click at the high point of prestressed reinforced prestressed reinforcement in the first section of
prestressed reinforced panels.
3 Click at the high point of prestressed reinforced the opposite side section prestressed reinforced
panels (in the direction of clockwise or counterclockwise clock).
Note: The low (Endpoint 2) automatically positioned at the midpoint of each prestressed reinforcement.
You can adjust the cutting by hand or using tools Calc Profile ( ) To automatically adjust. Too
many walls standing in prestressed reinforcement can bend backwards, cracking copy. For reasons
of
this or other reasons, should have a wall stand or balance of the load somewhat consistent from beat to
beat the other.
2 Click the Calc Profile tool ( ). Calc dialog appears Tendon Profile and inform equilibrium load
current.
3 Enter the desired load balancing (negative values) in the dialog box and click Calc Calc Tendon
Profile.
You can choose two segments in the same rhythm and Concept program calculates points based on a
low cliff average
Generally not necessarily correct balance of equal weight in each beat. But do not have too many
different low points. The rounded cross-section values can manually create a more robust design.
If desired balance load is too high, the program can calculate the cross-section concept is sound,
making the calculation of faulty results.
When the surface layer is considered one of the prestressed reinforcement activities, the program will
add the category Concept Change Profiles on the Tools menu.
This menu item allows you to change the section prestressed reinforced with a given value to a new
value. In many cases, this can be useful things like changing the beam or depth.
1 Open the layer plane from prestressed reinforcement layer reinforced Latitude or Longitude
5 Do not tick prestressed reinforcement layer that you want to edit. 6 Do not mark
the end but you do not want to edit, and click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Concept program using relevant values FSE (identified in the site conditions
Materials) is the effective stress for any prestressed reinforcement without stimulus.
Lost anchor friction coefficient friction stress when anchored. This is no fractional units. You can
enter 2% loss is 0:02. Most of the proposed supplier PT value zero for non prestressed
reinforcement with concrete adhesive. You can also consult with local PT provider of prestressed
reinforced with adhesion to concrete.
The pendulum friction coefficient of friction calculated using characteristics (k) to predict losses
due to curvature random (in the horizontal and vertical planes). It is the product of the coefficient
of friction angle and angle random change per unit length.
Note: Many engineers (especially in Australia) used to shake the determination of the random angle
change per unit length. The engineer can shake that coefficient Concept program used, k, with the
following relationship: k = AngularWobbleCoefficient * mu.
Coefficient of friction losses due to curvature angle intention (in the horizontal and vertical
planes). Most designers know that mu.
Distance Distance remove widgets size wedge anchor paragraph indentation depth. Occurs when
the driver releases the stress in the stimulus.
The long-term losses such as the loss of creep and shrinkage of concrete, and the elongation of
the bar. Also includes losses due to shrinkage of concrete elastic whether short-term losses
agreement.
Draw the tool size to Jack ( ) By clicking on the rectangle around the stress of prestressed
reinforced.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Click in the opposite corner of the rectangle surrounding the activity prestressed reinforcement.
Note: You can delete a single click on the mouse by double-clicking it. To delete multiple size, mark the
unless the stimulus object, then select click and delete.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
RAM Concept program has four different types of load. These cars are affected by the different ways to
reduce work load, depending on the design code. The types are:
Load (cumulative) To reduce the work load "accumulate" particularly if permitted in most code
regul
ation
s.
The payload type is defined in the load window. See 10.2 to the 10.6 Program 10, "Determining Load"
for more information.
Note: Work load (ceiling) can be reduced when the RAM Structural System, but not in RAM Concept
program.
Type of load - only certain kinds of loads can be reduced when (as described in
abo
ve)
Member Type - Most codes are there special rules for concession of certain components (such as
columns)
Biggest concession is allowed - Users can specify the maximum rebate value for each component.
The level of support - Most codes are considered when calculating the level of rebate allowed. If
you use the scope of the automatic calculation program RAM Concept, the level of support is
assumed to be one.
Scope accessories - Most codes used composition range of accessories such as key parameters
reduced load.
Incidence - RAM Concept Program have two options for code using the incidence of component
parameters such as the load decreased.
RAM Concept program calculates three parameters of the final value. You can see the value in the
plane as shown in the "View Results column element LLR" and "See the LLR results latitude band
design "on page 131.
You can override calculated by determining the values of the parameters. The next section shows how
to adjust these values.
You can specify values for the column load reduction, puncture test, the strip segment designs and the
design range.
To override the value determined for the level, scope accessories, and spheres of
influence:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
subject
5 Click OK.
27 Calculation
results
Generally you many times the results of the modeling and design process. You can quickly calculate
the element has been created (eg self-weight deflection) or wait until the model created.
It is possible that you will not see the results until you have drawn all prestressed reinforcement, load
range and design. However, you should "run" file in the model to check for errors. This way, you can
avoid repeating the same error model.
27.1 Calculation
results
You can charge all or a few or no results are considered part of the calculation options.
The model error is very common and you may encounter error messages when calculating results. If the
file has run successfully without error, Calc All icons will be grayed out. If errors occur, the computer
is not grayed out. See "Error Analysis" for more information.
The slider to the left of the dialog box Calc calculations determining the Concept. The choices are:
Through analysis calculations are made up to and including the global analysis (deflection of the
torque, etc.) and the power strip.
Through Design Concept design performance range, the cross-cutting and anti-puncture test,
besides calculating Through analysis.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Through Concept layout layout done on Layer reinforcement reinforcement program, in addition
to computing through design.
All Concept detailed implementation program to reinforce the single bar (can be viewed in the
perspective), in addition to computing through layout.
The box to the right of the dialog window Calc nhập have choices on how to implement the program
calculates Concept. The choices are:
Warning ignored warnings do not stop the calculations, but must be added as a note to the Log
Calc. This parameter is disabled by default.
Only overdue items not replace existing calculated results by the new calculations unless
Concept found that the current calculation overdue. This opens the default parameters.
Calc In Options:
Self-stabilizing structure in the X and Y Tu creating a stable small horizontal bracing for
unrestricted structural level. Only suitable for structures without external transverse loads.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Create static load can view this parameter to control whether the program can generate loads of
RAM Concept can be viewed in the perspective plane and the static load or not. This parameter
has no effect on the actual load calculations. Normally we do not check this section.
Includes bearing on the static load includes the weight of the bearings (columns and walls) as
load. You should consider that the program calculated based Concept shear strain in the column
below provoke a reaction in a total column includes any load is applied directly above.
You can convert the code design in the design process. It should be noted that the conversion of the
code will not automatically change the load factor. See "Creating the load combination" on page 35 for
more information about changing the code of the system load certain code.
See Chapter 26, "Using Reduced load", For more information on load code.
If the software or the load torque is the sole large dome can resist stress. You can extract this stress by
reducing duplication.
The zero stress factor repeated use "accelerators" to make the convergence faster. Acceleration value 1
is no acceleration, while too large values can cause large fluctuations rather than convergence. The
Concept of Value RAM speeds as follows:
greatest acceleration acceleration = maximum allowed by the user control (typically 1.5)
Repeat to use the number of iterations used in the calculations. The number of repetitions, the
higher the stress levels as close to zero.
RAM Concept program of appropriate curvature ratio (ECR) in each section: ECR =
Ce / Cg
In that
= sectional curvature
In that
kc = creep coefficient of concrete design (usually 3.35) = tension / stretch the elastic total
Note: According to ACI 209, the 3:35 value is the average value of creep. The Concept RAM files
using default values.
Tension shrinkage shrinkage value designed to be used to determine the long-term curvature of
the cross section.
There are five parameters affecting the implementation of the program concept layout and
reinforcement details. Three of these parameters are valuable "waste" of composition affect the priority
of the
Concept program to implement reinforcement layout program. They do not affect the core
steel users. The waste
parameters are:
Waste length bar When this value, the program will offer Concept higher priority to minimize
weight reinforced. Thereby, Concept program also creates a larger number of callouts.
Waste group length bar When this value, Concept Program will give higher priority to minimize
the total length of all combined callouts. Thereby, Concept program also reinforced using more
than necessary in many areas.
Hao callout charge of the bar When this value, Concept Program will provide higher priority to
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
minimize the total number callout. Thereby, Concept programs also use reinforced
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
than necessary in many areas, and Concept program can provide reinforcement in unnecessary places.
The use of default values for the three parameters are usually generated waste composition reinforced
the program can accept. However, can try to adjust these parameters if you want the program concept
has different layout.
Program length round bars Concept reinforcement layout made with the program length is a
multiple of this value. Only in cases where the program does not attempt to use this length is
around both ends of the reinforcing steel callout not straight (we are hook or anchor).
Class of protection of Concept program uses sound values when elaborated both reinforced and
reinforced the use of the program. Always pull back the top bar - except the anchor bar - from
the edge by this value.
27.2 Analysis of
errors
Two types of errors can occur in the calculation: it is fatal and non-fatal (error harmless and harmful).
Program generated RAM Concept Analysis Error message if an error occurs.
If the error occurred fatal error, can not continue analysis. You have error correction, then re-
calculated. For example, if the structure is unstable Concept program can not create a triangular matrix
stiffness.
After the error occurs non-fatal error, you can choose to continue or not analytical calculations. For
example, if the load is not in the structure, you can do one of the following steps:
• stop analyzing
27.3 Recalculate
Some or all of the information analysis becomes old when calculated calibration model. Click the Calc
All ( ) Function to run new computing analysis. If Calc All become gray ( ), The analysis
results are current.
When you re-calculated, the analysis will start from the point where the information is no longer valid.
For example, if the additional load, it will not affect the stiffness matrix. The calculation will start by
analyzing the load and then continue the design. However, if you edit the concrete element, then the
calculation will start again from the beginning.
Open calc
log:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Time analysis of the stiffness matrix is function of the number of finite element intersection. You can
speed up analysis time using the finite element greater than the start of preliminary. Means defining
element desired size when making large nets.
Designing the band "The smallest separation" and "the biggest gap separating"
Time is calculated function of the number of bands the rhythm section and the design on the range.
Each band rhythm section with "n" to create separation within at least "n +1" design range, more if
most dominant distance. You can speed up analysis time using a small number of separated and a
maximum distance for preliminary design.
Boundarie
s
The form factor of the load and how to create more alternate calculations. The Concept for contour
algorithm is quite effective and thus not slowing down the computation a lot. However, you can,
accelerate computation time by jettisoning the load pattern and set boundaries alternating coefficients
similar to the load factor of the window load combination (Choose Criteria > Load to open the Load
Combo Combination).
SSR Design
Design shear reinforcement style nail increased more significantly the computation time. Maybe
consider obstacles drawing check breached until most of the design is almost complete.
The analysis of cracked section takes up considerable time. If you are not interested in the results or
are not appropriate, you can turn off the detailed analysis section.
28 View
Results
RAM Concept program creates a large number of results from the analysis model.
If you take the time to learn how to calculate the Concept program results (and the ability to access
them), the Concept program can be a much more powerful tool in your workspace.
• Load
• Load combination
• The design standards
• Status Design
To locate a specific result, you need to know its layer. Only new layer with the plane, the perspective
and the writing table presents the results. For example, find the load: the layer plane load deflection,
but the deflection is in operation, the LC layer Service.
• reinforcement volume
• status
• deflection
• the prop jet
• before compression
• Load balancing
• the bending moment contours
• section stress (for some code)
• puncture shear strain
• pressure load
Note: When creating a new file without using a template, the file parameter declaration of the new
default file RAM Concept program. Parameters declared default file new planes are pre-configured to
present some results in an organized manner. You can change this by plane correction tangible
objects and charts. Always remember that the directions below may not be effective or appropriate.
RAM Concept program stored envelope of reinforcement required for all design standards Design
Status folder. There are a number of planes available to present various reinforcement. The name of the
plane reinforcement parameters declared in default file new suit visible reinforcement.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
View
reinforced
If this plane is more information than you require, such as using a plane-plane reinforced bottom
longitude.
reinforcement. 2 Choose
View> Plot ( ).
3 Highlight Active. 4
reinforcement.
Concrete components may not comply with codes despite reinforcement. For example, how much can
limit cut in the composition. RAM Concept Program will notify the breach to cut excess capacity.
Status messages for code violations. When strips designed to comply with the rules in the code design
criteria, the status is "OK". If a violation occurs, the status is "Failed" or "Exceeded" (according to
rules) and RAM Concept recognition program code rules.
Concept program saved envelope status for all design standards in the directory layer design brief.
View status
28.2.3 View
deflection
Maybe you are interested in the different plane deflection. Often it is for deflection
RAM Concept standing but the program and therefore deflection inside viewable.
The intensity chart and use contour deflection results not cracked section (Igross) and do not consider
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Access to the intensity graph and contour drawings through tab "Slab".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Results deflection taking into consideration issues chapped chart available in the Analysis section and
use the tab deflection histograms LT.
This chart is shown by default in the new file in the Rule Set Designs> Design Service
> L.T. Deflection Plan or Rule Set Designs> Max Service Design> LT Deflection Plan (according to
code).
Note: You can change the plane of the parameters are declared drawings do not match the name of
the drawing again. Therefore it is not recommended to change the drawing.
Note: The chart deflections "copies" (identified by chart tab) is available for loads and load
combinations. The chart deflections "cross section analysis" (identified by chart tab) is available for
the rules.
1 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Max Service Design> LT Plan deflection.
The prop jet plane is always the default for most loads and load combinations.
You can see the level of prestressed reinforced and prestressed bearing the impact of the plane limited
by the pre-compression. The default plane in the x and y.
You can see the percentage of the load is balanced by the tension in the strip after design.
View the percentage load is balanced on a flat surface design latitude range
Note: See the "Calculate the percentage of the load balancing" on page 315 for more information.
Through the contour plane bending moment, can understand the behavior of complex curved floor.
Bending Moment Distribution Tools ( ) Increases the usefulness of the plane.
Many codes have limits stress-stressed concrete floor below. You should be aware of this stress for
initial design work and design activities. Typically you will see in the stress range than contoured
design, because the design process is rarely used since the peak stress contours.
1 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Initial Service Design> Top Stress Plan.
1 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Initial Service Design> Bottom Stress Plan.
1 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Service Design> Top Stress Plan.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
1 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Service Design> Bottom Stress Plan.
Note: If you can see too much information, the corrected drawings. You can check these possibilities,
or limit the range
RAM Concept Program pierced shear test (or both directions) for the appropriate code. Calculate the
stress at the top of each plane is likely to be damaged and comparison with calculated stresses with the
allowable value.
Note: "CTSR" is the ratio of stress buttons closed. This rate is only for AS3600. See "AS 3600
Puncture shear strain model "on page 491,Chapter 57, "Notes on the design shear fun puncture ".
You can see the results for each load reduction "component" (column, puncture test, the strip segment
designs and the design range) and several load.
The files with "nails the system" is unchecked in the New File dialog box is the surface pressure load.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
1 Choose Layers> Load Combinations> Service LC> Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Note: You can add the flat surface of the soil bearing pressure on the files. See "Creating new plane
results ".
When declaring a new default file, certain objects are visible by default. Can edit tangible objects to
show more or less results.
These parameters control charts drawing view results on a plane or perspective. Setting the default file
with the declared parameters for the given graph plane or separate perspectives. You can change the
settings to suit your requirements, or make the plane easier to read.
appears.
Note: The way the plane and the perspective is often named to reflect the declared parameters of the
drawing is used. If you change the drawing parameters declaration, the name of the drawings may not
be precise.
Note: You must first open the front plane or perspective drawings using command.
The following example shows how to draw borders on the design bending moment intensity: Plane
Reinforcement:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Select "Bending"
• Click OK.
Can make the new plane for the results are not available in the plane of the new default file. See
"Creating a new plane" on page 11 and "Creating a new perspective" on page 11 for more information
on how to make planes and new perspectives.
The following example shows how to create the jet plane LC Service:
• RAM Concept program automatically attach the word "plan" is not defined in the name and layer
name.
• Click OK.
• Reaction tab.
• Choose Active.
• Choose Standard.
• Choose the bearings marked (by Value) for the part you want to see the reaction.
The distribution curve is generated by the tool Bending Moment Distribution ( ), Vertical Shear
Distribution tools ( ), Tools Axial Force Distribution ( ) And Distribution Plot Selected tool (
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
). The chart presents the predicted values along the line is drawn
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
across the. The program predicts RAM Concept is based on the results of the elements.
Calculation Method of Concept program RAM ensure results for segments range of design and design
range with load balancing node. However, the results for the graph cuts through the elements is not
necessarily accurate, and may not be accurate for the coarse mesh and the element with the higher
application rates. Although the method of calculation program RAM Concept ensures elastic stress
energy stored in each element of the energy load acting on the element, the element for the unusual
shape ( as the triangular points), the formation energy can create mutations virtual local stresses. Note
that this restriction does not affect the band segment designs or design range and does not affect the
calculation of reinforced RAM Concept program.
You can create charts using the tool torque distribution Bending Moment Distribution ( ). Drawings
are displayed along a straight line drawn shows the distribution of the bending moment around the
axis line. The value of the 2D graph (if any) Plot dialog control ( ) Does not affect the torque
distribution chart. Integrated torque values are presented below the graph is the sum torque
distribution range chart, but does not include bending moment, which is due to the axial force and the
variation in the focus of the projector (such as bending moment due to the axial force on the plate and
the beam-beam wings caused T). You should use the range of design and the design range to
determine the number of designs when they arrested both components of the bending moment.
Figure 28-1 on page 133 A graphical representation of the distribution of torque to the torque diagram
drawn on U.S. borders for the moment Mx. The chart shows the torque distribution for My line is
drawn in the plane parallel to the y axis. Distribution curve integrated value is -657 kip-ft and peak
value is -73.9 kip (or - 73.9 kip-ft/foot). The value contour graph does not affect the value distribution
curve. If you use tools Selected Distribution Plot ( ) Instead of Bending Moment Distribution tools
( ), The contour diagram and distribution curve displays the same value.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 28-1 torque graph shows the distribution of torque USA on an outline diagram Mx.
You can create the distribution curve using the tool cutting force Distribution Vertical Shear ( ).
Drawings are displayed along a straight line drawn shows the shear stress distribution across the
vertical line. The value of the 2D graph (if any) Plot dialog control ( ) Does not affect the shear
distribution curve. Integrated shear values are shown below the graph cutting force distribution is
integrated range of drawings. The range and scope of design designed to give accurate values
integrated over.
You can create charts with axial force distribution tool Axial Force Distribution ( ). Drawings are
displayed along a straight line drawn shows the distribution of the axial force (horizontal) across the
line. The value of the 2D graph (if any) Plot dialog box ( ) Control chart has no effect on axial
force distribution. Value of the axial force integration is presented below chart axial force
distribution is integrated range of drawings. The range and scope of design designed to give
accurate values integrated over.
You can create the distribution curve tool selected by Distribution Plot Selected ( ). Drawings are
displayed along a straight line drawn shows the distribution of values is shown in the 2D chart (due
Plot dialog box ( ) Control). Integrated value is shown below the chart is a summary of the
distribution range of the drawing. Integrated value may or may not be useful depending on the number
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
of the graph (for example, the integration of the stress diagram is worth force / length that is largely
useless).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
It is important to note when using tools Selected Distribution Plot ( ) With the contour chart axes
'max' and 'min' (such as LC Max Bottom Stress Service Plan). The stress diagram "max" and "min"
presents the largest value or smallest at each point in the village. At each point along the chart is
selected, the distribution of key values, the spindle may vary. Values for integrated distribution
curve mathematical sense, but does not have any meaning any structure.
If you want to see the distribution of stress (or torque, etc.) around a separate axis, you can use the Plot
dialog box ( ) To set the axis contour diagram (plotted using Value Axis) will be the axis of the
results that you want to see. Selected Tools Distribution Plot ( ) Represents value for that axis.
The chart shows the distribution of the results of the element. at the edge of both elements, RAM
Concept Program calculations using simple average, giving reasonable results in most cases, but can
deform the integration results The average RAM Concept of small particles results with the results of
the major element. The distribution curve selected is influenced more from the average plane of the 2D
chart by Plot dialog box ( ) Control.
The calculation of the average induced strain is one more reason that you should always use the range
and scope of design designed to quantify design.
28.4.7 Summa
ry
The distribution curve section allows you to view the values of variables can analyze any horizontal
lines are drawn on the structure. Through this distribution curve, we will understand the behavior of the
structure, but not to use them to design quantitative. You should always use the range and scope of
design designed to determine the number of design
RAM Concept Program presents longitudinal reinforcement in the plane with the following
parameters:
• Some bars
• bars (defined as the range of design features)
• length of the bar
• bar spacing
Figure 28-2 and Figure 28-3 presented in the column reinforcement. There are two design callouts for
the band at the end of the column. Reinforced according to different requirements on each side. Need to
rationalize and detailed information on how reasonable the bar. Reinforcement bars left nine # 5, each
bar 6.5 ft long. [Nine 16 mm bars, each 1.8 m long bar].
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 28-2 Design mode: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (U.S. Unit)
Figure 28-4 and Figure 28-5 Reinforced presented below. Reinforcement bars of fourteen # 4, each bar
length
9.5 ft. [Fifteen bars 12 mm long, 2.9 meters long and each bar].
The Concept of reinforcing bar length determined by the stops. The stop is located at the cross-range
segment designs, where the bars do not need to have any design standards.
Length bars are shown on the plane does not include the length and embedded development.
28.5.3 Orientation
reinforced
Concept drawing program reinforced the chart along the axis defined by the cross-sectional design of
the first strip and the final.
The bar on the run "through" axis and parallel to it. The under run bar "below" this axis and parallel to
it. The chart at right angles to the shaft reinforcement.
Figure 28-6 presentation axis, line AB, for mid range. A point at the midpoint of the range between the
first section, and point B at the midpoint of the range between the final cut.
The design and computing capacity is always assumed that the reinforcement (unless the prestressed
reinforcement) cut perpendicular to the surface. If reinforcement perpendicular distance (as shown in
Figure 28-6), The amount of reinforcement can be increased.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Program Concept presents the shear reinforcement in the plane with the following parameters:
For U.S. units and bar size, length 2.78 ft area. and distance to 4 feet # 4 at 8:34 central. "
For metric units and bar size, the 0.772 m long and 4 feet distance 12 mm in focal 193 ".
Figure 28-7 Design mode: Shear Reinforcement Plan (U.S. units and meters).
Notes pierced shear design is presented in Chapter 57, "Notes on Design shear pierced ".
Occasionally poked shear strain status is "Non-Standard Section". This is a warning, not an error.
"Non-Standard Section" means at least one of the important sections RAM Concept program is to
check that the column does not completely match the ACI one of three cases: inside, edges and
corners.
In the case of "Non-Standard Section", you need to check the important details of Concept program has
identified, and assessment to determine whether they match with ACI puncture model (always check
with your eyes the critical section, even though the program is not notified Concept that we are not
prepared). The Concept is the stress ratio for the non-standard section.
Occasionally poked shear strain status is "Non-Standard Section". This is a warning, not an error.
"Non-Standard Section" means at least one of the important sections RAM Concept program is not
checking for that column is consistent with one of three cases: inside, edges and corners.
In the case of "Non-Standard Section", you need to check the important details of Concept program has
identified, and assessment to determine whether they match with ACI puncture model (always check
with your eyes the critical section, even though the program is not notified Concept that we are not
prepared). The Concept is the stress ratio for the non-standard section.
If breached section can be classified according to any rule "standard" does, it will be seen as more of
"standard". The rules for the section "Standard" is:
perpendicular edges:
square corners:
Note: These rules apply to the EC2 section before decorating the corners.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 Select the Active tab and check to make active chart. 4 Make
Note: The name of the plane or perspective, often presenting its histogram parameters. If you change
the parameters of the chart, you should rename the plane or perspective.
29.2 The
The Active check the version tab allows you to display and control chart analysis much like the torque,
shear, axial, torsion, deflection, and the jet canopy substrate. For drawing the axial stress or shear
stress on a plane, to draw selected depth values. The plotted value other depending on depth.
We suggest bending the flat contour chart. If not, the borders will be drawn for each element, which can
make it difficult to monitor the results of a larger area (in addition, of the amount drawn, does not show
any function other than the of plane bending). RAM Concept program enables solution to determine the
value of the selected chart. The chart finer solution requires many times enlarged screen.
For the contour diagram, you can control the frequency of the line by definition do not select "Use
default magnitudes" and enter the value desired contour. For color contour diagrams, can declare the
upper and lower limits for the value of the plan by entering the largest value and the smallest.
Available in the chart to layer loads, load combinations and the standard rules.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 29-1 Plot dialog box with the results chart drawing
operations.
There are three contexts: "Standard", "Max" and "Min". Max and Min context is used to surround the
largest and smallest values for each point on the map.
But the significance of contextual Standard, Max and Min somewhat blatantly clear, Table 29-1
Concept program listing to calculate these values have to consider the weight and form factor standard
and alternating loads.
Program Concept store only a limited number of copies value analysis. For example, the standard value,
the largest and least Mx, My, and MXY are kept, while the value of the torque around the axis (other
than the x-or y-) is calculated by the calculation Mohr's Circle. Similarly the standard value, the largest
and smallest Px, Py, Vxy, Mx, My, and MXY are used to calculate the stress value at the top, in the
middle and below.
Since the largest value and the smallest is not stored for these values, the calculation of the maximum
and minimum value is only relative.
For example, if a form is load deflection deflection x is 10 and y is 0, while the other sample
deflection deflection x is 0 and y is 10, the deflection will be 14.4 Max context, whether maximum
deflection shall never exceed 10.
The value chart context largest and smallest the following should be considered
approximate:
Value occurs when the combined load of all, Value occurs when the combined load of all,
Linear combination taking the maximum value of the four values taking the minimum value of the four values
Load of the standard load for each payload below: for each payload below:
combina values using the • Standard load factor * Max • Standard load factor * Max
tion unit standard load factor • Alternating load factor * Max • Alternating load factor * Max
• Standard load factor * Min • Standard load factor * Min
• Alternating load factor * Min • Alternating load factor * Min
Value occurs when the combined load of all Value occurs when the combined load of all
the forces, taking the maximum value of the the forces, taking the minimum value of the
four values for each payload below: four values for each payload below:
• Standard load factor * Max • Standard load factor * Max
• Alternating load factor * Max • Alternating load factor * Max
Load • Standard load factor * Min • Standard load factor * Min
combina
(Not available) • Alternating load factor * Min • Alternating load factor * Min
tion
Plus the single largest value of all the Plus the value of the smallest unit of all
group
horizontal load value (of correct type): horizontal load value (of correct type):
inside
• Standard horizontal load factor * Max • Standard horizontal load factor *
• Coefficient of alternating horizontal Max
load * Max • Coefficient of alternating horizontal
• Standard horizontal load factor * Min load * Max
• Coefficient of alternating horizontal • Standard horizontal load factor * Min
The rules load * Min • values
Coefficient of alternating horizontal
All load values combinations relevant biggest All load combinations relevant
norm (Not available) load * Min
minimum
29.3 Reaction
Select Active in the Reaction tab allows you to control the display and analysis of responses. Standard
button displays context jet corresponding standard results (More information on the benchmark results
and the existing boundary Chapter 46, "The analysis notes"). For benchmark results, you can display
any number of columns jet for top / bottom, wall above / below, the dome base / prop in the system,
surround soles / systems support with straight lines, and the standard jet is used to puncture test. If the
column above and below in the same position in the plane, and both cell Column Column Above and
Below are selected, the overall reaction is shown in that position. The same applies to the wall above
and below the wall.
The other buttons in the group context for the results to be included. Program Concept displays the jet
column (top / bottom) and puncture test results include the selected context. The wall jet will be
included and can be used to draw in the later version.
Only the value of the response context "Standard" for the layer loads and load combination, in the
context of how the six available for loads, load combinations and layer design standards.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
29.4 Strip
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
When selecting Active in the Strip tab, you will show the analysis results for the designed range. Each
chart shows the value of the variant selected value in each section range segment design (along the
axis of each strip is selected). The chart is related to the largest and smallest moments and shear forces
can be displayed, allowing the value surrounded separate chart will be displayed.
Torsion is the twisting of values around the center of the strip segment design, with the power button
element.
Twist is the value of the torque by the torque roll (MXY designed to strip parallel to the x or y axis) is
calculated from the element stresses judgment (and not necessarily equal to the power button e). Not
recommended for use value Twist twisted design.
Absolute synthesis Twist is twisting absolute value along the cross section. This value differs from the
value of "Twist" that it is always positive, and in the calculations, the twisted values of the different
symbols is not canceled.
Do not use the Twist Absolute values of selected design unless design twists Wood-Armer.
Note: Accuracy of the Absolute value Twist and Twist are determined from the judgment element
stress and depending on the quality and fineness of the mesh. Unlike Torsion values, these values are
not guaranteed to be equal to the applied load button.
Can find the definitions of the different values of Chapter 46, "The analysis notes".
Contextual Value range "standards" are only available for loads and load combinations layer, while
the four available contexts is how to load, load combination and layer design standards.
The cross section of chart analysis is only available for the standard design layer.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The value of "Top Developed" and "Developed Bottom" presentation reinforced top and bottom are
fully developed as required in each position.
The design chart section is only available for the standard design and the design brief layer.
• It spans Details
• No details rhythm, and
• Reinforcement provided by users.
Details are presented in the rhythm 49.1 page 341 Chapter 49, "The Note on Reinforcement".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Impact of Span Detailing Contexts up the charts presented in Table 29-2 and Table 29 - 3.
For Layer design mode, the context of "With Span Detailing" including the impact of reinforcement
calculated assuming development of the reinforcement of the chart was developed.
When choosing context "With Span Detailing" or "User Provided Reinf" Concept drawing program
reinforced chart "horizon".
In the chart the horizon, each value is calculated for valid rhythm section (as shown by the horizontal
line) instead of the value will be interpolated between the sections. While this is a fundamentally
different nature graphics, detailed presentation of the actual reinforcement bars used in the callout
chart values the horizon.
For the standard design, the impact of Span Detailing Context (except to draw the horizon) as shown
in Table 29-2 following.
For Layer design mode, the impact of Span Detailing Context (for other than drawing the horizon) as
shown in Table 29-3 following.
Not Reinforced by
Value There are more rhythms
h providing users
ave more
Over rhythm Values are calculated for an extended section Vector components of
When
Und on the detailed rules of rhythm (see the radio range of users
calculating a
er 49.1 "rate details", Chapter 49, "The intersects with the
cross section
On Reinforced Notice "). section
an
On
d the At The values are plotted as the largest reinforced Vector components of
Under
Under calc calculated for a cross section of the the expanded scope
Dev Dev ulated for a reinforcement and
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
section was developed from the rebar are not user bar intersects with
developed detailed rate (see 49.1 "Details the section
rhythm",Chapter 49, "The Note on
Reinforcement").
Using these values in the calculation of the
final performance test.
Density
shear
When
cutting
calculating a When calculating a cross section (Not)
force
cross section
cutting
forces
Distanc
eTable 29-3 Impact of Context on the detailed rate chart design mode
The chart analysis pierced only available for the standard design and the design brief layer.
Notes pierced shear design is presented in Chapter 57, "Notes on Design shear pierced ".
The "Non-Standard Section" is presented in "The results of shear strain poked" on page 135.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
30 Use Auditor
Sometimes the result designed by the Program RAM Concept can make you confused or surprised. It
may be due to incorrect data entry, report the unusual synergy (eg, negative torque at mid-span), or
interpreted code rules. The Auditor will help you function information display design reviews.
4 Check out the how the total force (moment, shear, axial force, etc.).
Step 1: Once the norm to make a selection reinforced "Pass 1". For most rules, this parameter declaration
is fully designed.
Step 2: Once the norm to make a selection reinforced "Pass 2" was needed in addition to a summary of
the steps 1b. For most rules, this step does not have any objects appear, but for some rules, such as
shear-design and design flexibility, they need to know to be reinforced before step 1 summary
conducting design.
Step 3: Every rule made final inspection (not wired to be added in this step) and final analysis.
• Pass 1
• Pass 2
• The final test
Auditor display:
• of concrete blocks
• height on the bottom of each concrete block
• depth and width of each concrete block
• durability and last initial (and cylindrical shapes)
• Ec value and last initial (elastic modulus)
• density
• with or without blocks from the center cut
See "Define" center "Concrete" on page 330 for more details about the center cut.
• height
• elastic stress
• Ec value (modulus)
• section bars
• diameter bars
The torque and power envelope for the largest and smallest cut is shown. They are adjusted, if
appropriate, for torque and axial force design. The outline lists the total force following:
• Mr. (bending)
• Ts (torque)
• Mz (bending film)
Depending on the standard rules, RAM Concept program further reinforced in sections.
• In the
• At the bottom
• Density shear
• Distance shear
• Cutting force (the density with distance)
The bracket appears after each result code presentation rules are governed. 7 The
Depending on the standard rules, Auditor power display section and other information.
• Tension section
o curvature
o tension above, between and below
o height
o tension
o stress
o section bars
o force
o height
o sectional tensions
o sectional tension components (reviewed prestressed reinforced corners)
o Prestressed reinforcement force (force fit on the plane cross-section)
Note: Check the standard rules have significantly less data than the design brief inspection audit.
Thus, the test may be the norm rather useful.
3 Click on the section plane in strip design, or design section, which you want to check.
Note: You may find it convenient to display the range of designs to choose the information you want.
Note: Auditor selection function (i) section closest (of the band spans the visible) to the clicked point,
or (ii) does not select anything, if there is no section within 3 feet [1m ] clicked point. The section itself
does not need to display them.
Note: The Auditor will not work if not done Calc All.
Note: Results may not be current Auditor if the analysis is not applicable. (If Calc All become gray (
), The analysis results are current).
Can access this information from a variety of planes, but the instructions below are for use Rule Set
Design Service.
3 Click on the section plane strips are not designed to meet the performance standards and you need
directions
lead
.
Auditor window
open.
4 Scroll to the text by two asterisks surround (top and bottom) near the test below.
If the maximum tensile stress within the code, the information is not displayed. If the tensile stress of
concrete is calculated beyond the permissible limits, the Auditor will recommend increasing
percentage bar to limit the stress response.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 30-1 shows text Auditor percentage increase required to comply with the code.
Note: compression before impact and balance of prestressed reinforced not necessarily be limited to
the range (and strip design) with prestressed reinforcement. Due to prestressing is diversion (flow P /
A) ranges from the design, so the percentage increase may suggest incorrect.
Note: If the prestressed reinforced cross section at an angle of ninety degrees outside, the percentage
increases proposal may not be accurate.
Auditor display:
(coordinates)
3 Geometr
y
• axis angle
• radius
4 5 layers of
protection to CGS
Concrete Durability
6 Compress
ion ago
10 The horizontal bar features the type of stud shear reinforcement (if required for
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
design). 11 Summary
3 Click on the plane at the position puncture test that you want to check.
Note: The Auditor will not work if not done Calc All.
Note: Results may not be current Auditor if the analysis is not applicable. (If Calc All become gray (
), The analysis results are current).
31 Use Estimate
When preparing the design, should understand the amount and cost of materials used in the model.
Estimate window will serve this purpose.
Estimate particularly useful for comparing the preliminary scheme. You can also used to compare the
change of design.
RAM Concept program automatically calculating the volume of material. The unit price is determined
for the calculations of the cost of providing and installing
See Estimate:
as: Concrete
Formwork
Stretch
after
The weight of the bar to length plane prestressed reinforcement. Do not include or limit stress tailed
screen allows.
Steel reinforced
soft
Weight-based reinforcement strip design calculations. Excluding the connector plate, bend, or other
bars as "detailed design", systems support prestressed reinforced or otherwise. To be able to calculate
"good" as the band drew the design. Thus, be careful while considering the volume.
1 Choose Report>
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Estimate.
32 Print
ing
RAM Concept Program with custom printing options to help you create and print professional reports.
Control the information on the printed page and in the report. Every window in the program RAM
Concept can be printed separately one by one or as part of the report. This chapter presents the
properties in which you can use to achieve the desired results and techniques introduced in efficiency.
Note: See the "Determination of the plane fit" for more information on rates set in the window of the
plane.
In one
window:
Window.
3 Choose the desired print options. See "The choice in general" for more information. 4 Click the
Print.
In the report:
2 Choose the desired print options. See "The choice in general" below for more information.
3 Click the
Print.
Note: To make sure you get the desired printing results, see the printed page before printing. See
"Review the printed page" for more information.
Determine where you want the printer RAM Concept program executing in the Select the printer in the
Print dialog box. Compatible with the latest driver installed, RAM Concept Program can print on any
windows printer or plotter that is connected directly to your computer or network connection. Refer to
the printer documentation for more information on setting the printer settings and select the
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
In the Page Range section of the Print dialog box, select the pages to
print:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Select All to print all the pages in the report, or to print pages active window.
• Specify the page range to print. Enter a hyphen between the page numbers to print in the range
(inclusive). You must enter numbers separated by hyphens in ascending order (4-7, not 7-4).
32.2.3 Number
of prints
In the Print dialog box, select the number of copies that the number of copies to be printed. Enter a
value from 1
to 9999.
Click on the printer to select the printer from the Printer's Page Setup dialog. RAM Concept Program
can print on any printer with the appropriate printer driver is installed.
Select the paper size and paper source, the printer will use from the Paper of the Page Setup dialog box.
The selected printer will order the size and source selection.
In the Orientation section of the Page Setup dialog box, select the default page
orientation:
User can also print pages customized for each window in the window Report Content. See "Optimal
print" for more information.
Setting margins in the Margins of the Page Setup dialog box. If the size of the page margins left, right,
top, or bottom you select overlapping, or they are outside the page, a warning message will appear.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Determine the
ratio in:
Note: You should check the "Set for all Plans" in the Print dialog box Scale if you print the
report.
2 Uncheck "Automatically calculate printing area" and enter the coordinates of the left, right, top, and
bottom of the Printing Area Setup dialog box. Highlight "Set Plans for all" if you want the print range
will be used by all planes.
3 Click OK.
Use the Set Print Viewpoint ( ) To store in the corner can be seen on the screen. This angle does
not change unless the declaration. You can manipulate the model on the screen without affecting
saved in perspective. To display saved in perspective, using tools Show Print Viewpoint ( ).
Set in perspective:
o Set the rate equal to the corresponding coordinate axis Scale tool ( ).
o Rotate the model using the tool revolve around the axis x and y ( ) And tool around the z axis (
).
o Zoom in to show the desired model.
o Set the parallel projection ( ) Or perspective projection ( ) And block model ( ) Or wire
model ( ).
Presentation on screen in
Viewpoint ( ).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
32.6.1 Magnification
Function
Elasticity print preview page by declaring the zoom ratio in the preview window in the page. Can select
zoom factor of 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, or Fit Page Fit Width, or you can
enter the rate as selected by the I (from 5% to 500%).
You can preview one, two, or four separate printed page. Using One Page ( ) To view in a separate
page. Click Multi Page ( ) And select 2 or more to see two separate pages, or 4 or more to see
four pages at a time.
Function print preview page to open automatically in the first page. Use Next ( ) To turn in the next
page and Previous ( ) To return to the previous page.
32.7 Optimize
your
printing
To achieve the best results when printing, you can customize the report parameters and orientation in
the form of reports for each category (or windows).
You can print each window or items reported in the direction of the program RAM Concept Portrait or
Landscape. Orientation default is declared in the Page Setup dialog box. See "The selected print
settings" for more information about setting the default orientation. You may want to print the items in
the report or in certain windows in the other direction with the remaining items. Orientation columns
used in the Report window to determine the orientation Content category. Choose Default to declare
the Page Setup parameters, or Portrait or Landscape orientation to override the Page Setup.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
1 Ensure Orientation columns are visible in the window Report Content. Can expand the window or
scroll horizontally.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Click on column values for item Orientation to switch between Default, Portrait and Landscape.
Column Default Value Orientation in orientation to declare default orientation is declared in the Page
Setup dialog box.
You can change the colors, fonts, and line shape of the window and perspective projection on the
screen, can customize their printed form.
Use the Schema tab in the Print dialog box to set the Appearance form parameters for plane or
perspective you want to print. See "Change colors, fonts, and line shape straight "on page 13 for more
information about the scheme and form parameters change form.
If you want to be a plane or perspective parameters in the same form as you can see in the
corresponding window, click Set Screen Same As in the Print tab. In most cases, you will want to:
View> Appearance.
3 Specify options in the Print tab of the Appearance Settings dialog box and click OK.
Figure 32-1 In Report Content window, you can change the order of items to report, setting items are
included in the report or not, and changes in direction or items.
Any window can also be included in such a report category. Edit the selected plane, the perspective and
the table in the report using Report Content window. Include Converting column values to determine
the items included in the report or not.
For the few items in the report, requested Include the value of it is "Yes" and each item on which the
report is "Yes". For example, if you want the layer plane Latitude Tendon standards in the report, the
plane itself will Include value is "Yes", Latitude Tendon layer is "Yes" and the layer folder is "Yes" .
Similarly, the Include value is "No" for Criteria folders, RAM Concept program does not include any
of the ingredients in folders in the report.
This function is especially useful if you want to skip all the items on a separate layer from the report.
This can be done with just a click, then change the value of each plane Include, perspective, and table
text layer to "No".
1 Ensure that the Include column visible in the window Report Content. You can expand the window
or scroll horizontally.
2 Click on the Include column values for items you want to include or not include in order to switch
between Yes and No.. Include Yes value in column includes items printed in the report while it does
not include the value of items.
Note: If you would like to include items in the report, to ensure that each item in the order must
include.
Here is a list of examples of windows that you can include in the report for the high PT method
designed using ACI 318:
The order of items in the report Report Content window is the order in which they are printed in the
report. You can rearrange items in the same layer or folder by dragging them to a new location. You
can not move items or folders outside layer. For example, you can move items to a new location within
the Criteria folder but can not move them to the Layers folder.
1 Report Content window, left-click on the item you want to move the report.
2 Drag the item to a new position reporting and release the left mouse button. (RAM Concept program
does not allow you to move items reported outside of its folder or layer)
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Text size depending on the size of the text visible on the screen. You can change the text size to fit the
production.
1 Choose View>
Appearance.
2 In the Font section of the Appearance dialog box, click to select the font AaBbZz.
The size of the text is 72 times the actual size. Thus, 9 is the one-eighth inch.
3 In the Select Font dialog box, select the font size and
click OK.
Note: Do not use the Enlarge Fonts ( )OrShrinkFonts( ) Change the text size before.
33.2 Export
table
The table to the text file of tab-delimited text that you can open with most of the software.
RAM Concept Program functions can have the jet and the geometry of the structural system RAM.
The only possibility of acting on the higher models are created in RAM Concept program by
importing from the RAM Structural System.
Note: RAM Structural System Concrete RAM requires consideration of the concept of jet.
The function of the power of television program RAM Concept of column and wall jet database to the
RAM Structural System.
The only exported jet declared for the column walls and columns and / or a high wall touches. The
reactions do not affect the power of the force along the shaft of the column on the wall and. Column or
wall structure in determining the axial force.
The only program RAM Concept of jet power from the load imported from RSS RSS backwards. For
example, if you add "Load pool" concept to a file, the export function will not transfer the load from the
jet to the RSS.
Note: The program does not RAM Concept Jet static load of construction, so we no longer use RSS
anymore.
Note: The RAM Concept never made the horizontal load (or imported from other RSS) and RSS.
Note: The "load" in RAM Concept program similar to "load the case" in the RSS.
34.1.1 Special Handling of static load and load balancing, while export
Concept adds jet "static load" on the jet "static" in the production. This ensures that the analysis of
structural concrete RAM consideration of the weight itself.
Note: RAM Structural System provides the option to automatically or manually enter beams and the
weight of the body, as part of the static load cases. Or vice versa, RAM Concept program always
included automatically beams and the weight of the body in its analysis. We suggest that, when used in
conjunction with Concept RSS, RSS auto-load the beam and the version itself. This will eliminate
confusion about the payload itself is included in the analysis, or if need be determined by hand as part
of the static loading case, even if some are designed with RSS and few Concept is designed with.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
RAM Concept program is not the jet load of "Communication" to RSS. When analyzing a building with
the transmission, distribution RSS used inside of the transmission of force rather than the force from the
floor analysis of Concept program. The jet payload "directly" is the show's RSS Concept will be used, if
you use direct. See "Using the jet RAM RAM Concept in Concrete" for more information.
RAM Concept Program The jet load balancing of load cases into "indeterminate" only visible in
concrete RAM. In general, the power balance and the supernatural still not the same, but with no
support system of prestressed reinforcement, the balance of power with the power of redundancy.
Note: See the "Tensile load following" on page 312 to be explained about load balancing and
redundancy.
You can export to the RSS jet any time after the "Calc All" and save the file.
A dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 34-1, With the name list of RSS stories that you can export
to the jet. The floor is a concept labeled "power floor". This is the story RSS is entered before to create
this file Concept. Concept Program lists the other stories in the RSS file with the same floor, and
labeled them as "same floor" or "compatibility layer". One is compatible with, but not identical with,
the source layer if floor height, the size of different parts, or (for the upper floors of the same type) on
any column it is different orientations.
Choose any combination of any story, and click "OK". RAM Concept program displays a detailed
record of the results of operations when the export is completed.
RAM Concept Program perform consistency checks before the fact to ensure that the jet can occur
correctly. Concept Program test done before and after the selection of the floor.
The first test is to access RSS files from RAM Concept is entered floor. Can only be carried out if the
RSS file, it does not open in the RSS and you can access and edit it.
Concept program also checks the RSS file changes to source stories since input files Concept. If the
source layer change "big", to re-enter from the RSS and the results before. If the source layer change
"small", the program will suggest Concept in again. Major changes include adding or deleting columns
or walls. Resize columns as small change.
Concept program can not export the file if the column or wall is added after import from RSS, or if the
base of the dome or hard bearing Concept model.
RAM Concept testing program details for each floor of your choice with RSS file. If the program
Concept find any errors, you can cancel or back of pick-floor window to deselect the error floor. If only
warnings Concept program, you can continue to rip off the floor back window selected.
Concept program will alert to any column or wall on the Concept does not match the column or on the
floor of the selected wall. This only happens on the top floor of flooring, where transition to other types
of floor or ceiling.
Concept Programme warned if the height of the storey height select different sources floors.
Once out of the wall jet and columns to RSS, they will become useful for RAM for concrete analysis
and design, but only on the condition that must inform the RSS know that you want to use them.
Select the button on the "Use RAM Concept at selected mucs Forces Analysis". Select by ticking the
box in the column "Use".
You can use this dialog box to see the power of RRS Concept Concept and file name of the exported
power. The "Read" show the date of each of the RSS Concept. Column "Saved" displays the date of the
jet components from Concept to that level. The "Source Story" sources said floor of RSS files are used
to import data into files Concept. If the column type "Source Story," "Saved" and "Concept File" empty,
then you can not force out the ingredients on that level. If column enter "Read" drum, it never entered
into the Concept.
Note: use the RSS Concept wall jet in the jet column using Concept.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: After the publication of the RSS Concept Jet, analyzing the concrete structure designed RAM
before any of the components or the power to enter any components from RSS to Concept (as for the
foundation system).
34.1.7 RAM Structural System - RAM Concept affiliate program works like
The key reaction in the production of Concept program to the walls and columns RSS
Import and load capacity are directly imported.
Walls and columns that you have imported from RSS RSS identifier special "tagged awareness" on
them. The identifier allows Concept program makes wall and column elements consistent with the
corresponding elements in the RSS. Concept program will allow even move walls and columns a bit
(up to 50mm or 2 ").
The concept does not allow you to export if you add, delete, or move significantly or columns are
entered (or not entered walls and columns). This is to ensure the transmission of gravitational
equilibrium between Concept and RSS.
Note: If you accidentally delete a support system is entered, or the system can support changes RSS,
can always re-enter the walls and columns.
RSS track combinations of fixed gravity loads through the structure. The load is static, activity may
download rebate, rebate can not be downloaded Works, Works and Works Accumulation download
download Tran (the program RAM Concept and concrete used, and also loads of redundancy follow-
up). To ensure compatibility with RSS, Concept program will not let you remove the power load is
entered.
Concept program allows editing loads and forces RSS imported more payload capacity. Concept
program assumes that you are fully aware that the program only considers the weight load appear in the
RSS is entered in that jet back program of RSS.
34.2 Exporting
geometry
Column and wall geometry can be exported to a database file system structure new or existing RAM.
This geometry can be exported to the new RSS flooring.
Note: The menu item can not be opened without operating model.
If you enter a new file name RSS, the new RSS The database will be created along with the units of
the current model Concept. If the code is the design concept model ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02 or
BS8110, the code of the design database corresponding RSS be declared. If not, the code design
database database of RSS new design will be the default code of the user.
After selecting a file, the dialog "Export Geometry to RAM Structural System" appears, as shown in
Figure 34-2.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 Enter the name of a new floor within the text "New Floor Type Name".
A popup note that if you enter the name of the floor has been identified or not.
The check box "Columns (below)" and "Walls (below)" select columns and / or walls have been made
or not. The Concept of columns and walls just below the floor, because they are the elements associated
with a floor of RSS.
If you check the "Start RSS after Export", the RSS file after startup of geometry.
This is not affected if the RSS is running.
4 Click "Create New Floor Type" to export the selected elements into new flooring.
Note: columns and wall geometry can be exported to the new RSS flooring.
Errors and ambiguities in the concept model typically detect and adjust the woven mesh model.
Concept program allows models to be made before it is woven mesh, so many errors will be detected
and customize the output geometry.
If more than two overlapping walls, in whole or in part, is only one of the overlapping period will be
made. If more than two columns have the same position, only one column at that location will be
made. In any case, the pop-up dialog box will display the columns and the wall is not included.
If any of the columns or walls that are not made, the user should examine the important characteristics
of the elements have been exported to the RSS. If overlapping columns or walls have different
characteristics, the user can not specify the desired value in the RSS. Users can also knit grid pattern
and troubleshooting of Concept program before.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Walls have been identified in the RSS can not cross another wall or column or the first beat of the
other wall. Each wall is divided into sections Concept at each position before being exported. Dividing
walls were not reported, but will have an impact as each wall in RSS.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Strip Wizard use the information you provide structures to build a model of a new concept file. You
can edit the file by drawing the gap, the step surface, the load, and use the plane window. Strip simple
Wizard, use it to create the basic structure, and then edit the texture of the surface if necessary.
We believe that the majority Strip Wizard is to evaluate the 2D behavior. The design results
(automatically) only for one direction (X axis). Because Concept is a 3D program, knees straight line
automatically included along the edges of the model allows for the deflection but no go. This behavior
is almost 2D simulation.
After selecting the option in the New File dialog box, Strip Wizard dialog box appears. At this point,
you can download the report parameters previously saved Strip Wizard if you want (see section "Load
and save the Wizard declared Strip" for more information). To determine the band started, proceed to
the next page in the wizard by clicking Next.
2 Identify options in the New File dialog box and then click OK. Strip Wizard dialog box appears.
3 Click Next to continue or you can download the report parameters Strip Wizard (see section
"Load and save parameter declaration Strip Wizard" for more information).
Specify type of structure, the concrete mixture and beat at General Parameters page of the
Determination of structure you want to create Wizard Strip and stretch after use or not. Can declare
parameters as floor or reinforced after stress and may be one of the following systems:
thundering
rhythm
Enter the number of beats for the band (not including beams). Determine whether you can use the top
or bottom of the beam is not. Check the "Asymmetric" model that allows different branches on one
side of the column.
Choose mixed concrete for the beams and the system and one for the support.
Note: The ready mixed concrete is mixed in the new file is created on startup Strip Wizard. If you want
to use certain mixtures, then use the template when creating new files.
Span Data Table on page depends on the information entered into the General Parameters page. The
beams and span appearing in the rows in the table. The columns of the data depends on the model you
have created the system in one direction or both directions, beam systems, or system ram or not.
For this table and the next page, the name of the data above is "Typical". The imported data
here will be copied automatically to each below. You can override the copied data.
Span length, width and thickness of the branch to identify this system. They may vary according to the
beat.
Length
Span length from focus to another focus of the support system. Thickness
Width start
Width at the top of the beat (or the left end). For asymmetric band width arrested
L is the width of the left start, start R and width is the width to the right start. Width ends
Width at the bottom of the beat. For asymmetric band width is the width L ending left end, and the
width is the width R end right end.
Span length, beam depth, beam width, thickness and width of the branch to identify this system. They
may vary according to the beat.
Length
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Span length from focus to another focus of the support system. W Depth
Width of plate
girders.
Depth F
Width branch (and thus a) at the top (or left end) of the beats. For asymmetric band width start
branching width L is the left arm began, and started branching width width R is started right arm.
Width branch (and thus a) at the end of the beat. For asymmetric bands, arm width is the width L
ending ending left arm, and the width is the width end R end right arm.
Span length, plate characteristics (depth, width, spacing and number), the thickness and width
determine the branching system. They may vary according to the beat. This system is not symmetric.
Length
Span length from focus to another focus of the support system. W Depth
Depth F
Distance from the start (or end left) beats the pan (or space). Reverse bias pan end
Distance from end of pan (or space) to the end of the beat.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The following characteristics define the entire width branching pattern. The width can not be different
for each beat.
Distance
Number
Total number
plates.
Support Data page to enter the upper and lower support system. You must specify below the support
system they are on.
Depth, width, height, heat resistance and heat resistance as defined in the support system. They may
vary according to the beat.
Strip Wizard understanding support system with over four times the width times the depth of the wall.
If not, then that column.
Depth
Page and Drop cap Drop cap panel is to enter and drop panel drop for the two methods. For a local
version, the beams or joists do not have this page.
Strip Wizard only use drop cap to puncture shear strain, while meandering design, Strip Wizard will
ignore them. Many codes have guidelines on size requirements to be considered a heavy drop panel.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The thickness, width, length before and after determining the length of the drop. They may vary
according to the beat.
There may be a drop in the cap and drop panel support system. Drop cap thicker.
Thickness
Width
Length before
Dimensions parallel to the drop rate from the central support system. Length
after
Dimensions parallel to the span from core to end systems support the release.
Page Loads section is to enter and load lines in the z direction for both standard loads.
Can import section and load lines for two different loads on each span. Static load section
load line
Load line from the focus to the first system support system support Monday for the beat. Load section
Load line
Activities focus on system load from the first support system to help focus every second beat.
Load use
Works just as static and appellations. You can specify any load upon load file standard in RAM
Concept.
"Static"
There could be any one of the standard load in RAM Concept files.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
"Work
s"
There could be any one of the standard load files RAM Concept (except when used for "Static").
Post-Tensioning page is available only if you selected marked "Post-tensioned" Type of Structure in the
General Parameters page.
Most of the data entered into this site relating to minimum compression front, load balancing and
prestressed reinforced protection. Strip Wizard uses this data along with the data for the rate, depth
and weight to create single prestressed reinforcement.
Determine the size and type of reinforcing steel bars for prestressed (as defined in the material
parameters of Concept RAM file).
Stress
Determination of stress positions (click). The Concept of friction prestressed reinforcement and other
losses if the stimulus located at one or both ends.
P / A
Minimum
Compression before minimum average required for concrete. According to the code, the minimum
usually does not bring the economic design.
Load balancing is the number of vertical walls reinforced by prestressed offer. According to the
industry's usual percentage load capacity.
Determine which load balancing based on load. The choice of the weight of the concrete itself, plus the
weight itself, "static", or the total weight.
35.7.3 Section
Length prestressed reinforcement at horizontal support system. Size is the total distance the plane, not by
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Up section. Allow rounded high and low points of prestressed reinforcement to the appropriate value.
If this value is too large, can break the protection.
35.8 Identify
reinforced
35.8.1 Rebar
Specify the audio from the audio file is available in RAM Concept.
In the
Cutting force
The layer of protection for sound reinforcement and prestressing. Rounding section prestressed
reinforcement can override prestressed reinforced protection.
In the
reinforcement. Below
Determine whether the program has made the concept of shear fun of strain
Checking this box will guide Concept drawing program puncture shear test in each column.
Protection for
CGS
The distance from the top of the rebar to focus on. Often this is the distance from the top of the bar to
the bottom of the. Concept program unless this gap thickness to determine the distance "d".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Completing Strip Wizard page is the last page in the wizard dialog. At this point, you can save the
information entered into the wizard to download later. See "Download and save the open Report on the
Strip Wizard " for more information.
When you click Finish in the Wizard page Completing Strip, Strip Wizard draw your pattern file RAM
Concept is based on data that you have provided. The left support system model is positioned at the
origin (0,0).
Open the layer plane in Mesh Input, Latitude Tendon, and Design Strip to see the model. However,
you can not see the finite element mesh until you create the net.
Complete the
wizard:
After completing the wizard Strip, the net can create and run analyzes on model calculations.
For the finite element mesh best, you need to reconstruct two: one before and one after the calculation.
That's because the band calculation designed to create, in turn can be used to improve the second grid
created. See Chapter 17, "Creating mesh" and Chapter 27, "Calculation results" for more information.
Input Strip Wizard can be saved as files Strip Settings Wizard (with the file name extension. Cptstrip)
and loaded into the wizard again later. Strip Settings Wizard File only information you enter on the
wizard page. Save your Settings Wizard Strip before clicking Finish on the last page of the dialog.
Download Strip Settings Wizard only declare the value of Strip Wizard dialog box to the value stored
in the Settings file. After loading Strip Settings Wizard, page numbering through the usual dialog box
by clicking Next. You can change the data in the wizard to create another strip. This does not affect
the settings file was downloaded. You must save the new file Strip Settings Wizard if you want the
changes to be saved for later use.
2 Select File Strip Settings Wizard (with the file name extension. Cptstrip) and click Open.
1 Click Save in the Strip Completing the Wizard page (before clicking Finish).
36 General Tips
This section will show you tips on how to learn Ram Program Program Concept and the tips are not
present in the other.
Note: You should consult "Ram School Program Concept Program" on page 2,Chapter 1,
"Introduction" before reading this chapter.
36.1 Bea
ms
You should be very careful when creating the beam pattern. If you use the standard finite element, the
torsion stiffness of the beam can be overrated, maybe mistaken concession deflection in the next
version.
In Concept program, there is no difference between the standard and the beam element, and the element
with standard torsion stiffness corresponding to the depth of three of them.
Torsion stiffness of the beam actually corresponds to the value of three methods of depth and width
lower. Therefore, the standard element overestimate stiffness of the torsion beam is deeper than wide
beams.
For this reason, consider using behavior "Do not twist" to the beams, especially deep edge beams. See
"The beam characteristics" on page 57 for more information.
36.2 Walls
Suggest drawing intersecting walls, an end wall at the center of the other wall, as shown in 36-2.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
36.2.2 Report on
Report on beam behavior is similar: we do the hard floor. This is particularly relevant in the floor
beams. The moment the floor is NOT the actual bending moment in the wall.
We suggest that if you are not sure about the impact on the wall, it does not model them.
Figure 36-3 Comparison of two identical floors in every aspect except the one with the wall (The two
images have shown the two present form without written).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 36-4 Effect of wall created in the model: no wall (left) compared with. on the wall (right) - the
drawing of torque around the x axis.
36.2.3 The difference between the wall and the vertical beam of the same
Concept wall processing program on the same beam. Use the "wall-beams" instead of only the elements
which were made with both medium advantages and disadvantages; generally not recommended on the
wall modeled as beams.
These two elements are the main advantages over the wall element ("wall-
beams"):
The horizontal strips of Concept program designed to integrate Automatic power over the elements.
Ignore the wall-beam element in this integration. In addition, Concept program allows you to control
the elements of the results can be displayed as is; wall-beam elements (such as the wall element) can
only draw the reaction force up copies.
However, as discussed in section "Beams", The standard elements of Concept program is torsion
stiffness corresponding to the depth of three of them. This may result in overestimation of anti-torsion
rigidity for an element if it is a very thin near the elements quite thin. The element "Wall-beams" do
not encounter this problem.
Thus, the wall was created as the vertical beam pattern will use beam parameters declared "untwisted"
as described in section "Beams".
When wall-beam model, Concept Program represents the element parameters differently wall. If wall-
mounted non-rotating beams in the wall on the beam will have zero torsion rigidity. If the beam is not
wall-shear wall, it will have zero axial stiffness. Skip vertical compression parameters and spin
assembly at the distal end.
The wall-beam element with an advantage over the elements. The thickness of the elements are
different in the control structure can be drawn automatically to the (correct) the large variation in forces
and elements close to the thick and almost no variation in scope of the plate elements. This does not
usually happen if the wall is modeled as wall-beams.
36.3 Stress
The columns and walls are not floor the axial deformation (strain caused later) unless you create the
column model is the roller and the wall as a wall "slide" (characteristic shear wall untested ).
Not sure that the columns on the floor to prevent the roller on the appropriate normal
Stress often compressed before rebate and thus, increase operational reinforcement. Often reinforced
and intensified.
36.4 Othe
r
There are many tools and capabilities are presented in the previous chapters is useful, but often
overlooked.
36.4.1 Template
We create template (to start a file) may be appropriate or inappropriate for your needs. You can also
create your own template, adding the plan view, the materials and
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
declare parameters that you can use when starting a new file. See "Template" in Page 6.
You can add the plan view. See"Creating a new plan view" on page 11 and
"Creating the plan view new results" on page 132.
Many users do not like to copy and move the selected object by holding down the shift key
combinations click and scroll commands (or something similar). See "Move, rotate, stretch, and
human objects "on page 17.
You should also familiarize themselves with the use of commands relevant coordinate system. See
"Using the system relevant coordinates "on page 16.
3 Press and hold down the shift key and click anywhere in the workspace.
4 Enter the letter "r" after the x and y coordinates are separated by commas (eg r10, 5), and
press Return. Remove duplicate units to choose x to y and the unit above.
You can extend many tools are more likely to know of them. See "Expand the node tools "on page 6.
Utility Tool can save a lot of time when you need to move and stretch the object or control many points.
See "Using Utility tool to move and stretch" on page 17.
Wall Tools Left and Right Wall can be very useful. See "Wall Drawing" on page 52.
Can search and change the backbone of the same value in one operation. See
"Change axis tool paths" on page 121.
Many users are not aware of the power of the drawn features. It can draw more of the torque results
(range) (required and actual), crack widths and reinforcement, to name just a few moments.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Many people like to paint rebar on new plan view of the template rather than using the projection flat
bar callout.
Can not remove important result as small reaction force in two different ways. See "The report clearly
is zero" on page 21, And "Reaction force" on page 139 and figure page 139.
You can see the percentage of the load is balanced by the force behind the design of the strip. See
"Show percentage load is balanced" on page 130.
36.4.11 Auditor
This function can be invaluable in unlocking the "black box" of the calculations. See Chapter 30, "Using
Auditor".
Note: Many users complain that there is too much information expressed by the Auditor. Information
extraction can be reduced by checking the rule rather than the design brief.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
37 common questions
This chapter refers to the frequently asked questions. It should be
read with:
Concrete floor standing (suspended) and foundation friends (friends). They can be reinforced concrete,
concrete or composite stress after. See "The structural system" on page 1 for more information.
Only a limited hardware performance computers. Runtime analysis functions corresponding to the
square near the intersection of the model, so the large structure can take a considerable period of time
for analysis. Design time near the strip corresponds to the rhythm segment cross section. See "Reducing
the computation time" on page 128 for more information.
There are no restrictions to the greatest thickness of the model can be made?
The analysis of the elements of Concept program is considered to shear deformation and bending
deformation. This ensures that the program concept for reasonable outcome for both the thick and the
thin.
In general, the rules of the program design concept applicable code requirements for the appropriate
length to span ratio on typical high beams. If the school is outside the normal range, may need to see
whether it is necessary to consider the special design or not.
Program Concept design can turn more than one story or not?
By itself it can not. But can use RAM Structural System to integrate multiple floors in a large model.
The term "the platform" is often used to present the house. The designer must use the assessment to
determine whether the construction of technical analysis and design sheet is suitable for this structure.
See the FAQ for "The plate (friends)".
Concept Program can run a range of applications designed to run fast without preliminary
modeling the entire building is not?
There. See Chapter 35, "Using Range Wizard" and Chapter 45, "Guidelines band
Wizard".
1 Use the vertical characteristic strip down to that range firmness axis perpendicular to the strips is
significantly reduced. See Figure below shows 16-6 inPage 57
Note: Create the model strips down in this way is not considered temporary situation before the pour
strips
backwards. This can affect the force and deflection.
The program can be used to design Concept by walls as the walls are not painted?
Although the Concept program is not optimized to use for this purpose, but the program can perform
most of the tasks analysis and design as long as you're careful.
Need to really pay attention because Concept program assumes that load in the direction of Z goes
down. Need to declare the static load factor is zero and create your own personal loads. Maybe you
want to apply the load at a depth between the, if not the eccentricity will add myself to the moment.
Although the cross-sectional design of the program through Concept Report torque and all the power to
the cross-sectional design, but not design Concept Program takes into account all the forces and torque.
In particular, the program does not consider Concept Mz values in design, because the program did not
locate Concept of reinforcement, but it is important to design Mz.
"Mixed" mean?
Floors mixture of both PT and RC range. Most floors are stressed after a few RC elements as the core
strip down and stand. By selecting the appropriate design rules, these areas can be designed at the same
time as the PT element.
37.2 File
The difference between creating a file ttren the plate (friends) and set ttren the
stand?
Actually there is no difference, the file has the same ability. The default file is installed in a different
way than is usually the case load and adding the projections for flat plate (the horizontal load case, the
load-bearing surface of the earth, etc.). For many operations, you can transfer any files ttren into the
upright slabs files and vice versa.
With the current version can not be done - should open the file and recalculate. We plan to add this
feature in future versions (these files "stored with the results" will be great).
No need. For simple geometric shapes, can be drawn "from workspace" faster. There are physical
the grid and snap to grid use to locate the columns and walls.
There. Sometimes it's necessary to delete entered the drawing because it affects the extent to which the
Program Concept and print display. Any DWG and DXF files can be imported if needed.
If you have moved or structural drawings entered after the first entry, the new entry will not match.
There are new drawings can move if needed.
Program Concept may appear to set ttren drawing outlines to support it?
There. You can create template designs suitable for RC, such as removing Initial Load Combination
Use and the initial specified operation, and does not mark as Post-Confirmation canged Consider the
fractional rate characteristics. See "Template" on page 6.
Layer Concept is an organized program. Layer is a collection of objects and the related results and each
object and the result is one and only one layer. For example, all the elements on the Element layer.
In other words, the plan view display and editing ideas. Each elevation is extracted to see all the layers
of Concept program. A projection surface can be installed to correct a particular layer, but the
reference does not "own" layer. Any change layer using the projector will be able to see all the slides
in the other plane, because the flat projection are considered the same layer.
See Chapter 3, "Understanding layers" and Chapter 4, "Using the flat projection and coordinate scene "
for more information.
1 Choose Layers>
appears.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Yes, but usually do not do this. This may enable objects from a layer in an active
action, and then repeated for the next layer.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
See "Identification of plan view with objects" on page 10 Chapter 3, "Understanding layers ".
Double-click the selected location and only one object. Press and hold down the shift key and double-
click again and select another object.
Maybe you're looking in the wrong direction "Camera" perspective. Click the Zoom Extent ( ) Or
Show Print Viewpoint ( ).
The roof substrate can take the time to create perspective and therefore is not enabled in the default file.
It should enable them to Visible Objects dialog box.
This means that multiple objects are selected, and they have different values for attributes. For example,
if you select the two objects have different thickness, the thickness will show the "opposition".
Note: In the previous version 3.0, which can leave the field blank in this example.
37.5 Code
codes
37.6 Conventional
signs
Sign convention for the moment, shear force and the jet?
See "Choose the sign conventions" on page 23 and "Signs Draw Conventions" on Page 24.
37.7 Structu
re
• The subjects for the different thickness, beams, openings etc. can not overlap knee - this can be
very difficult for the floor almost simple, or
• The depth will be added. For example, the depth will be deducted from the beam depth. If you
have to change the depth of the beam to change the depth, unless the depth of it is the same
amount of change.
Th
ere.
2 Choose Edit> Copy (or right click and select Copy from the popup menu appears). 3
Choose Edit> Paste (or right click and select Paste from the popup menu appears). The
4 Choose Edit> Selection Properties, or right click and select Properties Selection. 5
Note: It is important not to ignore after pasting process. If not, you will have two support systems
below at different positions, causing
calculation errors.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
This depends on some factors. See "The decision to use a mesh element size" on page 61 and
"Improved mesh" on page 62.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
I should use that value for the force constant dome substrate Z?
A geotechnical engineer typically provides a value called "roadbed modulus" or "modulus jet
roadbed."
Just to guide: the true value changed from 100 pci (nearly 25 MN/m3) for soft clay to 750 pci (200
MN/m3) for very dense gravel layer.
37.7.2 Layer
elements
No difference unless you adjust their behavior. View the presentation of Conduct
"The characteristics of the region" on page 56 and "The beam
characteristics" on page 57.
There are many elements that I should use for a beat or a plate?
Can not answer this directly because it depends on the structure and the load. See "Decision using
mesh element size "on page 61.
37.7.3 The
column
Depending on the heat-determination, the column can be turned stress and horizontal
stress.
If the distal end of the column is defined support system "rolls" (or both ends of the columns are
bolted down), the column does not have any stress on the public level.
37.7.4 Walls
Yes, if the selected wall shear properties. If shear walls are untested, so you may slide freely on the
wall. The hardness of the back wall is independent of the parameters declared shear walls; parameters
declared using heat to control the stiffness of the back wall along its axis.
You can use these elements to create the model wall rigidity and lasting ability of the wall are
connected
to copy. Keep in mind when using them. See "Report on" on page 167.
No stress at the end of the wall. (Whether you choose to tick "rotationally Fixed at Far End", it is
ignored).
Chapter 44, "Guidelines nail friend" will present design ideas to friends.
It can reduce resistance by repeated pulling. Drag resistance near zero with increasing number of
iterations.
See "The choice to repeat last zero tolerance" on page 126 for more information.
Not directly. System can draw almost there to surround support system for
land change.
No, but it's a good idea. It guarantees the intersection is located at the position is likely to be heavy
point loads.
The design concept for the system can not support poles?
There. Use columns (soft) below, or the dome base. Skin friction is not considered here.
Program Concept can design for impact and sheet piles (friends) are not together?
Yes, but the results can be very susceptible to the variation in geotechnical parameters. For example, if
the soil is hard to overestimate, the actual jet piles can be significantly underestimated. Need to be
careful.
No.
There. You can change the stiffness in two directions. See "The roof substrate properties" on
page 55.
There are no entries. Need to look at the plan view of the ground bearing pressure (annotated largest /
smallest) to assess the greatest pressure. Also, see the FAQ section "Bearing of the land" (In the
results).
Why many prestressed reinforcement is shown in the vertical direction in the wrong perspective
prestressed reinforcement?
Under the dome projection surface at each point is determined backbone while performing the
command Analyze All and All calculations. If not done one of these commands khtoi draw (or move,
etc.) prestressed reinforcement, or the net change, then the projection of prestressed reinforced
inaccurate perspective.
Analysis faster (but do not use "Calculate All") to Process> Analyze All. Avoid handling the design
calculations.
In the United States, Britain and other countries, this is typically prescribed to put the prestressed
reinforcement in one direction in the range of columns focusing on. If designers use different
provisions, we still recommend the use of prestressed reinforcement layer Latitude and Longitude
because it makes editing easier PT. means placing the prestressed reinforcement in a layer in the
direction of X and Y prestressed reinforced on a different layer. Latitude and longitude is the name of
the layer.
There. This is not difficult, and should be addressed more issues before they become problems for the
school.
See "Draw the prestressed reinforcement" on page 118,"Draw the prestressed reinforced unit" on page
118
and "Draw the prestressed reinforced many branches" on
page 119.
Double-click tool prestressed reinforcement to change the properties of reinforced and prestressed
default then draw the prestressed reinforced by the beat, or on each plate.
You can choose a segment of reinforced and prestressed concrete right click to change the
characteristics of that segment.
Can search and change the backbone of the same value in one operation. See
"Change axis tool paths" on page 121.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
There. Any fractional prestressed reinforcement may also declare any repeat. Tools prestressed
reinforced "half-rate" of interest to repeat the point (or low point any any) that is not in the center span.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Maybe put the point repeatedly in any rhythm to using several segments prestressed reinforcement.
There. Inflection point is measured from the first click and the backbone is determined by the order of
entry. For compatibility with the prestressed reinforcement is created using tools Full Span Tendon, we
suggest you always start at the high point.
1 Prestressed reinforcement may be "ramifications" should reduce the number of cables. As shown in
Figure 37-1If the transition from 15S (15 cable) to 10S (for rhythm near the cable does not require) the
termination of 5S in prestressed reinforcement half rate. Typically the cable termination at a quarter
span and at the center.
Note: Only use this method for prestressed reinforced no size. So click on the attached prestressed
reinforced with different lengths are calculated loss remove incorrect size (material wedge indentation
depth).
2 You can use Monday as stimulus measures are modeled. If the cable is total 15S is a prestressed
reinforced the need to constantly 10S with a prestressed reinforced with additional 5S along. Typically
terminate the prestressed reinforcement at a quarter span and at the center.
Figure 37-2 stop of the cable / the prestressed reinforcement (the stimulus). The combination of the
projection of prestressed reinforcement is subjective.
Concept testing program is to ensure that the cables in the segment prestressed reinforced
connection is appropriate?
Concept program only calculates loss due to friction if the size is determined.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Concept program calculates the friction loss due consideration to (vertical view) curvature of the
prestressed reinforcement, (see the reference) the horizontal knotted in place of reinforced and
prestressed size and friction parameters. stress in prestressed reinforcement is assumed to vary linearly
with each segment prestressed reinforcement.
exp-(mu * theta + k * L)
In that
Note: Many engineers (especially in Australia) used to shake the determination of the random angle
change per unit length. The engineer can shake that coefficient Concept program used, k, with the
following relationship: k = AngularWobbleCoefficient * mu.
At the junction between segments prestressed reinforcement, Concept program using the following
formula:
which
Concept program combined loss due to removing stimulus (material loss due to wedge indentation
depth) into the loss of the standard integral tension. The above equation is still used, but the value is not
known and learned swap. Program Concept adjusted repeated stresses prestressed reinforced until the
integration of the change in the tension of prestressed reinforced with removable anchor losses are
determined.
See "Click" and "The stimulus properties" on page 121 for more
information.
No. Concept program using FSE corresponding value (defined in the Materials page for conditions) as
the effective stress for any prestressed reinforcement does not click.
Yes, if the size is determined. Use the dialog box to see Jack Elongation Visible Objects on the
projector.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The dilation (expansion) have included the effect of removing the gap size (animal wedge deep
indentation) does not?
Get all the cables and put them into a bundle of cables much easier to layout instead. Different
models may not even have distribution in prestressed reinforced branch or not?
This is a matter of building assessment. Definitely do not need a cable layout every so often in the
group of cables cable group larger groups are installed on site. Always remember that the strip cross
section designed to consider only the prestressed reinforcement that we cut across to calculate
intensity etc. There may be many cases where you want to create the cable model are grouped together
in groups (if very wide range).
I have arranged the longitude cable but want to change the cable in a group. I have arranged
them once again?
No. Number of strands in the cable is not necessarily an integer, so we can change.
There. Use the dialog box to see Tendon Forces Visible Objects on the
projector.
There. Views expressed in the section 38.3.4 and 38.3.5 Chapter 38, "Errors and
Warnings".
No. There are load balancing tool to help calculate the low point, but not required.
The percentage of load balancing is shown on the projection of unreasonable strip design.
This is how the calculations?
How to calculate the percentage of the load balancing of Concept program assumes that you determine
what is the rate, real rate behaves similar. Sometimes it is not true.
/ L2
Among
them:
Md is the total static moment load rate (calculated from the moment at the cross section of the
beginning, middle and end of the span)
L is the span length (as determined from the fractional rate, conditional support system,
B = 8 Mb /
L2
For example, if the static moment load in the cross section first, middle and last non-negative, positive
and negative, calculating the percentage balance will be useless.
This does not mean that the band is wrong, but can mean the cable layout does not perform as you
think it is done. Looking at deflection DL (or DL + LL) (no load balancing) and try to figure out how
to configure and work from there to locate and remove any additional cables.
37.9 Load
For with irregular texture, take a lot of time to draw the payload section to
match the texture. There is no f aster w ay?
The payload section do not necessarily match the texture. The payload section can be stacked pillows
and they can "overhang" on the floor. This is presented in the tutorial PT.
See "Analysis of self-balancing" on page 313 Chapter 46, "The analysis notes".
However, the best way to understand the level SE could be this simple example:
For example,
horizontal SE 37-1
Consider the two-floor structure is shown in Figure 37-3. Each of 3m high and 10m wide structure.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• analysis done on the building frame for this 100kN load capacity and the column already know
• distribution of power is very simple (for reasonable beam much stiffer than
the columns) The force on the top surface (including the jet column) is:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Fx0 = 100kN
15kN
The balance of this force and is applied directly to the SE across the load. Concept program then
calculates the exact force on publication, the design and test strips punctured.
For the middle have more power to review (all of this power comes from the analysis of the frame).
The force applied to the column which is written:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
75kN-m
The forces are balanced and are applied directly to the SE across the load.
Because of its "3" and "4" occurred at the same place, so they complement each other and can be
applied as a single load (similar to "5" and "6").
Concept program then calculates the exact force on publication, the design and test strips punctured.
Note: There is an easier way - if you are not interested in the cross beam power, they can ignore the
forces Fx and Fy. This assumes that the forces Fx and Fy and operations in the middle of the façade is
a constant focus. When two incorrect assumptions, the impact of this force is not large, but may need
further evaluation before ignoring them.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
37.10 Analysis
I have to use "self-sustaining structure in the direction of X and Y" in Calc Options?
Just if the structure does not have the horizontal stabilizer, as columns on the floor with the roller, or
plate (friends) no way to surround the X or Y direction Self-stabilization does not work if the horizontal
load.
The program calculates the width Concept support system for the equivalent square column (the
surface).
Relevance of the box Include Detailed Analysis Section in terms> What is Design Rules?
Concept Cars guidance program analysis section cracked though not required for the condition code.
The only reason to tick the box if you want to see the cracked section stresses even when they are not
being used to check code / design.
The only reason to not select the box is cracked section analysis may be delayed. See "Analysis section
details "on page 128 Chapter 27, "Calculation Results".
Concept Program includes the weight of the column and the wall in the weight calculation itself
is not?
You must decide whether the weight of the support system that includes or not. Can be selected in the
Calculation Options.
I can select the columns and the wall jet is shown not?
Yes - What can change the Concept drawing program. See "Jet" on page 139 and Figure
inpage 139.
If the column (and or wall) above and below the stand, you can choose (in Plot dialog box) that the jet
is shown. The choice is
The jet slides showing many small values Fx and Fy makes the comparison very difficult to read.
I can only look at Fz is not?
Can control this in two ways. The easiest way is to turn off the Fx and Fy parameters declared
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Or can filter and jet past the small torque Units window. See "The report is clear zero "on page 21.
The wall jet is represented by a straight wall sections. I could see a part of the wall jet is not?
I create columns at the bottom of the model wall. The huge jet and jet column, the sound wall.
This can not be real?
Mathematically, the result is true, but most can not practice. Try to model columns and walls similar to
vertical compression. This can reduce jet extraction column to more realistic values.
The jet was reported for the continuous wall, so if you need the individual jet, leaving a gap in the wall
or end wall columns defined.
37.12.2 Draw
Why are shown in the next moment of freedom about an axis parallel to the edge?
Figure 37-6 torque around the axis YY projection surface in the gaps. Show revolves around the
torque is not zero.
The torque curve is drawn is the torque between the plane of the element.
Element at the free edge may have a small moment in between. The values are shown between the
central element are interpolated, but by no element outside edge, so there is no way to reach that value
zero.
For the results may look better (values near zero than at the edges), using smaller elements
edge. Distance from edge to edge key element is the most important parameters.
I have a column on the side of the bolted. Why are shown in the next moment around the axis
parallel to the edge?
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Why are there two lines for deflection of the strip drawing?
Two different drawings for the largest and smallest if any one of the following
conditions:
• Interspersed coefficients envelope unlike the load factor (see "Interspersed systems the
envelope "on page 37 Chapter 11, "Determining the load combination").
o For example, for load combination used, the load factor can load factor is 1.0 and
contours can be interleaved 0.0. This will create the largest value and the smallest
difference.
• Load sample
The drawing shows the default deflection largest and smallest. There may just be the greatest value
through Plot dialog box, but remember that the absolute minimum rather than maximum possible.
There will be minimum value if you have dominant upward deflection.
Note: Also applies to drawings required for the force as torque or shear.
The power envelope is a (set of resources), in which one of its largest value or smallest for an item
(such as cross sections) is considered. All values in a way which forces occur simultaneously.
• For each set of rules, which are 6 lines added to a list (Max M, Min M, V Max, Min V, Max P,
Min P)
• The duplicate copies are discarded (if Max Max V M and the same, then one of two that will be
discarded)
• torque converter is done (this can adjust the torque value, can also create additional envelope)
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The result is a list of the envelope (possibly only one, but it can be up to 12).
Note: Many "switch helix" (as adjusted by twisting bending moment) can double the current
boundaries.
37.12.4 Reinforc
ed
Th
ere.
Visible Objects ( ).
3 Check the bottom of the column spacings Bar Design and Span Designs
Section.
Note: The number of reinforcement can not be drawn about how the
bar.
The Concept of the smallest reinforced as required by the specific design conditions on the tensile (or
have the lowest amount of compression) usually works well for both the vertical and foundation
friends.
However, in certain cases, at the moment of cross section range is designed signs opposite of what is
expected at the location to be determined. For the stand, this can lead to the reinforcement in the
column is at the bottom of the plate and are reinforced at the top of the center span.
For example, for the TR43 ACI318 or without tension at the position under the conditions used, the
program will put rebar Concept smallest stand on the lowest amount of compression. This may be in
the form of a column.
Can bypass this by selecting Elevated Slab for CS design features range Min. Reinforcement Location.
See "The characteristic rhythm segment", Starting from Page 82. Presented CS Min. Reinforcement
Location Next photo 21-7.
1 The floor is then tensioned and you still have not checked Consider as Post-tensioned. Program
Concept ignore the prestressed reinforcement. View the presentation in "The characteristic rhythm
segment" in Page 82.
2 The depth of the cross section range spans segments contribute to the reinforcement of the smallest.
This may be due to the depth of cross section based on the scope of thickening.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 The reinforced prestressed concrete can stick with is not in the tensile region.
Why are the results reinforced layer Design Status of different colors?
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Appearance default scheme uses different colors for "Failed Span Design" and "Design Span OK".
Declaration on Environment of the Normal range is designed. Changes to Protected can reduce
reinforcement. See "Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature" on page 419 to learn more.
2 TR43 (revised 1) clause 6.10.5 shows that "non-prestressed reinforcement supplement will be
designed to meet the full traction created by the curved tensile stress is assumed in Concrete "for" the
support on the plane. "
Note TR43 Table 2 below shows that "the support will be considered as any part that is considered
pace of 0.2 x L of the support system, where L is the effective rate."
This usually means that there is less tension on the side near the "edge" of the support, anti-bend far.
Note: Concept Program can draw the rebar for the column, but drawings can show that just over the
required limit.
Note: Use column and middle strip of the plane PT TR43 tend to increase this situation.
Why are soft-wired operation of the plane near the center span is tensioned after the concrete
tack?
When designing for TR43 (BS8110) with reinforced prestressed concrete can stick with, many
designers were surprised to find reinforcing steel beneath operation.
TR43 (revised 1) clause 6.10.5 shows that ".... no prestressed reinforcement supplement will be
designed to meet the full traction generated by the tensile stress curve Concrete is assumed in the region
.... the flat rate in the use of prestressed reinforcement
not stick to the concrete, where tensile stresses exceed. "
Many designers do not consider that they have not provided prestressed reinforcement if they use the
reinforced prestressed concrete can stick with. However, what they miss is reinforced "will be placed
in the tensile region, close to the external structure."
Concept testing program of position is reinforced prestressed concrete and stick to determine whether
there is not effective. See "Calculation of additional reinforcement for TR 43, 6.10.5" on page 437 for
further examination.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The following figure shows the location of prestressed reinforced with concrete tack with no cracks
convenient control.
Figure 37-8 Example 1: the prestressed reinforcement in the compression zone (ineffective)
Figure 37-9 Example 2: the prestressed reinforcement in tension zone inefficiency: (i) the small cable
(ii) near the zero axis
No.
Concept program that uses the torque distribution in the shear test pierced?
2 incomplete (rebar can not solve the problem and concrete formwork should reconsider).
Why is destructive beams pierced at? I think the destructive shear puncture occurs only in the
plane.
The codes provide formulas for calculating shear puncture. Do not apply any logic as to whether
sabotage could breach occurred.
Concept testing program only supports beams pierced the column because the paint used in the
puncture test. Decision nature of potential structural damage and thus determine puncture test is
appropriate or not.
Shallow beams may have breached certain destruction. Deep beams are less destructive than the
puncture, and destructive shear in one direction will likely be structural damage.
For example, column A in Figure 37-10 and 37-11 is satisfactory for shear in a way (with reinforcing
beams) but the code equations that determine the puncture damage. Need to decide whether or not
appropriate.
This is possible, but very rare, for damage caused by breach in column B to be satisfactory as a means
of cutting beams (reinforced).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 37-10 Mold mixture: the flat with the first column and beam
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
0
A
IH ti fj : ti fj : Aa :
4 (/)
(/)
:: 0
0
A
. - ..
J ::
0
- .,
J ::
I
(/) .,
il il nl
J
::
nl nl
0 .. (J) (J)
H
a2 # 4@7.98 H
= T = t2 # 4@8.31
nl
....
0 .. p-1 0
I
..
(/) II
-
E t: t:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
c; · II
2 # 4@16.7 (!)
t± ±± 0 II
..:.: _J.,
H2 # 4@12.3 p2 # 4@15.9 II II
:::: R :: t: TT I II II
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Why the flat pattern of the results I have shear reinforcement in a way? I expected to breach the
shear dominated, not by a local shear.
[Also: Why is my model of the plane is the destructive shear in one direction?]
When engineers design of the plane by hand, they often ignore the test in a way. They decided that the
most appropriate puncture. (This is determined without considering much - just "seems right").
Concept program without this decision, because that is not where the codes ignore advice checked by a
local shear in the plane or flat. However - you should decide what is structural damage and therefore
capable of what is appropriate. Skip shear results in an appropriate way possible, maybe not. For
example, the column C in Figure 37-10 and 37 - 11 is satisfactory for shear puncture (unreinforced)
but code calculations of shear reinforcement required by a method. Depending on your decision
whether or not appropriate.
Note: In fact, ACI 318-02 11.12.1.1 rules specifically requested by a shear test method in the flat.
It seems that this is the core problem cutting. See "The core cut" on Page 91 and "The core cut in the"
in Page 91 Chapter 21, "Determining the range of design".
For beams after stress, the reason may be deducted Program Concept fraction tubes prestressed
reinforced (with adhesion to concrete) from the plate width in the rules appropriate code.
Program Concept calculate tubes prestressed reinforced by dividing the number of fibers in a cable with
the maximum number of fibers in a tube containing prestressed reinforcement (as defined in the
material) and rounded to next integer.
See the following section for an explanation of how to calculate the shear plate of Concept program:
• For BS 8110, "Section 3.4.5 Design of beam shear properties" on page 432.
• For the IS 456, "Section 22.4 of the shear design of beams" on page 460.
Check this text mean: "Depth" d "is zero - replace with depth effect" column ".
Depth is still zero - to give. "?
• compression force and torque are really small, and so the design flexural reinforcement without
any public
37.12.9 The
Hammo
ck
Not all the results are always deflection considering creep and cracking problems. One very important
thing that you need to understand what is and what is not. See Chapter 56, "Evaluation of hammock ".
See "Why are there two lines for deflection of the strip drawing?".
No. Deflection allowed is a very subjective matter and Concept program if no warning
deflection beyond conventional
limits.
Note: Program Concept displayed warning that the large deflection analysis itself can not be valid
anymore. This occurs for the structure unstable or nearly unstable. Often the instability is related to
the internal displacement ends not restrained.
There are many plan view of the ground bearing pressure. There is no
summary?
The Soil Bearing Design rules include maximum pressure load and minimum load combinations.
Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Soil Bearing Design> Soil Bearing Pressure Max Plan
37.13
Performance
Suggested use graphics card is supported by DirectX 9.0. See the graphics card manufacturer to
For more information on the latest DirectX
drivers.
If you can not find graphics card supported by DirectX, the program will attempt to use the concept of
simulation software program Windows XP SP2 and Vista. There should be video RAM at least 128
MB, but 256 MB is better. For optimum performance, color depth can display graphics on the 24-bit
declarations. When using parameters declare the color depth is 16-bit, it should be noted many
inconsistencies.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
38 Error and
Warning
Ram Concept Program has error messages and warnings may appear in the modeling and analysis.
Many very clear message, no need to explain further.
This chapter explains the error messages and warnings often appear more complex.
Most of the errors and warnings are notified of coordinates (x, y) or number of subjects. The program
coordinates Concept presented at the end of the work area (see Figure 2-1 inPage 5). This may enable
the dialog object to Visible Objects ().
1 Choose Layers>
Plan.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
3 Numbers check box in the appropriate column of the object, then click
OK.
38.1 Mesh
Concept program can create many different errors and warnings for nets. The nets are limiting the
overall presentation of "The limits of nets automatically" on page 61.
You should heed this warning and error and correction. If not, the program will generate net concept
when done "Calc All".
Note: Almost all problems are caused by the nets are not used to comply with snap function.
38.1.1 Two or more surfaces or the beams have the same priority pillows stacked at (x, y)
The pillow the beams overlap and should have different priorities. This is explained in
"Priority Measures" on page 56.
Error is generated when two or more objects or a pillow beams overlap with the same priority.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
3 Check the boxes Priorities in Beams and Slab Areas, then click OK.
4 Use coordinates in the dialog box to locate the fault error, and review the priorities have been set.
Often the need to ensure that the best or thick beams will have a higher priority (lowest priority is 1).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: The highest priority is not always assigned to the thickest element. For example, where the
standard pillow surface overlaps the surface is compressed down.
The Concept is the smallest particle size of 50 mm (about 2 inches). This is about how to "snap" to be
effective. When an object, such as the surface of the two intersections close this gap, the line between
them is too short. In such cases, the program will combine the two Concept intersection together and
coordinates reporting of this case in the dialog box.
You can see the elements and the intersection of reference results in the standard
element.
• Features are too small to create the model (for example, the surface width 1 "(25mm)), or
If you end up with 3 mesh intersection in tight corners, Concept program will recursively several times
to adjust the intersection and make the smallest angle larger. In this case, the standard does not address
recursive tight corners, so the warning message reports that recursive too "deep".
Normally this does not cause problems, but can see that there is an element "point" may affect stroke.
Generally, to avoid this situation. See "Character is remove the (x, y) ".
Note: You should check the nets / model of problem areas to make sure that the elements of Concept
program is reasonable for the area.
Note: This error is usually caused by not using snap while drawing: two straight lines projected in the
same position, instead, is somewhat parallel and intersect.
38.1.5 Found error. Two elements in the same column as the location. Delete column
element or # b # a.
This error occurs when accidentally drew two columns in the same location, or copy and paste the
column and do not change
Support Set (above or
below).
3 Check box
columns.
38.1.6 Found error. Element in the column under the no. Review # a column element (under
the)
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
This error occurs when the column is outside of the boundaries (or the gap). To fix the problem
should move or edit the column to column within the boundaries.
38.2.1 Error occurred while loading vector combination. Download the key is not on. Review # a
point load.
Download a special focus on the finite element are rejected. Besides bugs, basically ignoring Concept
program loads.
38.2.2 Error occurred while loading vector combination. Load line is on incomplete copies.
Review # a load line.
Load line is not entirely on the finite element generated this error. Perhaps you repeatedly ignore this
error, as the load line cross gaps. Program Concept overlooked part load cross gaps.
Note: You should check this error. Load line seems to be on the edge, but the fact that outside edge. If
you think you can load straight through the gap and ignore the error, then you may miss a real
problem.
38.3.1 # Prestressed reinforced with a radius (a) is less than minimum allowed (b).
The prestressed reinforced parabolic shape with a large screen is related to the length of them have a
small radius. Appearing as a warning radius segment prestressed reinforced smaller minimum radius for
systems that prestressed reinforcement.
Radius (along) the smallest of prestressed reinforcement is defined in the Materials. Concept program
does not check the horizontal radius for various segments straight prestressed reinforcement in the
projector.
The radius is shown that the proposal is based on industry standards. You can change them based on
advice from the company prestressed reinforcement.
Note: Warnings can be implied conditions unbalanced (too many face-lift) for prestressed reinforced
parabolic shape.
To remove the warning, you can adjust the axis prestressed reinforcement or change the minimum
radius of the Material.
1 Choose Criteria>
Materials.
38.3.2 Can not automatically locate the backbone at (x, y) by the value of the axial
This alert occurs when the two following cases are true for two segments prestressed reinforced with
the same backbone point 2:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
11 Many segments are prestressed reinforced mark 2 Point Position Profile for equal balance loads, and
12 One, and only one, of several segments prestressed reinforced flat (ie the point values on the axes 1
and 2 point backbone segments prestressed reinforced flat: this usually happens when two equal
value).
Position Profile Point Selection 2 for equal balance to move the reference position cudiem 2 backbone
to lift the same for both segments prestressed reinforcement. This can not be the only one segment
prestressed reinforced flat (zero screen) because there is no increase in the segment of prestressed
reinforced that.
38.3.3 Error occurred while calculating backbone. The axis is not on the road. Click on the Fix
button to edit the axis at point (x, y).
Occurs when prestressed reinforced expand the far side. To fix this error, stretching the backbone to its
slightly on the edge or in the next version.
Dialog with automatic repair function (Click on the Fix button). If you click on this button, the
program will move the Concept backbone to the nearest concrete elements.
38.3.4 Error occurred while calculating backbone. The way is not in the axis (vertical). Adjust
the axis at (x, y).
Occurs when the backbone is not prestressed reinforcement in the thickness. The value of the axis is
always related to the beams under the vault or at the location of the backbone. One easy way to figure
out this problem is to look at the perspective prestressed reinforcement.
If the backbone is in step surfaces above or below, the Program Concept backbone to move the case
no ambiguity occurs. So check if there is the backbone of the surface is not expected.
38.3.5 Error occurred while calculating the backbone prestressed reinforcement. A prestressed
reinforced outside in the (x, y).
This differs from 38.3.4 that point in the backbone, but prestressed reinforced outside publication,
somewhere between the backbone. This usually occurs when the surface step above or below.
38.3.6 # Prestressed reinforced a repeat, and thus violate the lowest radius allowed (b)
A prestressed reinforcement is repeated with straight segments (vertical). So with a radius equal to
zero in (the) point backbone.
1 Choose Criteria>
Materials.
38.3.7 Error occurred while calculating the effective stress of prestressed reinforced. A
prestressed reinforced cables have different numbers than the prestressed reinforcement nearby.
Check prestressed reinforcement # a.
You can change the cable with reinforced prestressed continuous, but not recommended. This warning
tells you that the cables in prestressed reinforcement changes.
To avoid the warning, the prestressed reinforcement layer proper (the dialog will indicate prestressed
reinforcement layer is positioned somewhere) and changes in the number of cable-tensioned
reinforcement.
See "I can terminate the cable through a column?" on page 175 Chapter 37, "Questions normal " for
more information.
38.3.8 Error occurred while calculating the effective stress of prestressed reinforced. A
prestressed reinforcement is not any connection to any size. Check prestressed reinforcement # a.
[If any of prestressed reinforcement are the effects of stress, the prestressed reinforcement to be
effective stress.]
Concept program calculates the loss in prestressed reinforced with one or two click. The concept does
not allow prestressed reinforcement layer (latitude and longitude) are more reinforced with prestressed
reinforced stimulus than the other prestressed no size. There may be a prestressed reinforcement layer
(eg, latitude) with prestressed reinforcement layer is enabled and reinforced prestressed no other
stimulus.
When encountering this error, find prestressed reinforcement (from the given number) and click on the
drawing at least one prestressed reinforcement.
38.4 Othe
r
38.4.1 Error occurred while calculating all. Error occurred while drawing the triangular matrix
stiffness. The structure is not stable at the intersection: a, DOF: Translational axis Y. Review the
structure.
This means that there is no structural level stability. Need to provide more horizontal stability (eg, shear
walls, columns associated with the full torque, the base line horizontal arches, etc.) or a self-sustaining
structure.
Self-stabilizing
structure:
38.4.2 Error occurred: The payload is the horizontal load, but the structure is stabilized
automatically by the directions X and Y.
Can not be stable if the structural horizontal load (in addition to the prestressed reinforcement).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Yes (1) Auto-check does not stabilize structure in X and Y directions in Calc Options, and
(2) provide more horizontal stability (eg, shear walls, columns with the torque link
full, the arches across the road base,
etc.).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
38.4.3 The rules in the selected code rules "Using Design" is not compatible with the load factor
of the load combination using the rules. Ability to fault here.
Any load combination that uses the Service Rules (and sustained Service / Max Service) should have a
coefficient of 1 load for load balancing (despite the prestressed reinforcement) and the coefficients not
more than 1 load to dead load and live load. Concept program will alert when this violation.
Always alert occurs when additional load combinations and do not forget to enter the Loading Balance
load factor. To avoid warnings, change the load factor for the first load balancing for all load
combination rule using the Service (sustained Service / Max Service).
38.4.4 Load combination "Service" (sustained Service / Max Service) is the equilibrium
coefficient unusual and / or the load factor of redundancy. Ability to fault here.
Any load combination that uses the Service Rules (and sustained Service / Max Service) should have a
coefficient of 1 load for load balancing (despite the prestressed reinforcement) and load factor
important (and alternating boundary coefficient) is zero for static loads super. Concept Program alert
when this violation.
Always alert occurs when you add load combination and do not forget to enter the Loading Balance
load factor. To avoid the warning, change the load factor for the first load balancing for all load
combination rule using the Service (sustained Service / Max Service).
38.4.5 The rule "Strength Design" will be used by the load combination with the load factor for
different purposes. Ability to fault here.
Any load combination that uses the rules of Strength (or ductility) should load factor (and alternating
boundary coefficient) of 1 for redundant load (despite the prestressed reinforcement ). Concept Program
alert when this violation.
Always alert occurs when you add load combination and do not forget to enter the coefficient of static
loads super load. To avoid the warning, change the load factor (and the envelope alternating
coefficients) for the first load of redundancy for all load combination using the rules strenth or ductility.
38.4.6 Sheets / friends likely unstable. There are less than 25% of the exposed
section.
When plate (friends) are more liable to be reduced when significant load, it's likely very high pressure
load and can not be stable.
This error occurs when the column was repositioned after drawing puncture test and puncture test is no
longer centered in the column. Need to remove and redraw puncture test, which shows the puncture
test.
38.4.8 Found error. Tweaking cross section for ab-c strip makes no concrete at one or more
locations.
Limit slope between the cross sectional area tune the entire cross section in steps. See
"Limit tweak slope between cross-section" on page 93 for more information.
Can avoid problems by declaring limit slope between the cross section for large values of the beats are
big steps. However, consider the following reasons for the error.
38.4.9 Found error. [Strip design] ab-c with the rebar with too many layers of protection
(bottom panel near the top rather than on the side bar).
Cross-sectional area can be tweaked and thickness layers of protection, so the position of the sound
unreasonable.
39 Simple RC Guide
This chapter presents the steps to create a flat plate model in two directions with the unit load
synchro
nization.
The goal of the guide is to help you learn more skills to make the basic model and introduce some of
the tools and methods useful for the actual project.
ID codes are used ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001, BS8110: 1997 and IS 456: 2000.
The guidelines presented "U.S. units" for ACI 318 design, with the values and metric units in brackets
for AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456. The metric values are not exact conversions.
For more information on how to create a new file, see "Create and open file" on page 5.
39.1 Structure
Determination
Properties dialog:
o Choose Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 to BS8110, M40
for IS 456].
Click OK.
Identify the position of a column in the following three measures. We suggest you try all
measures to be able to learn different methods. 5 Enter the
system:
o 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
o 24, 0 ft. [7:25, 0 m]
o 24, 20 feet. [7:25, 6 m]
o 0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
Note: The coordinate system will appear in the command line, see Figure 2-
6 In "Draw the slab area", or select and delete columns and four the next test
11 Place the cursor near the following coordinates and click (the cursor will snap to the grid and
coordinate system
appear in the command line):
o 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
o 24, 0 ft. [7:25, 0 m]
o 24, 20 feet. [7:25, 6 m]
o 0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
12 In "Draw the slab area", or select and delete columns and four the next test measures.
13 Draw two columns at 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m] and 24, 0 ft. [7:25, 0 m] in one of the two previous
16 Press and hold down the shift key and click anywhere in the workspace.
Note: Copy the two columns with equal command. See "Use coordinate system related" in Page 16 for
further examination.
3 Double-click the tool Slab Area ( ) To adjust the default properties. 4 In the
o Choose Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 to BS8110, M40
for IS 456].
o Declare Thickness is 12 inches [300 mm].
o Still to Surface Elevation is 0 and Priority 1.
o Click OK.
5 With Slab Area tool ( ) Selected, determined by the four corners of the snaps at corner "outside"
of each column.
6 Complete the rectangle by clicking in the boot (or type "c" in the command line and press Return).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Check the "Hatching" under "Slab Area", and then click OK.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
Figure 39-1 After the determination, Mesh Input: Standard Plan showing the surface (the hatch), and
the columns.
Create grilles:
2 Generate Mesh dialog box, declare Element size is 2 feet [0.6 m]. 3 Click
Generate.
View grilles:
Now you will see a somewhat random nets, for reasonable results, but are still better mesh. You can
create a mesh improves significantly when determining the design range. This mesh is shown in Figure
39-4.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Element Figure 39-2: The standard reference (eg the size ACI318).
Element Figure 39-3: The standard reference (eg, AS3600, BS8110 & IS 456).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 39-4 Element: The reference after creating the standard (for example ACI318, the metric codes
have the same net)
Watch structures:
Ram Concept program automatically loads the concrete itself. There is no limit to the number of loads
than can be determined, but this example only determine Live Load.
This tool will draw the load of 50 psf section [2.5 kN / m 2].
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
4 Determine the load on the entire section by clicking on the four corners of the quadrangle and then
enter the letter "c". This form does not need to match the exact size of the publication, but should the
government.
Figure 39-6 Live (reducible) Load: The load slide all (with the payload section of brick
the ball was out): For example ACI318.
Figure 39-7 Live (reducible) Load: The load slide all (with the payload section of brick
the ball was out): for example, AS3600, BS8110 & IS
456.
The band design is an essential part of the program because they relate Ram Concept of finite element
analysis to design concrete. The characteristics of these include rebar sizes, protective layer, and the
parameters that Concept program used to determine the code of rules to be applied to the design cross
section. There are two directions called Latitude and Longitude.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
There is a common rule to design the RC plane in two directions with the column and middle strips in
two orthogonal directions, and rules that are used here.
3 Default Span Properties dialog box opens for the Generation Strip properties.
o Declare Code Calc Column Width Strip Slab (this is the default template and AS3600
IS 456).
o Click the General tab.
o Consider not mark as Post-tensioned.
o Click the Column tab Strip.
o CS Change Top Bar in # 6 [N20 to AS3600; T20 to BS8110; T20 for
with IS 456].
o Change the # 5 CS Bottom Bar [N16 to AS3600; T16 to BS8110; T16
to U.S. 456].
o Click the tab Middle Strip.
o Highlight Column Strip Middle Strip Properties uses.
o Click OK.
5 Generate dialog box opens with the declaration spans spans to Generate the Latitude (as described in
Figure 39-8):
Figure 39-10 The latitude band-oriented design (with the ball turned brick)
3 Click the Column tab Strip Span Default Properties dialog box.
The default settings in Latitude Design Plan spans remain the same. Due to protection class can not be
the same for both directions, changing the direction of the vertical layers.
4 Click on the Generate tool spans ( ), Or choose Process> Generate spans. 5 In the
Figure 39-13 The longitude ranges oriented design (with the ball turned brick)
Because the range of designs, should be able to create many more nets are.
Click Generate.
3 Now there is a better mesh. View Element mesh panels on the Standard Plan. See
o Cover to Change the 2:25 CGS inches [60 mm] (tchayg layer of protection above the
mean)
o Click OK.
It can "run" the file at any time while creating models for analysis and error checking. After drawing
the strip design, Concept program can analyze and design. You can then view the results.
Calculatio
n:
The purpose of the plan view the situation is to know whether there is any violation of the code does
not limit the ability of ductile shear in a way, and pierced shear.
View Status:
For ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the reference condition is OK for the design and test strips shear
puncture. See Figure 39-15.
Front projection shows state BS8110 shear failure puncture. See Figure 39-16.
Figure 39-15 Design Status: The status of ACI318 projector, AS3600 & IS 456
View reinforcement:
This shows all the reinforcement is determined by the eight range code for each design. View the
picture 39-17 to 39-20.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The plan view so often subject to "information overload" to fit the full results. For this reason, have
access to the plan view of layer Status Design, reinforcing separation: the (over or under), direction
(latitude and longitude), and type (or cut curved). So decide what the plan view brings the best results
without too many obstacles.
See Reinforced
concrete:
Concept program provides you with the code provisions on control and reinforced the largest in any
cross section designed to strip. Here below using reinforced towards latitude as an example.
3 In the column design rate (not the design section): Uncheck Bar
Controlling Criteria Descriptions and selected, and click
OK.
View the picture 39-25 to 39-28 for reinforced control conditions below latitude direction.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 39-21 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of ACI318 latitude.
Figure 39-22 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of latitude for AS3600.
Figure 39-23 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of latitude to BS8110.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 39-24 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of latitude for IS 456.
Figure 39-25 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of latitude for ACI318,
not tick and tick Bar Descriptions Controlling Criteria.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 39-26 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of latitude for AS3600,
no tick and tick Bar Descriptions Controlling Criteria.
Figure 39-27 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced underneath with latitude towards BS8110,
no tick Tick Bar Descriptions and Controlling Criteria.
Figure 39-28 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of latitude for IS 456, not
Descriptions and tick Tick Bar Controlling Criteria.
The Plot Concept is the choice that you can use to view the results in various bands such as torque,
shear, compression front, reinforcement and crack width.
Can skip this section, but there are steps that can help you learn the strengths of the program.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Enter a name for the projector, such as "Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement". (Concept program
automatically prepend layer name and add the word "Plan").
6 Highlight Active. 7
Bottom.
Figure 39-29 Status Design: Drawing: The projection in the direction of the reinforcement underneath
for ACI318 latitude.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 39-30 Status Design: Drawing: The reinforcement shown below latitude direction for AS3600
Figure 39-31 Status Design: Drawing: Front Projection reinforced underneath with latitude towards
BS8110
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 39-32 Status Design: Drawing: The reinforcement shown below latitude direction for IS
456
View the results can be pierced shear on the dedicated flat projection.
It can be seen that, for ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the percentage of non-reinforced stress (USR)
smaller
1.0 and thus cut puncture resistance is satisfactory. These results are presented in Figure 39-33,Figure
39-34 and 39-37.
USR to BS8110 is 1:17, as shown in Figure 39-35. Due to the stress ratio exceeds 1.0, the shear
reinforcement is required. Program Concept design style nail reinforcement (SSR) for such situations.
See SSR:
Figure 39-33 Design Status: The status shown for shear ACI318 puncture.
Figure 39-34 Design Status: The status reference shear pierced for AS3600
Figure 39-35 Design Status: The status reference shear pierced for BS8110
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 39-37 Design Status: The status reference shear pierced for IS 456
39.5.5 Deflection
Often you are interested deflection of Activity (Static load and load plus PT activity if possible) and
long term (the coefficient of variation and cracking is used).
The Concept of inertia using the cross section for the hammock. You can check the effects of creep,
shrinkage and cracking with strips based on deflection LT drawings. See Chapter 56, "Evaluation of
hammock " for more information.
Note: The projection plane deflection following is NOT considered cracking, creep and shrinkage.
Can see the hammock use, as shown in the picture 39-38 to 39-41. Note: This model uses the
pressurized column and thus deflection includes deflection column. Note: Template AS3600
2 Right click on the slide and select Plot ( ) To change the Plot Type from Color contours
the contours.
Note: As mentioned previously, you should review Chapter 56, "Evaluation of deflection" Concept
program to understand how to look at problems cracking, creep and shrinkage for calculating
deflections how.
Although not required View the bending torque, but can be useful, especially for irregular structures.
Although the torque is important, the plan view contours defaults for Mx torque (torque x axis) and the
USA. Since most of the detailed design drawings orthogonal reinforcement, and the x-axis direction
and is usually the y-axis. View the torque can be around any axis, including the spindle.
Not easy to evaluate the torque map contours. That is why the Distribution Plot tool useful.
Note: Distribution Plot useful tool for the qualitative results, not the quantitative results. See "The
distribution of cross section drawings" on page 132, And, especially, the "Summary" on page 134
The road map is the torque per unit length on the x axis and globally. 2 Snap On
orthogonal ( )
4 Click at the top of the structure first and again at the bottom.
Shown shape bending moment, around the x axis, with painted lines. View the picture 39-42
to 39-45.
Shows how the different Mx vertical pulsating like. If this is done through the central column, the
column will show the torque band sound big and small positive torque between how close rate. If you
do this in the middle range, just see the positive torque.
See "Signs drawing conventions" on page 24 Chapter 8, "Choosing sign convention" for more
information.
Figure 39-42 is the coefficient LC: 1.4D: The Mx reference to the use of tools for ACI318 Distribution
Plot.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 39-43 LC Basics: 1.2D +1.5 L: The Mx reference to the use of tools Plot Distribution
for AS3600.
Figure 39-44 LC Basics: 1.4D +1.6 L: The Mx reference to the use of tools Plot Distribution
to BS8110.
Figure 39-45 LC Basics: 1.5D +1.5 L: The Mx reference to the use of tools Plot Distribution
for the IS 456.
This section describes how to drawing sheet and reinforced underneath will see the branch.
Snap On orthogonal ( ).
6 Click on another to the left or to the right to determine the direction of reinforcement (first). A
polygon appears, is of the shape. Once you run the file, one can view each bar
through Visible Objects dialog box.
Note: To create three objects: a polygon match the contours, an object layer reinforcement in
reinforced latitude and direction an object layer reinforcement in the direction of the reinforcement.
7 Using the Stretch tool, you can adjust the bar to clamp coachman appearance
better.
View the picture 39-49 to 39-51 for AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456.
Figure 39-47 below plate is determined by clicking at points A and B. AC appears to point C = AB.
The bar is extended to points A and B, but signs indicate continued reinforcement to the next version.
Figure 39-50 below plate is determined by clicking at points A and B. AC appears to point C = AB.
The bar is extended to points A and B, but signs indicate continued reinforcement to the next version.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The goal of this tutorial is to develop skills learned in the program 39 Guide RC and introduced the
new steps, such as using CAD drawings and following stress.
Several tools and methods are presented in the Guidelines RC is not used here. Thus, your proposal
must first study the RC Guidelines.
No specially designed "flexible". After completion of the study guide, you will probably want to make
the thinner branches to check.
Can also use it as a guide reinforced concrete by making a few minor adjustments (eg, thicker version).
For more information about creating a new file, see "Create and open file" on page 5.
CAD file that you enter in the program folder Ram Concept
3 Choose Millimeters (the unit used in CAD files) and click OK.
41.2 Structure
Determination
).
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
box:
4 With Slab Area tool ( ) Is selected, define the contours of the top 10 by snap
to the corner of the drawing entered.
Note: There are two peaks close together near the B-5 at 26.05, 26.05 and 8.2 m, 8.8 m. The pointer
reference coordinate system
displayed next to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at the beginning (or type "c" in the command line and press Enter).
box:
3 The Slab Area tool ( ) Is chosen, deter mine the top six of the original lines by
clicking at each vertex, and then Click at the beginning (or type "c" in the command
line and press Enter).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 41-2 The balcony on the Mesh Input: The standard reference.
box:
3 With Slab Area tool ( ) Is selected, identified four drop cap with the top four or five
when appropriate.
5 With the Selection tool ( ), Select (by double clicking) and remove the drop cap at B-2.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
Many tools icon button with a small triangle in the bottom right corner (). The icon
to know that there are other similar tools for this node.
popupmenu.
column B-2.
Drawing gap:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Identify gaps in the four corners of clicking at each location, and then Click on
beginning.
3 Check the "Hatching" under "Slab Openings", and then click OK.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
Properties dialog:
3 Click OK.
4 Click in the center of the column all 13 locations are shown on the drawings entered.
1 Snap On orthogonal ( ).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
5 Determine the wall by clicking at the beginning and the end, on the centerline:
o Place the cursor near 8,825, 26.3 m and it will start sticking to the wall where the
cutting edge focus of copies, and click.
o Place the cursor in between columns C-2 (it will start sticking
orthogonal) and click. Now define structural element mesh but not yet available.
7 Walls will be highlighted because it is the current selection. If not, select and double-click by
pressing Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
9 Put the mouse on the Wall tool ( ) And hold down the left mouse button for a second. It will
Figure 41-4 After the determination, Mesh Input: The standard projection shows the surface and the
gap (the hatch), the columns and walls.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Create grilles:
Click Generate.
View grilles:
Now you will see a somewhat random nets. There will still be the logical result, but will make
significant improvements to the latter.
Watch structures:
2 Use around the x-axis and y ( ) To rotate the floor. 3 Click on the
When returning this perspective, looking at the scene could have saved by clicking Show Set Viewpoint
( ).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Concept program using overlapping nature of the load. One easy way to determine the cross-sectional
area with increasing load is drawing more load area "covered" the entire floor, and then draw the
additional load.
4 Determine the load on the entire section by clicking on the four corners of the quadrangle and then
type "c". This form does not need to match the exact size of the publication, but should the
government.
2 Determine load section by snap six of the top balcony (and then type "c"). In this case, it is best for
the load to match the size of the balcony.
Draw another load of 2 kN/m2. This load will be highlighted because it is the current selection. If not,
select it before proceeding with the mouse by double-click the Selection tool.
3 Choose Edit> Selection Properties, or right click and select Properties Selection. 4 In
Note: You should draw load 3 kN / m2 first by changing the default properties section of the load and
then use the tool.
Figure 41-7 Live (reducible) Load: The load slide all (to load the balcony section).
Figure 41-8 Live (reducible) Load: The load slide all (with the payload section has turned
the tiles).
2 With the Selection tool ( ), Select the payload section (fenced balcony selected load both load).
Paste the static load to load other hand make all loads, ready for editing.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
6 With the Selection tool ( ), Select load "covered" by the entire fenced section. 7 Right-
click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection.
10 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 11
Figure 41-9 Static load other hand make all loads (with the payload section of the tiles turned on).
41.4 Determination of
stress after
Stress measures following each different country. In Australia, the columns and engineers use to design
the strip between the flat after stress, and, usually, detailed drawings of prestressed reinforced (with
adhesion to concrete) and the range of the column between.
Note: The program has two layers Ram Concept for prestressed reinforcement called latitude and
longitude. See "The use of prestressed reinforcement layer Latitude and Longitude" on page 117 for
more information.
Note: The instructions in Chapter 45 explanation of how to use the Wizard to predict the Strip cable
required for critical strip.
The CAD files can now make the following directions easier.
5 Double-click the tool Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) To adjust the default properties. 6 In the
Note: 25 mm layer of protection for pipes containing prestressed reinforced with 19 mm (fiber
diameter is 12.7 mm) define the axis line.
8 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforcement at the
bottom left panels:
10 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
12 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforcement in the
next two panels:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
15 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
17 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
19 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the prestressed reinforcement at the first click because there were two
segments prestressed reinforcement is connected at that point.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
21 Connected With the Select tool tendons ( ) Is selected, double-click on the prestressed
reinforcement grid B.
22 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 23
In the Properties dialog box, change the 10 Strand per tendon, and click OK.
24 Connected With the Select tool tendons ( ) Is selected, double-click the prestressed
reinforcement directly on grid B.
25 Press and hold down the shift key and double-click the prestressed reinforcement directly
under the grid B. 26 Right-click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu
Selection.
27 In the Properties dialog box, change the Strand 5 per tendon, and click OK.
Draw the prestressed reinforcement direction but needs adjustment latitude of the backbone. Any
public at the end of the road axis prestressed reinforcement will be at a depth of between 250mm
version.
28 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all segments prestressed reinforcement is terminated, in addition
to segments on a drop cap or in the balcony:
29 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 30
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 125 mm and click OK.
31 With the Selection tool ( ), Double-click the segment on prestressed reinforced B.8-1 terminated 200 mm
in the balcony.
32 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 33
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 100 mm and click OK.
34 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all segments prestressed reinforced end cap on the drop, by:
35 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 36
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 375 mm and click OK.
Note: Declaring backbone anchoring prestressed reinforcement to focus the 250mm version, rather
than focus on the drop cap.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
37 With the Selection tool ( ), Double-click the segment prestressed reinforcement at B-2.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
38 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 39
In the Properties dialog box, declare Profile 1 is 462 mm at the top and click OK.
40 With the Selection tool ( ), Double-click the segment prestressed reinforcement at C-2.
41 Press and hold down the shift key and double-click the segment prestressed reinforcement underneath
(the
backbone at (9,15.7)).
42 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 43
In the Properties dialog box, declare Profile 1 is 162 mm at the top and click OK.
44 With the Selection tool ( ), Select the segment between prestressed reinforced D-2 and
Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current load balancing is -5.67 kN / m.
If not a number, you may choose only one segment prestressed reinforcement. 46
Click Cancel.
49 Enter the desired load balancing is -6 kN / m in the dialog box and click Calc Tendon Profile
Calc.
50 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all of the prestressed reinforcement rate between 3 and 5 grid.
51 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 52
In the Properties dialog box, in the Profile report is 125 mm 2, and click OK.
Note: The first steps Calc tool used to determine the low profile create a face lift at the same average
rate as a rate close to the side, and then change the low point manually to make more realistic.
through the gap. 55 Right-click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu
Selection.
56 In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 125 mm and click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Snapable Nearest Point Snap snap the cursor to the edge of the gap.
Note: The default setting in the prestressing reinforcement projection towards constant latitude.
Strictly speaking, the backbone should be adjusted in the first 1 column (to avoid collisions with
prestressed reinforcement in the direction of latitude), but can be ignored these instructions.
3 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforcement at the
bottom left panels:
5 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in subsequent
panels:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
8 With tools Tendon Half Panel Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforcement at the
balcony:
10 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection.
11 In the Properties dialog box, in the Profile report is 150 mm and 1 at the Parkway is 100 mm 2, and
click OK.
12 With the Selection tool ( ), Select two segments prestressed reinforced shortest span of half
(cantilever).
13 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 14
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 100 mm, and click OK.
15 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
17 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
18 Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to agree to the last option. Or, you can choose
Auto Connect, but not tick Skip Start Tendon.
19 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
21 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
23 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the prestressed reinforcement at the first click because there were two
segments prestressed reinforcement is connected at that point.
Panels on the right side too much prestressed and reinforced a few plates to be cleared away. 25
26 Press and hold down the shift key and select prestressed reinforced Thursday, and click Delete.
27 With tools Tendon Half Panel Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforcement panels
terminated:
o Snap On orthogonal ( ).
o Click on the backbone at 19, 17.5 m.
o Enter r0, 2.1.
29 Right-click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 30 In
the Properties dialog box, in the Profile report is 125 mm 2, and click OK.
31 Connected With the Select tool tendons ( ) Is selected, double-click on the prestressed
reinforcement grid 2.
32 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 33
In the Properties dialog box, change the 10 Strand per tendon, and click OK.
34 Connected With the Select tool tendons ( ) Is selected, double-click the prestressed
reinforcement directly to the left of the grid 2.
35 Press and hold down the shift key and double-click the prestressed reinforcement directly to the
right of the grid 2.
36 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 37
In the Properties dialog box, change the Strand 5 per tendon, and click OK.
Draw the cable business, but need to adjust the point of the backbone. Any point on any backbone
Last prestressed reinforcement will be at a depth of between 250mm version.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
38 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all segments prestressed reinforcement is terminated, in addition
to segments on a drop cap or in the balcony:
39 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 40
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 125 mm and click OK.
41 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all segments prestressed reinforcement on the drop cable is
terminated by:
42 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 43
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 375 mm, and click OK.
Note: This declaration backbone anchoring prestressed reinforcement to focus the 250mm version,
rather than focus on the drop cap.
2. 45 Right-click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection.
46 In the Properties dialog box, declare Profile 1 is 462 mm at the top and click
OK. Finally, the need to move away prestressed reinforced through the gaps.
50 With the Selection tool ( ), Selected segments on prestressed reinforced prestressed reinforced the move.
52 Segment stretching the prestressed reinforced to meet the prestressed reinforcement is moved.
Note: You can reduce the number of steps when moving from prestressed reinforced gaps using Utility
tool. This tool combines the Selection tool to move and stretch. See "Extending the tool buttons" on
page 6 and "Using Utility tool to move and stretch" in Page 17 for more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The band design is an essential part of the program because they relate Ram Concept of finite element
analysis to design concrete. Their characteristics include rebar sizes, protective layer, and the Concept
program parameters that used to define the code of rules to be applied to the design. There are two
directions called Latitude and Longitude.
Default Span Properties dialog box opens for the Generation Strip properties.
Strip.
Click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
12 Click OK.
Draw two segments oblique rhythms. The oblique band you handle this is how often the problem is
subjective, but in this guide we suggest a drag strip is straight and the other strip is calibrated in a
manner different.
Create the
latitude range:
1 Click on the Generate tool Strips ( ), Or choose Process> Generate Strips. The
Figure 41-13 The range of design latitude (with the tiles turned on). Now need to adjust a lot.
Concept program using the complete algorithm that always did not span segments and segments of the
rhythm strip is acceptable, as shown in the picture 41-14 to 41-17. Can edit the tool.
This manipulation can be seen more easily if the ball out tile
range.
2 Highlight Span Segment Strips Latitude Hatching below, and click OK.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
1 Choose between wall segments and beat grid D3 (as described in Figure 41-14).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 Snap On orthogonal ( ).
4 Click close range cross rhythms and then click again at the top or bottom of the first click.
User halfway along the straight rhythm strip at this time is "vertical".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Click at the intersection of grid designs strips B and C Grid near grid 3 (point A in Figure 41-16).
Three beats were edited to create improved rhythm strip. There is one more rhythm to adjust.
2 Click at the intersection of grid designs strips B and C close Grid Grid 2 (point A in Figure 41-17).
3 Click at point B.
Click in the C.
6 Click at point D.
13 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 14
In the Properties dialog box, change the Manual Span Width Calc.
16 Support Change Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and click OK.
This ensures that the cross sectional area (strip design) first ran across the gap, and so
which uses fewer parts than concrete.
The rate is adjusted to create the rhythm strip is improved, as shown in Figure 41-18.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 41-18 range design: The design reference ranges after the direction of latitude recreate.
The default settings in Latitude Design Plan spans remain the same. Due to protection class can not be
the same for both directions, changing the direction of the vertical layers.
4 Click on the Generate tool spans ( ), Or choose Process> Generate spans. 5 In the
Figure 41-19 range design: The design reference rate towards the
longitude.
A segment on the grid spans 2 slightly slanted walls so detailed in column C2. Other segments span
covering the wall and put unnecessary sponsored by the continuous (see "Draw near strip design
report "on page 98 for more information).
1 Select a grid segment spans between B2 and C2 (highlighted in Figure 41-19). 2 Turn
1 Click on the Generate tool Strips ( ), Or choose Process> Generate Strips. The
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 41-20 range design: The design shown towards the rhythm of the band after creation.
Sectional area left open accounts without strip design. You can use the tool to locate the middle range
of this section.
Figure 41-21 beats segment of the grid and the range B3-C3.
1 Choose a grid segment spans between B3 and C3 (line highlighted in Figure 41 - 20th).
2 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 3
6 Click at point B.
enter.
Snap On orthogonal ( ).
4 Click close range cross rhythms and then click again to the left or right clicks
The first mouse.
Guide lines along the strip half at this rate "horizontal". 5 Click on
Figure 41-22 range design: The design reference spans longitude direction after calibration.
Note: The designs range in latitude and longitude direction (the rhythm strip segments) with different
widths on the surface of the column. Can rational of the strips so that they have the same width in the
column, especially cantilever. View the presentation in "Defining Boundaries Strip manually" on page
88 Chapter 21, "Defining The designs range". In particular, Example 21-2 inPage 88 and Example
21-4 inPage 90.
o Click OK.
The presence of the strip design can significantly improve the regularity of the finite element mesh.
We suggest that you complete the design range, you should make the film.
Now there is a better mesh. View on mesh elements: The standard reference.
After running the model, can be seen the results of the analysis and design calculations.
Note: See the "Calculation results" on page 125 Program 27 for more information.
Calculation:
Error message appears twice for problems with prestressed reinforced outside of the range 6C-2. 2
details.
4 Select the layer Longitude tendons, tendons checked, and click OK.
5 Use the X and Y axis rotation ( ) And Zoom Rectangle tool ( ) To see the location of the
problem is shown in Figure 41-25 and Figure 41-26.
Figure 41-25 Perspective Longitude Cross Sections with prestressed reinforcement in the direction of
the
visible.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 41-26 Rotate and zoom position of the problems in Figure 41-25.
The difficult issue is the cross-section be tweaked with Max Rectangle parameter declaration. For
spans 6-2 segments, declare parameters that cause problems because the drop cap and the thinner the
balcony.
3 Check the boxes below Longitude Span Numbers Segments, and click
OK.
5 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 6
3 Check the box below Numbers Span Latitude Segments, and click OK.
5 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 6
The changes to remove warnings reinforced. In properly designed, should check out more on this.
Recalculate:
Note: See the "Refining cross section" on page 91 to check for refining cross section.
This shows OK to strip design. This means that there is no violation of the code limits the ability or
ductile shear in a way. Note that the condition does not indicate excessive deflection.
Having the results of pierced shear condition in each column. We can see this more easily on the
dedicated projector puncture.
It was found that the rate of ten columns with reinforced stress not (USR) is less than 1.0. The two
columns report "OK with SSR" means the type of reinforcement required nails. A column can not be
breached. SSR does not solve the problem. It should be reinvigorated.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Program Concept note "Non-Standard Section" column in five positions. "Non-Standard Section" is a
warning, not an error. Meaning of note that at least one of the important parts that are checking Concept
Program for columns that are not perfectly suited to one of three cases: interior, edge and corner. The
Concept is the stress ratio for non-standard parts. See "These are not the standards: AS3600, BS8110
and IS 456" on page 136 Program 28 for more information.
If the interest rate is not reinforced (USR) is less than 1.0, the breakthrough of the column shear is
satisfactory without any reinforcement that (according to the commentary on the "Non-Standard
Section)).
There must be reinforced if the program type concept report "OK with SSR".
Note: Select> layers> Design Status> SSR Plan to see the type of nail
reinforcement.
core design:
This shows all the reinforcement is determined according to code each strip design. You can see the
design of reinforced on a projection surface, or be able to access the plan view of the separation layer
reinforced Status Design by: side (above or below) and direction (latitude and longitude).
2 Choose the plan view provides the best results without too many obstacles.
Figure 41-30 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of latitude.
41.7.3 Deflection
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Often you are interested in the short-term and long-term deflection. Max Service LC (dead load and
live load plus stress after if possible) and LT LC Uncracked deflection (the load factor is used to
simulate the creep and shrinkage) is the projection map contours for the hammock.
Ram Concept program using inertia for the cross section of the ring road.
You can check the effects of creep, shrinkage and cracking the "ECR" and drawings as long strip
deflection. See Chapter 56, "Evaluation of deflection" for more information.
1 Choose Layers> Load Combinations> Max Service LC> Max deflection Plan.
Similarly, the deflection can be seen not long crack deflection from Uncracked LT LC layer.
1 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Max Service Design> LT Plan deflection. 2
Although not necessary see the bending torque, but can still be useful, especially for irregular
structures. Although the torque is important, the plan view contours torque defaults for Mx (torque x
axis) and the USA. Since most of the detailed design drawings orthogonal reinforcement, and the x-axis
direction and is usually the y-axis. You can see the torque around any axis, including the spindle.
Not easily evaluate the torque map contours. That is why the Distribution Plot tool useful.
2 Snap On Orthogonal ()
4 Click first on the grid roads B-3, and then Click on grid roads D-3.
This suggests that the shape of the bending moment along the line was
drawn.
5 While pressing the shift key, click on grid roads B-1, and then Click on
Road B-3 grid.
This suggests different Mx through panels, and highlight the range torque between different columns
and how.
See "The distribution of cross section drawings" on page 132 for more
information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 41-33 LC Basics: 1.2D + 1.5L Mx represents the projection surface using Plot Distribution
tool.
3 Select "Load Balanced Percentages" Visible Objects dialog box and click OK.
See "Calculate the percentage of the load balancing" on page 315 for more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The goal of this tutorial is to develop skills learned in the program 39 Guide RC and introduced the
new steps, such as using CAD drawings and following stress.
Several tools and methods are presented in the Guidelines RC is not used here. Thus, your proposal
must first study the RC Guidelines.
No specially designed "flexible". After completing the tutorial, you will probably want to make the
thinner branches to check.
Can also use it as a guide reinforced concrete by making a few minor adjustments (eg, thicker version).
BS8110 does not have the flat after stress, and designers see the "experts". Concrete Society Technical
Report 43 set up for this purpose. Ram Concept program is used first edition TR43.
For more information about creating a new file, see "Create and open file" on page 5.
CAD file that you enter in the program folder Ram Concept
3 Choose Millimeters (the unit used in CAD files) and click OK.
42.2 Structure
Determination
).
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
box:
4 With Slab Area tool ( ) Is selected, define the contours of the top 10 by snap
to the corner of the drawing entered.
Note: There are two peaks close together near the B-5 at 26.05, 26.05 and 8.2 m, 8.8 m. The pointer
reference coordinate system
displayed next to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at the beginning (or type "c" in the command line and press
Return).
box:
3 The Slab Area tool ( ) Is chosen, deter mine the top six of the original lines by
clicking at each vertex, and then Click at the beginning (or type "c" in the command
line and press Return).
Figure 42-2 The balcony on the Mesh Input: The standard reference.
box:
3 With Slab Area tool ( ) Is selected, identified four drop cap with the top four or five
when appropriate.
5 With the Selection tool ( ), Select (by double clicking) and remove the drop cap at B-2.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
Many tools icon button with a small triangle in the bottom right corner (). The icon
to know that there are other similar tools for this node.
menu.
column B-2.
Drawing gap:
2 Identify gaps in the four corners of clicking at each location, and then Click on
beginning.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
Properties dialog:
3 Click OK.
4 Click in the middle column all 13 locations are shown on the drawings entered.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
1 Snap On orthogonal ( ).
4 Click OK.
5 Determine the wall by clicking at the beginning and the end, in the middle of the road.
o Place the cursor near 8,825, 26.3 m and it will start sticking to the wall where the
cutting edge focus of copies, and click.
o Place the cursor in between columns C-2 (it will start sticking
orthogonal) and click. Now define structural element mesh but not yet available.
7 Walls will be highlighted because it is the current selection. If not, select and double-click by
pressing Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
9 Put the mouse on the Wall tool ( ) And hold down the left mouse button for a second. It will
Figure 42-4 After the determination, Mesh Input: The standard projection shows the surface and the
gap (the hatch), the columns and walls.
Create grilles:
Click Generate.
View grilles:
Now you will see a somewhat random nets. There will still be the logical result, but will make
significant improvements to the latter.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Watch structures:
2 Use around the x-axis and y ( ) To rotate the floor. 3 Click on the
Concept program using overlapping nature of the load. One easy way to determine the cross-sectional
area with increasing load is drawing more load area "covered" the entire floor, and then draw the
additional load.
4 Determine the load on the entire section by clicking on the four corners of the quadrangle and then
type "c". This form does not need to match the exact size of the publication, but should the
government.
2 Determine load section by snap six of the top balcony (and then type "c"). In this case, it is best for
the load to match the size of the balcony.
Draw another load of 2 kN/m2. This load will be highlighted because it is the current selection. If not,
select it before proceeding with the mouse by double-click the Selection tool.
3 Choose Edit> Selection Properties, or right click and select Properties Selection. 4 In
Note: You should draw load 3 kN / m2 first by changing the default properties section of the load and
then use the tool.
Figure 42-7 Live (reducible) Load: The load slide all (to load the balcony section).
Figure 42-8 Live (reducible) Load: The load slide all (with the payload section has turned
the tiles).
2 With the Selection tool ( ), Select both the payload section (fenced balcony selected load both load).
Paste the static load to load other hand make all loads, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool ( ), Select load "covered" by the entire fenced section. 7 Right-
click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection.
10 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 11
Figure 42-9 Static load other hand make all loads (with the payload section of the tiles turned on).
Stress measures following each different country. In the United States using conventional techniques
"set range" to draw details of prestressed reinforcement in the two directions. Gather the strips that are
focused on prestressed reinforced the supporting point in one direction, and they distributed
synchronous orthogonal direction. This method is often used in conjunction with the original design
sheet strips. This means that the column and middle strips are not used.
In the UK, the engineers were instructed to Technical Report 43 (BS8110 does not cover the flat the
following stress) and records the band encouraged to use materials designed for digital sheet sets
range. This measure, with reinforced prestressed concrete can stick with, is used in this tutorial.
Note: The program has two layers Ram Concept for prestressed reinforcement called latitude and
longitude. See "The use of prestressed reinforcement layer Latitude and Longitude" on page 117 for
more information.
Note: The instructions in Chapter 45 explanation of how to use the Wizard to predict the Strip cable
required for critical strip.
The CAD files can now make the following directions easier.
5 Double-click the Polyline tool Tendon ( ) To adjust the default properties. 6 In the Properties dialog
Note: 25 mm layer of protection for pipes containing prestressed reinforced with 19 mm (fiber
diameter is 12.9 mm) define the axis line.
8 With Tendon Polyline tool ( ) Is selected, draw prestressed reinforced with a grid:
16 Connected With the Select tool tendons ( ) Is selected, double-click on the prestressed
reinforcement grid B.
17 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 18
In the Properties dialog box, change the Strand per tendon 25, and click OK.
Draw the prestressed reinforcement direction but needs adjustment latitude of the backbone. Any
public at the end of the road axis prestressed reinforcement will be at a depth of between 250mm
version.
19 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all segments prestressed reinforcement is terminated, other than
those in drop cable segment, by:
20 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 21
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 125 mm and click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
22 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all segments prestressed reinforcement on the drop cable is
terminated by:
23 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 24
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 375 mm and click OK.
Note: This declaration backbone anchoring prestressed reinforcement to focus the 250mm version,
rather than focus on the drop cap.
2. 26 Right-click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection.
27 In the Properties dialog box, declare Profile 1 is 462 mm at the top and click OK.
2. 29 Right-click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection.
30 In the Properties dialog box, in the Profile report is 1 162 mm and click OK.
Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current load balancing is -32.4 kN / m.
If not a number, you may choose only one segment prestressed reinforcement. 33
Click Cancel.
36 Enter the desired load balancing is -30 kN / m in the dialog box and click Calc Tendon Profile
Calc.
37 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all of the prestressed reinforcement rate between 3 and 5 grid.
38 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 39
In the Properties dialog box, in the Profile report is 125 mm 2, and click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: The first steps Calc tool used to determine the low profile create a face lift at the same average
rate as a rate close to the side, and then change the low point manually to make more realistic.
Note: The default setting in the prestressing reinforcement projection towards constant latitude.
Strictly speaking, the backbone should be adjusted in the first 1 column (to avoid collisions with
prestressed reinforcement in the direction of latitude), but can be ignored these instructions.
3 Double-click the tool Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) To adjust the default properties. 4 In the
5 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforcement at the
bottom left panels:
7 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in subsequent
panels:
10 With tools Tendon Half Panel Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforcement at the
balcony:
12 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection.
13 In the Properties dialog box, in the Profile report is 150 mm and 1 at the Parkway is 100 mm 2, and
click OK.
14 With the Selection tool ( ), Select two segments prestressed reinforced shortest span of half
(cantilever).
15 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 16
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 100 mm, and click OK.
17 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
o Declare Spacing is 2 m.
o Skip Tendon Highlight Start, and click OK.
19 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
20 Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to agree to the last option. Or, you can choose
Auto Connect, but not tick Skip Start Tendon.
21 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
23 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
25 With tools Tendon Panel Full Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforced in
subsequent panels:
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the prestressed reinforcement at the first click because there were two
segments prestressed reinforcement is connected at that point.
Panels on the right side too much prestressed and reinforced a few plates to be cleared away. 27
28 Press and hold down the shift key and select prestressed reinforced Thursday, and click Delete.
29 With tools Tendon Half Panel Span ( ) Is selected, draw the prestressed reinforcement panels
terminated:
o Snap On orthogonal ( ).
o Click on the backbone at 19, 17.5 m.
o Enter r0, 2.1.
o Click the backbone of prestressed reinforced last at 22, 17.5 m.
31 Right-click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 32 In
the Properties dialog box, in the Profile report is 125 mm 2, and click OK.
33 Connected With the Select tool tendons ( ) Is selected, double-click on the prestressed
reinforcement grid 2.
34 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 35
In the Properties dialog box, change the 10 Strand per tendon, and click OK.
36 Connected With the Select tool tendons ( ) Is selected, double-click the prestressed
reinforcement directly to the left of the grid 2.
37 Press and hold down the shift key and double-click the prestressed reinforcement directly to the
right of the grid 2.
38 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 39
In the Properties dialog box, change the Strand 5 per tendon, and click OK.
Draw the cable business, but need to adjust the point of the backbone. Any point on any backbone
Last prestressed reinforcement will be at a depth of between 250mm version.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
40 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all segments prestressed reinforcement is terminated, in addition
to segments on a drop cap or in the balcony:
41 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 42
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 125 mm and click OK.
43 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all segments prestressed reinforcement on the drop cable is
terminated by:
44 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 45
In the Properties dialog box, in the declaration Profile 1 is 375 mm, and click OK.
Note: This declaration backbone anchoring prestressed reinforcement to focus the 250mm version,
rather than focus on the drop cap.
2. 47 Right-click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection.
48 In the Properties dialog box, declare Profile 1 is 462 mm at the top and click
OK. Finally, the need to move away prestressed reinforced through the gaps.
52 With the Selection tool ( ), Selected segments on prestressed reinforced prestressed reinforced the move.
54 Segment stretching the prestressed reinforced to meet the prestressed reinforcement is moved.
Note: You can reduce the number of steps when moving from prestressed reinforced gaps using Utility
tool. This tool combines the Selection tool to move and stretch. See "Extending the tool buttons" on
page 6 and "Using Utility tool to move and stretch" in Page 17 for more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The band design is an essential part of the program because they relate Ram Concept of finite element
analysis to design concrete. Their characteristics include rebar sizes, protective layer, and the Concept
program parameters that used to define the code of rules to be applied to the design. There are two
directions called Latitude and Longitude.
Default Span Properties dialog box opens for the Generation Strip properties.
Click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
9 Click OK.
Draw two segments oblique rhythms. The oblique band you handle this is how often the problem is
subjective, but in this guide we suggest a drag strip is straight and the other strip is calibrated in a
manner different.
Create the
latitude range:
1 Click on the Generate tool Strips ( ), Or choose Process> Generate Strips. The
Figure 42-13 The range of design latitude (with the tiles turned on). Now need to adjust a lot.
Concept program using the complete algorithm that always did not span segments and segments of the
rhythm strip is acceptable, as shown in the picture 42-14 to 42-16. Can edit with tools
This manipulation can be seen more easily if the ball out tile
range.
2 Highlight Span Segment Strips Latitude Hatching below, and click OK.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
1 Choose between wall segments and beat grid D3 (as described in Figure 42-14).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3 Snap On orthogonal ( ).
4 Click close range cross rhythms and then click again at the top or bottom of the first click.
User halfway along the straight rhythm strip at this time is "vertical".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
2 Click at the intersection of grid designs strips B and C Grid near grid 3 (point A in Figure 42-16).
Two calibrated rhythm generated rhythm strips is improved, as shown in Figure 42-17.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 42-17 range design: The design reference ranges after the direction of latitude recreate.
The default settings in Latitude Design Plan spans remain the same. Due to protection class can not be
the same for both directions, changing the direction of the vertical layers.
4 Click on the Generate tool spans ( ), Or choose Process> Generate spans. 5 In the
Figure 42-18 range design: The design reference rate towards the
longitude.
A segment on the grid spans 2 slightly slanted walls so detailed in column C2. Other segments span
covering the wall and put unnecessary sponsored by the continuous (see "Draw near strip design
report "on page 98 for more information).
1 Select a grid segment spans between B2 and C2 (highlighted in Figure 42-18). 2 Turn
1 Select the rhythm set segments covered wall, and press Delete.
Snap On orthogonal ( ).
4 Click near the cross rhythm strips and then click again to the left or right clicks
The first mouse.
1 Click on the Generate tool Strips ( ), Or choose Process> Generate Strips. The
Figure 42-19 range design: The design reference rate towards the longitude.
The presence of the strip design can significantly improve the regularity of the finite element mesh.
We suggest that you complete the design range, you should make the film.
Now there is a better mesh. View on mesh elements: The standard reference.
After running the model, can be seen the results of the analysis and design calculations.
Note: See the "Calculation results" on page 125 Program 27 for more information.
Calculation:
Error message appears on the problems with prestressed reinforced outside of the range 6C-2. 2
4 Select the layer Longitude tendons, tendons checked, and click OK.
5 Use the X and Y axis rotation ( ) And Zoom Rectangle tool ( ) To see the location of
the problem is shown in Figure 42-22 and Figure 42-23.
Figure 42-22 Perspective Longitude Cross Sections with prestressed reinforcement in the direction of
the
visible.
Figure 42-23 Rotate and zoom position of the problems in Figure 42-22.
The difficult issue is the cross-section be tweaked with Max Rectangle parameter declaration. For
spans 6-2 segments, declare parameters that cause problems because the drop cap and the thinner the
balcony.
3 Check the boxes below Longitude Span Numbers Segments, and click
OK.
segments.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
5 Right click on the slide and select Properties from the popup menu Selection. 6
Recalculate:
See "Refining cross section" on page 91 to thoroughly check Tweaks cross section.
This shows "OK" for almost a strip design. "OK" means that there is no violation of the code limits the
ability to easily bend, bend and shear stress in a way. Note that the condition does not indicate
excessive deflection.
Terms failure is shown for the range of 2C-3 design is "TR43 6.10.2". Can search terms in the TR43 to
see that this is "conditional" switch. known as the initial specified operation of Concept program.
Do not be surprised to see problems in this rhythm because cable 25 in a half sheet. The solution is to
terminate the cable at 3 grid.
In each column is the result of shear condition breached. We can see this more easily on the dedicated
projector puncture.
Program Concept note "Non-Standard Section" column in six locations and "OK with SSR" in eight
columns.
"Non-Standard Section" is a warning, not an error. Meaning of note is at least one important concept is
that the program does not check for the appropriate column perfectly with one of three cases: interior,
edge and corner. The Concept is the stress ratio for non-standard parts. See "These are not the
standards: AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456 "on page 136 Program 28 for more information.
If the interest rate is not reinforced (USR) is less than 1.0, the column shear puncture is satisfactory
without any reinforcement that (according to the commentary on the "Non-Standard Section)).
There must be reinforced if the program type concept report "OK with SSR".
Note: Select> layers> Design Status> SSR Plan to see the type of nail
reinforcement.
core design:
This shows all the reinforcement is determined according to code each strip design. Due to the stress
that follows, there is not much reinforced. You can see the design of reinforced on a projection
surface, or be able to access the plan view of the separation layer reinforced Status Design by: side
(above or below) and direction (latitude and longitude).
2 Choose the plan view provides the best results without too many obstacles.
Figure 42-27 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of latitude.
The plan view shows the reinforcement layer reinforcement details. In particular, the sidebar on
be rational for some of the match each side of the column.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
TR43 is the limit for the hypothetical stress due to bending and axial load. The rules of the code based on
the value of "average" rather than the highest value.
Drawing contours of the stress strain curve is finally in the Concept program. Most designers will not
be drawing attention to this because, following code, the program does not use the concept map
contours directly in design.
This may be a concern that the plan view shows the concrete stresses are plotted along with the range
of designs. This is the average stress in the wide range of designs.
1 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Service Design> Top Stress Plan.
To see Max Demand an easier way, can not tick the option trongn Max Capacity Plot.
Similarly, the projection can be viewed under stress in the layer> Rule Set Designs> Service Design>
Bottom Stress Plan.
42.7.4 Deflecti
on
Often you are interested in the short-term and long-term deflection. Using LC (dead load and live load
plus stress after if possible) and LT LC Uncracked deflection (the load factor is used to simulate the
creep and shrinkage) is the projection map contours for the hammock.
Ram Concept program using inertia for the cross section of the ring road.
You can check the effects of creep, shrinkage and cracking the "ECR" and drawings as long strip
deflection. See Chapter 56, "Evaluation of deflection" for more information.
Note: The drawings range deflection long as not too much useful for the plane stress following two
methods are designed for TR43. It is because of measures designed assuming no buttons section.
Although not necessary see the bending torque, but can still be useful, especially for irregular
structures. Although the torque is important, the plan view contours torque defaults for Mx (torque x
axis) and the USA. Since most of the detailed design drawings orthogonal reinforcement, and the x-axis
direction and is usually the y-axis. You can see the torque around any axis, including the spindle.
Not easily evaluate the torque map contours. That is why the Distribution Plot tool useful.
2 Snap On Orthogonal ()
4 Click first on the grid roads B-3, and then Click on grid roads D-3.
This suggests that the shape of the bending moment along the line was
drawn.
5 While pressing the shift key, click on grid roads B-1, and then Click on
Road B-3 grid.
This suggests different Mx through panels, how to highlight the nature and approximate measures
designed to power after TR43.
See "The distribution of cross section drawings" on page 132 for more
information.
Figure 42-32 LC Basics: 1.4D + 1.6 Mx represents the projection surface using Plot Distribution tool.
3 Select "Load Balanced Percentages" Visible Objects dialog box and click OK.
See "Calculate the percentage of the load balancing" on page 315 for more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For more information about creating a new file, see "Create and open file" on page 5. So make sure
you choose "the foundation" in the new file dialog.
Most of the support for the columns and walls. It is possible to model the columns and walls, but
should be aware that this can affect the behavior sheet. Especially, if the horizontal load should be
very careful in determining the support system in the absence of horizontal stress. If not, help on the
outside layer of the earth system (the dome base line) below can resist the torque and power cut.
You do not necessarily have the columns and walls are created in the model. Reason to model columns
and walls in the shape of the improvements of the model, and have the snap point for point and line
loads. Additionally, the wall panels will harden in the most beneficial way.
CAD file that you enter in the program folder Ram Concept.
3 Choose Inches [Millimeters] (the unit used in CAD files) and click OK.
44.2 Structure
Determination
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
).
o Choose Concrete Strength 4000 psi [25 MPa for AS3600; C25/30 to BS8110].
o Declare Thickness is 30 inches [750 mm].
o Still to Surface Elevation is 0 and Priority 1.
o Click OK.
4 With Slab Area tool ( ) Is selected, determined by the four corners of the snap to the corner of
the drawing entered.
Note: You can enter "c" to close the polygon instead enter the final point.
o Choose Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 to BS8110].
o Declare Height to 10 feet [3 m].
o Declare Support Set the "Above".
o Declare the Width is 30 inches [750 mm].
o Declare Diameter is 30 inches [750 mm].
o Check the "Roller at Far End".
o Uncheck "Fixed Near" and "Far Fixed".
4 Click OK.
5 Click the location in the middle of the column 11 is shown on the drawings entered.
1 Snap On orthogonal ( ).
o Choose Concrete Strength 3000 psi [20 MPa for AS3600; C20/25 to BS8110].
o Declare Height to 10 feet [3 m].
o Declare Support Set the "Above".
o Declare Thickness is 12 inches [300 mm].
o Uncheck "Shear Wall".
o Uncheck "Fixed Near" and "Far Fixed".
4 Click OK.
5 Define each wall by the first snap to the end of the road and between walls
is shown on the CAD drawing.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: The horizontal lines surround Empire (r and s) should have very little stiffness due to the
horizontal load.
3 Determine the dome over the entire substrate by clicking on the four corners of the quadrangle. This
form does not need to match the exact size of the publication, but should cover the whole.
Create grilles:
2 In the dialog box Generate Element Mesh Size declaration is 2 feet [0.7
View grilles:
Now you will see a somewhat random nets. There will still be the logical result, but will make
significant improvements to the latter.
Watch structures:
The payload can include a load point, line and area information on a number of loads (such as load,
other dead load, seismic north, east seismic, wind north and east wind). For simplicity, this guide will
not use the payload section (except for automatic calculation of the load itself) and will apply only
under static load another load, live load, and seismic load after the east.
8 Identify key download 40 Kip [180 kN] by snap to the column focus in the following positions:
o A-1
o A-3
o D-1
o D-3
9 Identify the remaining load as shown in the picture 44-3 and 44-4. 10 Double-click
12 With Load Line tool ( ) Is selected, load line drawn along the center line of the wall on
grid 2.
13 Repeat for grid wall at "2.5" with a load of 5.5 kip / ft [80 kN / m].
For simplicity, use the same static load for different load and live load (maybe rebate)
1 With the Selection tool ( ), Select all the other dead load by the entire fence.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Paste the other dead load on Live Load (Maybe rebate): The loads shown all.
Figure 44-4 Static load other hand make all loads [Metric]
1 Choose Layers> Loadings> Ultimate East Seismic Loading> All Loads Plan.
6 Double-click the Load Line tool ( ) And in the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
7 Draw a straight line by loading snap to the intersection on the wall, as shown in Figure 44-5 and
Figure 44-6.
8 Double-click the Load Line tool ( ) And in the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
9 Draw a straight line by loading snap to the intersection on the wall, as shown in Figure 44-7 and
Figure 44-8.
10 Double-click the Load Line tool ( ), And the Load Line Default Properties dialog box:
11 Draw a straight line by loading snap to the intersection on the wall, as shown in Figure 44-7 and
Figure 44-8.
Figure 44-7 Seismic east: hand make all load (parameters declared Monday)
Figure 44-8 Seismic east: hand make all loads (Monday declared parameters) [Metric]
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: The seismic load is the approximation for the five-story building. Front load projection is
average elevation of the floor (third
floor).
Note: The load in the y direction cancel key pair orbiting plate.
The band design is an essential part of the program because they relate Ram Concept of finite element
analysis to design concrete. Their characteristics include rebar sizes, protective layer, and the Concept
program parameters that used to define the code of rules to be applied to the design. There are two
directions called Latitude and Longitude.
3 Default Span Properties dialog box opens for the Generation Strip properties.
o Declare Code Calc Column Width Strip Slab (this is the default template AS3600).
o Click the General tab.
o Consider not mark as Post-tensioned.
o Click the Column tab Strip.
o Change the Top Bar and CS CS bottom bar is # 8 [N25 to AS3600; T25 for
BS8110].
o Change CS and CS Top Cover Bottom Cover 2 inches in [50 mm].
o Declare Min. Location is Tension Reinforcement Face.
o Click the tab Middle Strip.
o Highlight Column Strip Middle Strip Properties uses.
o Click OK.
5 Generate dialog open spans with spans to be declared as General Latitude (as described in Figure
44-9).
6 Click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Choose the rhythm of the segment is a subjective matter. Concept program using the complete
algorithm that always did not span segments and segments of the rhythm strip is unacceptable. Suggest
delete a segment of rhythm in this guidance.
7 With the Selection tool ( ), Selected seven segment spans are highlighted in red Figure 44 - 10
and click Delete.
Create the
latitude range:
2 Highlight Span Segment Strips Latitude Hatching below, and click OK.
Note: You can also right-click popup menu to see a warrant Visible Objects.
Figure 44-11 The range of design latitude (with the tiles turned on). Now need to adjust a lot.
Two segments slightly oblique rhythms. The oblique band you handle it how it is a subjective matter,
but in this guide we suggest that the cross sectional area of the strip segment was driven by hand span.
1 With the Selection tool ( ), Select the span segments 5-2 and 6-2 as shown in Figure 44-11.
On orthogonal ( ).
4 Click one of the segments near the pace, and then click again at the top or bottom
click the first time.
Top 7 Changes CS and CS Bottom Cover to Cover 3 inches [75 mm], and click OK. 8
Click on the Generate tool spans ( ), Or choose Process> Generate spans. 9 In the
10 The pace in the direction of longitude appear, as shown in Figure 44-13. Similar
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 44-13 range design: The design reference rate towards the
longitude.
11 With the Selection tool ( ), Select the rhythm on the wall segments (highlighted red
in Figure 44-13) And click Delete.
13 With Span Segment tool (), draw rate segment by clicking on the road
wall at point A and B in Figure 44-14.
14 Choose Edit> Selection Properties, or right click and select Properties Selection. 15 In
Draw a segment to support this rate to calculate the rate of fractional bandwidth Concept program.
17 With Span Segment tool (), draw span segments by clicking the roads in the wall at point B and
then C in Figure 44-14 (Snap to grid lines visible).
18 Choose Edit> Selection Properties, or right click and select Properties Selection. 19 In
• Support Change Width at End 1 is 12 inches [300 mm], and click OK.
1 Click on the Generate tool Strips ( ), Or choose Process> Generate Strips. The
Two segments slightly oblique rhythms. We suggest that the cross sectional area of the strip segment
spans
be driven by hand.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 44-15 The design of the band (with the tiles turned on). Now need to adjust a lot.
1 With the Selection tool ( ), Select the span segments 9-3 and 12-1 as shown in Figure 44-15.
3 Click near a segment of the rhythm, and then click again to the left or right of the first click.
Figure 44-16 The design of the strip after editing and re-create
Note: Many of the design range of latitude and longitude (the rhythm strip segments) with different
widths on the surface of the column. Can rational of the strips so that they have the same width in
columns, especially the cantilever. View the presentation in "Determination of the border strip
manually" on page 88 Chapter 21, "Determination of design strips". In particular, Example 21-2
inPage 88 and Example 21-4 inPage 90.
The presence of the strip design can significantly improve the regularity of the finite element mesh.
We suggest that you complete the design range, you should make the film.
Now there is a better mesh. View on mesh elements: The standard reference.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
After running the model, can view the results of the analysis and design calculations.
3 Do not check "Auto-stabilize structure in x-and y-directions", and click OK. Note: See the
"The general options" on page 126 Program 27 for more information. Calculation:
This shows OK on the design and test strips punctured. This means that there is no violation of the
code limits the possibility of ductile shear in a way, and pierced shear. Note that the condition does not
indicate excessive deflection.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
In each column is the result of shear condition breached. We can see this more easily on the dedicated
projector puncture.
"Non-Standard Section" is a warning, not an error. Meaning of note is at least one important concept is
that the program does not check for the appropriate column perfectly with one of the three walls of ACI
318-02: interior, edge and corner. The Concept is the stress ratio for non-standard parts. See "The non-
standard parts: ACI 318 "on page 135 Program 28 for more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
This shows all the reinforcement is determined according to code each strip design. However, the
results too much. You can access the plan view of the separation layer reinforced Status Design by:
side (above or below), direction (latitude and longitude), and type (bend or shear). So decide what the
best plan view brings the results are not too many obstacles.
See Reinforced
concrete:
3 Highlight Span Designs Latitude Bar spacings below, and click OK.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 44-21 Status Design: Front Projection reinforced under the direction of
latitude.
The biggest pressure load is important issue to consider when designing a. Drawing contours of the
pressure map is loaded in RAM Concept program. The drawings will change according to load
combination. Note that the maximum load value and the smallest common for different load
combinations.
The design rules of soil bearing pressure load including the largest and smallest of the load
combination. Front projection biggest pressure load is probably most useful for your design.
1 Choose Layers> Load Combinations> Service LC> Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 44-22 Using LC: The projection of the ground bearing pressure.
2 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Soil Bearing Design> Soil Bearing Pressure Max Plan.
Figure 44-23 Design of Reinforced earth: Front Projection largest bearing pressure of the soil
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The unit values and other metrics are presented in square brackets [] next to the U.S. unit. The metric
values are not exact conversions.
When you choose File> Wizard Strip, New File dialog box opens automatically before Strip Wizard
dialog box opens. After creating a new file Ram Concept, Strip Wizard dialog box appears.
2 In the New File dialog box, type the Elevated Structure declarations and code
4 Strip Wizard dialog box appears, click Next to go to the General Parameters page.
In the General Parameters page, specify the type of structure, the number and kind of rhythm, and the
concrete mixture.
5 Declare mixed concrete for the beam and is 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40
to BS8110].
6 Declare concrete for support systems is 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 to BS8110].
Enter the size and data rate in Span Data page. (Type of data to be entered depending on the structural
system that you select General Parameters page.)
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: To simultaneously declare all the values in a column, enter a value in the "Typical" (first row)
of the column. For example, in the above steps, can simply enter 10 [250] in the "Typical" column of
the "Thickness" to declare the thickness of all three spans of 10 inches [250 mm].
45.4 Create a
support system
under
inches [600 mm]. 3 Declare the height of all four systems are
4 Keep the heat below and above the bottom of the support system is
Enter the size of the drop cap in support System 2 and 4 in Table Drop Caps (the above) at page
Panels and Drop Drop Cap.
1 For factor 2 in the Drop Caps support, declared the following values:
Note: There may be blank Dead Line Live Line Load and Load (no need to enter
zero).
45.7 Determination of
stress after
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Next to go to Reinforcement.
Declare reinforced as
follows:
2 Declare rebar underneath is # 4 [N12 to AS3600; T12 for BS8110]. 3 Declare fully
Note: Strip Wizard did not differ between the protective layer of reinforced and prestressed rebar.
Complete Strip Wizard is the last page of the Wizard dialog Strip. It can save data entered in the Strip
file by clicking Save Settings Wizard. When you click Finish, Strip Wizard creates your strip in Ram
Concept open files.
Complete
range:
1 Click Save and the file name in the Save dialog box appears Strip Wizard File
After completing the wizard Strip, can be done with Ram Concept Program. After you have created
your band, create mesh (with mesh 2.5-foot [0.75 m]) and calculated analysis. See the relevant
operational program, or one of the three flat PT Guide for more information.
Element Figure 45-3: The standard projection shows complete range after the net has been created.
Element Figure 45-4: The standard reference when calculating and creating the mesh.
Figure 45-5 range finish on prestressed reinforced latitude direction: The standard reference.
The results of the analysis Strip Wizard similar but not the same as the flat PT Guide. The reason for
the different results include:
• Strip Wizard does not automatically consider the continuous horizontal impact.
• Strip Wizard does not consider the increased load balcony.
• Strip Wizard automatically adjusts the screen in rhythm 2 and 3 (can be changed if desired).
• Strip Wizard does not consider the prestressed reinforcement in the direction of longitude.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
45.12 Conclusi
on
Strip Wizard allows you to perform preliminary design and final strip of the floor. The results are
similar to results generated by any band program, but not exactly like Ram Concept model is to
consider all the characteristics of uneven floor.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
In Ram Concept program, the section was originally created as a model. Previously, engineers used to
measure approximate the design, approximate measures assume that the behavior in such a manner the
beam in two perpendicular directions. Because engineers use approximate measures in a long time, so
the results of the analysis of the elastic to the program RAM Concept can sometimes very
embarrassing. This section will review the theoretical analysis, so engineers can learn about the results
of the program RAM Concept is a better way.
The in-plane force and cutting the stretch, but does not deviate from the plane defined by the center. For
the horizontal (similar to the concept of Ram program), the in-plane force causes stretching,
compression and cutting plane only focus when watching the show.
The external force plane bending and the torsion, it moves perpendicular to the plane defined by the
center. For the horizontal (similar in concept program), the external force plane is the vertical deflection
from the original focal plane.
In the horizontal projection surface with a continuous focus, the equilibrium equation of forces inside
and outside surfaces completely separated. However, if there is a shift in focus, two pairs of force
become correlated due consideration to the issue of balance and must be solved simultaneously; Ram
Concept Program correlations handle a automatically.
For copies are not made from elastomeric materials - linear, the tension force due to the internal and
external surfaces no longer overlap linearly, so the two balance equations of power system becomes
should have an indirectly related to the tension of them.
This correlation of the tensor of two power systems for nonlinear elastic material properties can be
seen in the simple example of flat concrete slab under the load of external forces causing horizontal
plane and deflection. If the in-plane compressive force is applied synchronized to the same
publication, the less cracking than external mechanical force will be smaller plane and out-plane force
model with different parts.
The global structural analysis program Concept assumption that concrete behaves as elastic materials -
linear. However, following the presentation of the internal and external forces plane purely based on
the consideration to balancing problems, and so appropriate for any material.
The forces in the plane can be determined as the amount of axial stresses in two perpendicular
directions, and the shear stress. For different elements (no load applied) stresses are shown as follows:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
From consideration of balance issues, the variation of the force in the plane can be expressed as:
Fx ≠ / ≠ x + Vxy ≠ / ≠
y =-Px
Fy ≠ / ≠ y + Vxy ≠ / ≠
x =-Py
If a different coordinate axes are used for reference, the power of this new axis circulation Mohr
relationship with the principal axes of power:
The relationship is based on periodic Mohr considering balance issues, should have the effect of
materials.
For each point on the map, there will be a second "main axis" perpendicular if the shear stress is zero
and the forces in two perpendicular directions at large V values nhata smallest of them. The angle
between the major axis and the x-axis and y-axis will vary on the point.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The external force plane can be defined as the amount of bending moment around two perpendicular
axes, an anti-twist torque and shear forces along the perpendicular sides. For different elements, the
torque and shear stress is expressed as follows:
From the review of the balance issues, the variation of the external force plane can be expressed as:
Vxz ≠ / ≠ x + ≠ Vyz / ≠ y
=-Pz
Mx ≠ / ≠ y + Txy ≠ / ≠ x
=-Vyz
My ≠ / ≠ x + Txy ≠ / ≠ y
=-Vxz
If a different coordinate axes are used for reference, the shaft torque of this new relationship with the
human circulatory Mohr of the original shaft, cutting force vector relationship as simple:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Again, the relationship is based on consideration of balance issues, so they are valid for the material.
For each point on the two there will be a "major axis" perpendicular if the torque is zero and the
bending moment around two perpendicular directions at large V values nhata smallest of them. The
angle between the major axis and the x-axis and y-axis will vary on the point.
If the plane of focus of the projection surface changes, then the interaction of the forces inside and
outside the plane. The interaction of two pairs of simple force and is determined purely by the force
and torque balance. Simple steps to be able to focus when viewing the slide below:
Fx '= Fx
Vxy '=
Vxy Vxz '=
Vxz
My '= My - Fx d
MXY '= MXY - Vxy d
Ram Concept Program can draw the results related to the x-axis, y-axis, an axis-specific (identified with
an angle) or a maximum or minimum axis. Axis is defined as the smallest
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
axis at each and every point with the smallest value for the volume will be drawn, the angle of the shaft
to be used will vary with each point in the drawing. Similarly, the largest shaft axis is defined at each
and every point with the maximum value of the volume will be drawn, the angle of the axis will use the
variation in the drawing.
Program Concept Ram recipe using linear finite element-based elastic properties section to the global
analysis.
Finite element analysis (also known as finite element methods) is the standard way of engineers to
analyze complex structures. Although the theoretical interpretation of finite element methods is
beyond the scope of this chapter, but engineers use Ram Concept program should understand the
parameters that define them affect the analysis of the program How.
The Ram Concept model of the structure of the elements with a triangular or quadrangular. The element
is based on the formula of Robert Cook ["Two mixes elements to the plate analysis, and multiple
layers", International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, Volume 5, pages 277-288, 1972] .
Consider both elements in plane deformation and bending deformation. Five degrees of freedom used
for the intersection.
The elements used in the Ram Concept program has the following general characteristics:
• The element can be (optionally) have different stiffness in two orthogonal directions.
Ram Concept program allows us to identify six stiffness coefficients adjust the behavior of the element
(see section presents the declaration of conduct in the vertical "The characteristics of the area" in Page
56 and "The beam characteristics" on page 57,Chapter 16, "Determining the structure"). When all the
coefficients are reported as 1.0, the element behaves as a vertical material (the same material
properties in all directions). When the different coefficients, the element behaves as a vertical material
(material properties vary with three perpendicular axes.)
Need to be careful when declaring the hardness factor. With certain combinations of coefficients, the
structure may become unstable and the results can be unreliable. In addition, the interaction of these
factors can be complex stiffness than the first test. This section on how to avoid this problem.
When the other K 1 is used (either directly, or indirectly, by the declaration of conduct or beams), the
structure may become unstable or nearly unstable. Normally this is not a problem except when using
the Custom option.
If using other parameters declared goods, and or KMrs KMrs and KMR and KMS are concessions,
these elements can become unstable and can analyze results suspicious. For this reason we suggest that
these parameters are always kept within limits:
In that case the focus of the projector is not in sync, the hardness in and out of the plane of the
elements of Concept program will interact. For example, the T-beams, the axial stiffness of the plate
and the edge will interact with their bending stiffness (creating stiffer section is only the bending
stiffness and the edge of the plate is added ).
In this case, you may need to adjust the plane of conduct to regulate behavior outside the plane. For
example, if you want to extract halved T-beam bending stiffness, to declare that the KMS 0.5 and
KFR.
46.4 Deep
Beams
Ram Concept program assumes that the beam element and the element behaves the same, except when
the "conduct" of them defined for finite element.
Assuming that the first analysis done Program Concept for the element is "the linear section is linear",
similar to "the plane sections remain plane is always" in the beam theory .
Figure 46-6 Linear Structures Prior Deformation Figure 46-7 Linear Structures After Deformation
Second analysis assumed that Ram Concept Program implemented for the form element is the human
element and the stress in the typical position. The following table shows the human element is the
ability and the interest to follow.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 46-8 The impact in the plane (View face Figure 46-9 The impact outside the face flat (View
projector) face projector)
46.4.2 Analysis and design girder deep for bending moment and
cutting force
Because Program Ram Concept assuming that girder deep Behaving like the copies, should Program
Concept would assume the distribution linear of bending stress on the girder deep, although stresses
actual distribution do not must is linear.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
In design, program Concept will not perform any calculate capacity any special only suitable for girder
deep and Program Concept will not have any detailed information girder deep-any. The calculate the
girder agricultural of program Concept conventional is moderates respect with girder deep.
The engineers need ensure that girder deep stable horizontal. Persons engineers also need have the
details appropriate
respect with
girder deep.
46.4.3 Analysis and design girder deep with the Torque bending
horizontal
Because Program Ram Concept assuming that girder deep Behaving like the copies, should Program
Concept will evaluate too high hardness of girder deep according to these Torque transverse bending.
The analysis of program Concept will assuming that entire girder have ability bear torque horizontal
have effective.
Figure 46-12 Program Ram Concept analysis the bending stress / direction axis
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The evaluation too high hardness this conventional negligible and be omitted.
In designing, a important thing is the sectional area designed of program Concept have parameters
declare depth ignore appropriate, should only have part girder is real effectiveness be used in calculate
capacity.
Because Program Ram Concept assuming that girder deep Behaving like the copies, should program
Concept will evaluate too high hardness anti twisted of girder deep. In worst case, assumptions of
program Concept lead to job hardness anti twisted at girder deep corresponding with BH3, although
degrees
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
hard anti twisted really corresponding with b3h. The evaluation too high of program Concept not large
because the element Version Show hardness cutting force horizontal do for girder softer. Number
element via girder deeply as large,, then the evaluation too high hardness anti twisted increasingly
small.
Figure 46-16 Program Ram Concept analysis the shearing stress anti twisted
Twists in girder can necessary for driveline textures complete - because this reason should do not can
skip. There can extracts reduced hardness anti twisted of girder (this will adjusted driveline textures
come the road less dependent into capacity girder anti twisted more than). Program Concept have four
choice have consideration come the torsion of this in design. See "The problem about twisted" in page
330 for more information.
Note: When hardness anti twisted of girder has be extracts reduced use "coefficient of K", informed
usually recommends have level reinforced belt anti twisted smallest to ensure that girder have can
cracked due to twisted which not have expected failure.
Because Program Ram Concept assuming that girder deep Behaving like the copies, should program
Concept will not have considered to girder that are orders of have can bending around axis along.
Assumptions of program Concept is "the sectional area linear still is linear" prevent kind bending this
and will do for program Concept assessment too high hardness of girder that are orders of respect with
torque transmit.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 46-18 Program Ram Concept the bending stress girder that are
orders of
Figure 46-19 The bending stress girder that are orders of "carried"
The evaluation too high hardness this conventional negligible and be omitted. However, depending
according person engineers ensure that girder that are orders of has a capacity and detailed to transmit
torque be analyzed.
Program Ram Concept have consider to wall on the copies such as beams. This analysis reasonable the
influence of the wall on the copies this, but not report the forces girder-wall, or not design girder-wall.
The strips design and the sectional area cut design horizontal wall ignore both capacity of girder-wall in
cross section cut horizontal and the forces on the girder-wall. Girdles of-wall able currently the
characteristics wall a different ways more than is wall under copies:
Note that although job forecasting behaves flexural of copies and girder is accurate, but the division
cutting force between wall and copies not been forecasts good. respect with girder-wall / details
presence copies combine, part cutting force along of copies will is between two extremes:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
As / Atotal,
and Is / Itotal
If
Atotal = scope cross section cut horizontal of copies and wall the
46.6.1 Download
importance super static
Program Ram Concept calculate impact of payload super static respect with the objects (the elements,
the the road soles surround, Us support, the sectional area design, the cross section cut horizontal
segments strips design and check scrapers perforation) by using relationship vector follows here:
Fh = Fb - Fp if
Fb = the forces and these torque payload balance (Luc reinforcing steel prestressed on
textures fact)
Fp = the forces and the torque "main" in the object (the forces in the object due PT if the object not
been hampered, but still have the steel rod prestressed - if have)
For with the objects not have the steel rod prestressed (wall, the columns, the the road soles surround,
Us support hard, the sectional area designed not have the steel rod prestressed and these strips
designed not have the Reinforced steel prestressed), Fp equal to zero, should:
Fh =
Fb
For with the element copies, not implement calculate Fp for each element, because Fp not have clearly
defined respect with any any existing objects except cross section cut horizontal. The analysis of
copies of program Concept assumptions Fp = Fb (Fh = 0), but those value be this drawing NOT be
used when designing and check. Program Concept calculate the forces sectional area design and cross
section cut horizontal strips designs (not have assumptions Fp = Fb) as follows:
Fh = Fb -
Fp
Calculate the Fp of program Concept based on the steel rod prestressed at each cross section cut
horizontal.
Note: Because this problem, using the drawings analysis copies of program Concept respect with the
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
design value cross section cut horizontal in the the textures PT is not exact. (No suggest using the
drawings analysis copies both in the copies RC, but that is because these strips design and the
sectional area designed have high accuracy more than).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: To been explain details more than, watch part "Hoan all the influence additives (Sieu static)"
due A. Bommer; PTI Journal, January 2004, the Vol 2 Number 1).
Program Ram Concept can analyze payload equal to analysis self balance.
Any static load any above textures, when combined with the jet textures Us support (be regarded such
as is the payload supplement), is payload self-leveling. In this payload total the download important on
texture is balance force and torque. However, the payload balance still have the torque and the forces in
texture.
In many certain cases, need analysis payload self balance according floor systems although ignore
impact of Us support floor systems. We I call kinds analysis this is analysis self balance.
The driveline compatible with job analysis Full buildings according transverse
direction
The purpose most usual of the analysis self balance is to make sure that driveline in program Concept
is consistent with driveline in analysis horizontal be done by a separate program.
If perform analysis according transverse direction of the building (is probably use RAM Frame), and
job this analysis have consider to copies is a part of driveline horizontal, copies - consists the links
copies-column - need been designed to withstand the forces and the torque be determined in analysis
according transverse direction. Design this can is done by analysis self balance. The forces / the jet
from all Us support (on and under copies) into copies be regarded such as is these payload up copies,
any the certain force be applied directly up copies (as force stories in analysis seismic ) also be
included.
Results of work analysis self this balance is driveline copies entirely suitable with analysis according
transverse direction of entire buildings. Classification announced the forces (and the di transfer) in
copies may not joints with the choices in analysis buildings according transverse direction, but
distribution of the forces copies in program Concept near such as always always exact more than those
force be projected Forecast analysis entire buildings.
The purpose
other
Tuy analysis self balance have the purposes other, but them less when and not be threads referring to in
this booklet.
To program Concept analysis payload use analysis self balance, kinds analysis payload must be
changed into "lateral SE" (self-balance horizontal). Type analysis payload can be change in window
payload. See "Change analysis" in page 31 Chapter 10, "Dinh clearly Download important ".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: Thuat Languages "lateral SE" be used instead because "Self-Equilibrium" to Ngac remind
person use is kinds this analysis mainly is spend for the horizontal load.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
There is no limit respect with kind or number amount of of the payload can be applied in payload self-
leveling. However, the download important be applied must near such as is self-leveling. If the
payload not balanced, then Program Concept will apply the stresses up copies to make sure that
balance can be maintain. There can watch the jet stresses in Calc Log.
Note: See the "Enter database" in page 45,Chapter 14, "Enter Database from System textures RAM "
to know more information about way enter automatic the payload self balance horizontal.
Note: The nails copies / friends not suitable respect with analysis self balance because the jet land
without
be know before when analysis.
dynamic"
If you use payload self-balancing equal, program Concept will create matrix hardness inner di
extrapancreatic action matrix hardness evenly. Ma battle hardness mobile have consider to copies, but
not must Us support on the or under copies. Program Concept also supplement add many Us support
small into matrix to do for it's stable.
System
support
small
System support small which Program Concept supplement add into matrix hardness mobile is placed
at positions Us support fact, but not must at each position Us support fact. Typically is, program
Concept supplement add three Us support to provide degrees stable full of enough, but not provide any
stresses any.
Note: Program Concept warning if not have at least two positions Us support if Us support small can
be supplement.
Ly due to add Us support small in the same position such as Us support fact is those this position have
the ability is those position where the payload self balance be applied, then any jet any at those this
position can be regarded is "the calibrate" for the payload self-leveling.
Checking poked perforation have consideration come these payload be applied at check position
poked perforation in the calculate jet. Checking poked perforation only is "Us support" have the jet
from analysis self balance.
The di
transfer
Program Concept report every move respect with payload self balance into zero. Download important
self balance not have influence up the di transferred be counted respect with the load combination or the
rule sets.
Load sample
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Download importance sample can use in analysis self balance, but near such as have never be used.
When be used, the sample should have a sets the payload self-leveling.
Note: For with for example, watch part For example 37-1 inpage 177,Chuong 37, "These questions
conventional".
The verbose Layout Design have system local coordinates sets of, with
the axis r, s and z:
• Shafts r co gland with sectional area design and have sunflower from the beginning 1 to early 2.
User This also be watch is "horizontal".
• Shafts rotary 90 degrees vice dimensional kim clock with axis r (still in the plane xy) and go
through "focus designs" (watch part under). User This also be watch is "Shafts"
• Shafts z parallel with axis z wikis The and go through "focus designs". User This also be watch
is "verticals"
The forces for sectional area designs be regarded such as is the forces which textures in the region s
yang applied for textures in the region s negative.
Tiet Layout Design be drawing from point B to point A will have the forces such as sectional area
designs be drawing from point A come point B except two force follows here will have the signs vice
each other:
The segments strips designed have system local coordinates sets of for each cross section cut horizontal
inside. Tiet presence cut horizontal inside square corner of with waves segments strips design and
expand from the road marginal branching left side to the sugar marginal right-hand arm. Each cross
section cut horizontal inner been handling exact such as Tiet Layout Design with the axis r, s and z
(watch part on the).
All the cross section cut horizontal of DSS will have the system coordinates parallel each other, but for
with the geometry textures certain, the axis s of each cross section cut horizontal will not co gland.
That is due each cross section cut horizontal determine "focus designs" of main it (watch part under).
Each cross section cut horizontal segments strips designs (strips segments rhythm) and weather Design
Layout determine position of their center designed of it. Position be determined as follows:
1 Tiet presence cut horizontal final be determined equal to way consider (i) cross section cut horizontal
been tweaked respect with the segments strips design, and (ii) these depth "ignore" sides under and in
on for the weather Design Layout.
2 Hand projector focus z of cross section cut horizontal finally this is coordinates z of focus
designed.
3 Tiet presence cut horizontal "core" be determined (watch part "Determine Concrete "core" "in page
330). For with sectional area shaped T, part core is part relatives from under cross section to early
cross section. For with sectional area rectangular, core will is entire cross section.
5 There can view focus cross section cut horizontal segments strips designed in first page audit You.
See
Chuong 30, "Using Auditor" for more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Program Ram Concept calculate the forces cross section cut horizontal around focus designed of cross
section cut horizontal (follows when considered problems tweak).
For with each element copies alike formation should cross section cut horizontal Concrete initial
(before when considering come problems tweak), the forces buttons of the elements (respect with the
intersections of the the elements on the a surface of sectional area design) be changed into focus of
sectional area Concrete finally and be supplemented into the forces designed. For with the element
Version Show head sectional area design, only have feces number (corresponding with length
sectional area designed in element be feces divided by dimensional long through element along with
straight line co gland with sectional area designs ) of the forces button be included.
The forces button be used instead because integration with the applications productivity copies because
the results stresses copies can have these pulse locally due these element have shape else strange. The
pulse locally this can significant change total value be integrated. The forces button be used by Program
Concept do not be affected by the pulse applications local refractive and always for the results
equilibrium with the load of button.
Program Ram Concept calculate percentage payload are balanced by applicants force after in these
strips designed. See "Show percentage load is balanced" on page 130 to be guided about way access
information this.
The value report valid respect with Calc All latest (reinforcing steel prestressed change follows when
not
be reflected).
The values be counted based on the total torque static respect with rhythm, download important are
balanced and static download and works download.
in which:
if
M = (M1 + M2) / 2 -
M3
M3 = torque at Item presence cut horizontal nearest with between the cross section cut horizontal
% = -100 Wb /
Wl
if
considering
Not can calculate for the segments strips designed not must is a part of rhythm. There a ratio part
hundred payload balance "not determine".
Calculate balance can have the differences with existing calculation in the the shape projector flat
reinforcing steel prestressed. The Differences is:
• torque grab at the sectional area first and finally, not must the center line Us support
In the calculations, "DL" based on the load types "static download", and
means is:
Trong amount of copies relatives + Tinh download + Tinh download (transmission) but
not have static load pull stretch In the calculations, "RLL" based on the load types new,
Works download (have can extracts reduce) + Works load (can not extracts reduce) + Works
download (cumulative) + Works download (ceiling)
+ Works download (have can extracts reduce) (transmission) + Works load (can not extracts reduce)
(transmission) + Works download (cumulative) (transmission) + Works download (ceiling)
(transmission)
All the this payload are be extracts reduce according code code extracts reduce operation download
before when add into total the download important.
The cross section design and the segments rhythm have part choice (box select) with brands is "Do not
giảm Intergrated M và V vì to Sign Change". If select tùy this, program Concept will perform years
integrated of the forces cross section cut horizontal for each download important and sample payload:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
1. Tich standard conformity - such as be presented in "Calculate the forces on cross section
cut horizontal".
2. Integrate Torque largest - such as items 1, except work only consider the element do increase value
bending moment be integrated.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3. Integrate Torque smallest - such as items 1, except work only consider the element do reduce value
bending moment be integrated.
4. Integrate cutting force largest - such as items 1, except work only consider the element do reduce
value cutting force along be integrated.
5. Integrate cutting force smallest - such as items 1, except work only consider the element do reduce
value cutting force along be integrated.
The purpose of this selection is for allows the safety design and moderates if the cross section cut
horizontal have the area torque (or force cut) with the signs vice each other, recorded receive torque
(or force cut) respect with cross section cut horizontal smaller respect with cross section cut horizontal
additives shorter.
The values from the integrated on may not be considered in a number certain cases:
• Integrate Torque largest - value bending moment be considered if torque bending is signs
similar such as bending moment in Tich standard conformity.
• Built-in torque minimum - worth bending moment be considered if the bending moment is a
sign similar to the bending moment in the integration standard.
• Integrated shear largest - the value of shear along to be considered if the shear forces along the
same sign as the shear vertical integration standard.
• Integrated shear smallest - the value of shear along to be considered if the shear forces along the
same sign as the shear vertical integration standard.
When you select "Do not Reduce Integrated M and V Due to Sign Change", the design capacity are
more moderate when not selected option. Do not use this option without considering properly.
Note: The built-in selection is carried out independently for each load. The power section cut the load
combination so there may be (and without) the power of the different elements in each load. This
added to the peaceful option.
The Ram Concept track two kinds of results: "Standard" and "envelope".
The standard result for a load is the result of applying the load of the load no templates are considered.
These results include the results in tab Slab, the results of context "Standard" in the tab Reaction and
the resulting context "Standard" for the tab Strip.
The benchmark results for load combination is the resulting standard load combination linear using the
load factor standard. These results include the results in tab Slab, the results of context "Standard" in the
tab Reaction and the resulting context "Standard" for the tab Strip.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: The benchmark results also have all the results for items outside of segment strip design, the
details of the design and test puncture. Items such as the bending moment map, the jet column and the
jet land in the benchmark results (not included).
Note: For the layer of rules, not the benchmark results, only the results envelope
were
calculated.
The resulting envelope is maintained only for 3 types of objects - the fractional strip design, the details
of the design and test puncture. The resulting envelope full consideration of load patterns and the
coefficient contours alternating (as well as the benchmark).
For fractional strip design and the details of the design, all the resources section cross section is
calculated, and there are six outcomes envelope is maintained:
in time P smallest)
Note: The "Min" are considered valuable "signs" the smallest, is not worth quite minimal.
For testing punctured, all jets are and have 6 results envelope is maintained: Max Fz (jet on time jet Fz
largest)
46.9.3 The Ram Concept calculated results outline how the results envelope - Load
The results outline the load is determined by comparing the results to load fully and the results of all
load patterns (taking into consideration the factor model). The results line includes a collection over the
results coincided with the smallest value and the largest of the synergy certain.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For example, for the section of the design, all sample results will be compared with reference and
sample results are bending moment most will be the result Max M section that design, the results of
Max M of the cross section design that can be identified in other samples.
If the load is not modeled, then all the results envelope will be similar to the benchmark results.
The results envelope for a load combination is determined by comparing all permutations of the load
factor standard and alternate personnel with envelope for each load in the load combination . for each
location and type of boundary, the load factor was chosen as the coefficients generated contour farthest.
In math problem:
The calculated actual program Ram Concept uses not consider the load combination 2n (p +1), but the
results of the calculation of program RAM Concept is similar to the program implemented.
The results envelope to the rules determined by comparing the envelope for all load combination using
the rules. For each location and class boundaries, the selected value is the value coincides with the
boundary farthest.
The resulting envelope of load, load combination or set of rules is the result of the tab Reaction and tab
Strip unless the results are context "Standard". Context Standard for the drawings are sometimes
viewed as "envelope standard", but technically it is not a boundary.
Note: The cover of the program RAM Concept find the important data in the model steadily least and
most complex. However, with six boundaries can ignore this data. If you make sure that the set of
forces is not in the envelope may be important for the design, you can manually create additional load
(not modeling) and / or the load combination supplement (not the load factor interleaved) and / or the
additional rules (using a load combination) to make sure that the combination of forces to be
considered in the design.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Step 1: Each of the rules to make a selection reinforced "Phase 1". For most of the rules,
Here is the entire
design.
Step 2: Each of the rules to make a selection reinforced "Phase 2" needed in addition to the
reinforcement are summarized in step 1b. For most of the rules, nothing happens in this step, but for
some set of rules-such as cutting force design and design flexural, need to know the reinforcement are
summarized in step 1 before design.
Step 3: Each of the rules implemented last test (not wired to be added in this step) and final analysis.
The Ram Concept as reinforced soft material is elastic / plastic perfect for identified
by elastic modulus and elastic stress.
The Ram Concept uses curve stress - strain-stressed steel then based on a "recipe stronger" standard to
be used with many different forms in 25 years:
fp =εp [A + B / {1 + (C εp) D} 1 /
D] ≤FPU
where A, B, C and D are coefficients chosen to fit data curve stress - deformation experiments.
The Ram Concept using the coefficients A, B, C and D based on the analysis of the general stress -
deformation of reinforced prestressed by Develapura and Tadros [Develapura, R. K. and Tadros, M. K.,
"Assessing the importance ACI 318 Eq. (18-3) for the stress of reinforced prestressed in flexure final,"
ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 5, January 9-10 1992, pp. 538-546]. The value of program RAM
Concept is:
A = 0.0311 Ep
B = Ep - A
C = 0958 Ep /
FPY D = 7:36
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
These values have corresponding exactly with the parameters proposed for fiber 270 ksi (1860 MPa)
with FPY 0.9 FPU. For materials reinforced prestressed other, there may be little difference (only a few
percent) in comparison with curve theory in the region between the elastic and strength eventually.
47.1.4 Relationship of deformation stress following bond with concrete to deform section section
The deformation of the cross section cross section can be determined by assuming "the section plane is
always the plane." However, due to the impact of reinforced prestressed and coordination of
construction, deformation stress later in section section is not equal to the strain in the concrete nearby.
εp =εc + (Εpi -
εci)
In that
εp = Deformation of reinforced
prestressed
εc = Strain in concrete near the reinforcement prestressed
εpi = Deformation of reinforced prestressed in time adhesion to concrete
εci = Strain in concrete close to the time adhesion to concrete (typically negative)
The Ram Concept uses processes and following assumptions when calculating the value εpi and εci
for each reinforced prestressed in each cross-section design:
• The "loss" of reinforced prestressed long (self loose, elastic shortening, creep strength and
shrinkage) occur before adhesion to concrete.
• Formwork apply an upward force on the concrete like the weight of the concrete. Only the force
in concrete is the force due to load balancing.
• The deformation of concrete can be determined by the characteristics section materials and
modular concrete "original".
47.1.5 The curve of stress - strain to survive without bond to concrete-general theory
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The treatment effect of deformation section section on stress reinforced prestressed not stick to the
concrete end of program RAM Concept is based on material loosely of Naaman, Burns, French, Gable
and Mattock [Naaman, A. E. et. al, "stresses in unbonded Prestressing tendons at Ultimate:
Recommendation nghiation", ACI Structural Journal, V. 99, No. 4, July-August 2002, pp. 518-529]. In
the document, the author, a member of the Committee stresses in unbonded tendons of the Joint
ASCE-ACI Committee 423, Prestressed Concrete, proposed adjustment code for ACI 318.
Document also provides an equation to evaluate the stress reinforced prestressed in flexural final
section section. The proposed works are shown correlation with the test results better than 2.5 times
compared with the equations ACI 18-4 and 18-5. The equation is:
≤0.80fpu which
prestressed and:
In that
Δεp = Change deformation of concrete near the reinforcement prestressed from the stress of entry to
the
curling final
≤0.80fpu
It can be assumed L by L1 because it is likely that for two beats to simultaneously strain
inelastic large. Simplifying the equation, we have:
In the above equation, (KDP / L2) is the coefficient of concession deformation allows distributed
deformation is localized on the length of reinforced prestressed. The numerator is the length of the
elastic (high distortion), while the denominator is the length on the deformation is distributed.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
47.1.6 The curve of stress - strain to survive without bond to concrete - Implementation of the
program
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The Ram Concept assumes that the stress strain after no adhesion to concrete is not affected by the load
use.
For intensity after the program Ram Concept handle reinforced prestressed not stick to the concrete as
part of reinforced prestressed have stick to concrete:
which
Δεp = Change deformation of concrete near the reinforcement prestressed from the stress effect to
flexural final
For ACI 318-99, flimit is determined by the equations 18-4 and 18-5. When calculating the ρp in the
equation ACI program Ram Concept assumes reinforced prestressed be placed on the more profitable
of the central core prestressed (values stress limit equally be used for the calculation computing
capacity torque positive and negative in each section of the cut).
For AS 3600-2001, flimit defined by section 8.1.6. When calculating befdp in the equation AS,
program Ram Concept assumes reinforced prestressed be placed on the more profitable of the central
core prestressed (values stress limits equally be used for the calculation of capacity torque positive and
negative in each section of the cut).
The reinforced prestressed should be considered as external load for several purposes and the capacity
of for other purposes. Another important thing is the handling of reinforced prestressed match during
calculations.
The Ram Concept considers the reinforced prestressed is the driving force in the calculation of the
intensity. The whole force of reinforced prestressed is power in, while the impact of redundancy created
by the reinforced prestressed be considered as force out. Load balancing is never included in the load
combination is used to calculate the intensity, but loads of redundancy is always included (the external
load) when calculating intensity.
Program Concept always considered prestressed initially in reinforced prestressed as a force outside the
computing operations. The change in the stress of reinforced prestressed (from the stresses effective) -
if any - are seen as the driving force in. For example, if reinforced prestressed with adhesion to the
concrete effects of stress with the effective interest finally 175 ksi (1207 N/mm2), but applied loads
used in the result structure when increased stress of 185 ksi (1276 N/mm2), the Program Concept will
consider changes to the rate of 10 ksi (69 N/mm2) is the power in, while the initial capacity 175 ksi
(1207 N/mm2) assumptions will be considered in the load applied. For this reason, to load balance
should always be included in the load combination is used to calculate operations, payload redundancy
should not be included in performance calculations.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The reinforced prestressed be excluded from section section if they cross section at angles less than 15
degrees (ie, if they are nearly parallel to the cross-section).
47.1.9 The reinforced prestressed - calculate the number of tubes reinforced prestressed
The calculation of the number of tubes reinforced prestressed against the rules about how the bar code
to use:
• integer tubes reinforced prestressed calculated from the range of reinforced prestressed and Aps
/ tubes reinforced prestressed identified
This is true even if the angle of reinforced prestressed to cross-section, the condition is reinforced
prestressed be considered in cross-section (see 47.1.8).
The Ram Concept uses curve stress - plastic deformation of parabolic concrete based on the general
stress - deformation of parabolic of the Portlanh Cement Association [see Note PCA on ACI 318-99
requirements set building code for structural concrete, Figure 6-8]. This curve is used for both the
intensity and analyze cross-sectional use. The curve is determined total by two parameters:
Parameter third deformation in the behavior of concrete changes from parabolic to linear, are:
ε0 = 2 (0.85 f'c) / Ec
for εc <0
(deformation) fc = 0
The Ram Concept consideration of creep and shrinkage in any cross-section by adjusting the curve
deformation stress concrete into:
in which:
σ= Stress in concrete
Curves of stress - strain concrete adjustments are used only in ECR calcs.
Never been used to predict the performance section of the same or section is cracked.
Note: ACI 209 to report the value of 3:35 is the values average. File Ram Concept applications this
value is the default value.
The Ram Concept performance analysis section cracked by repeatedly solving the deformed cross-
section (deformation above and below) leads to the bending moment cross-section and its axial
direction by the torque and power Axial apply.
In the analysis section is cracked, the program concept as concrete no tensile strength. Because
concrete Obviously some tensile strength, assuming the program's concept is considered concrete
previously cracked by the load conditions other. The assumption of program Concept is peaceful.
Assuming cracked before it is used to determine the stress section section cracked and the moment of
inertia is cracked. This assumption does not affect the calculation ECR by formula Branson does not
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
consider moment of inertia cracked unless the stress cross-section beyond modulus destroyed.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
When cross-sections without concrete, the strain tensile analyzed with analysis section cracked,
measures analysis of program Concept resulting analysis section are converted.
The parameters considered in the analysis section cracked the code of the
• For ECR (ratio curvature effect) calcs Only - coefficient of variation as defined in the door
Window Calc Options. This coefficient is the value of (total deformation under stress invariant)
/ (strain initially with stress); typical value is 3:35 (1.0 for the initial deformation and 2:35 for
deformation creep)
• For ECR calcs Only - Deformation due to shrinkage as defined in the window Calc Options.
• The reinforced soft (from the rules) in each section of the cut - this is the value obtained from
the scope of the Design Status of the painted steel, this value is slightly smaller than the value of
the reinforcement details (number of bars and length).
• Curve stress deformation of reinforced prestressed for type rules (see section "The core
prestressed - external load or force in? "). The analysis section is not cracked against the rules
- such as Minimum Design - that which does not have that kind of stress strain curve
prestressed reinforcement attached.
The most common methods for determining the effective moment of inertia of the concrete park is
Branson formula:
Ie = effective moment of
inertia
Ig = moment of inertia of the concrete
ICR = moment of inertia of cracked
concrete
Mcr = cracking moment of the cross
section
Ma = torque applied
Because Branson formula does not consider the axial force can be (especially in the structure after
stress), we proceed to adjust the formula to consider axial forces:
If there is no axial force, the formula is the same formula Branson. If the axial force, this formula is a
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
We call this value (FCR / fa) 4 is the "Branson stress ratio". Its value is always limited to less than or
equal to 1.0.
Note that the usual formula Branson is used to force a 3 instead of 4. Force 3 Proper torque peak rate
used to determine the effective moment of inertia for the entire span. Force 4 to determine the
appropriate moment of inertia of the effective local force local section [Branson, Dan E.,
"Instantaneous deflection over time and reinforced concrete beams of Simple and Continuous" Report
# 7, Part 1, Alabama Caoway Research Department, Bureau of Public Roads, August 1963, pp.1-78].
The Ram Concept calculate "effective rate curve" in each cross section: ECR = Ce / Cg
In that
Ce is calculated by approximate
BSR) CCCS)
In that
kc = creep coefficient of concrete materials (usually 3:35) = total deformation / BSR = elastic
deformation Branson stress ratio (see "Branson stress ratio")
CCCS = sectional curvature may consider cracking, creep and shrinkage (see "Analysis of cracked
section")
Note that if the stresses remain below the cut surface tensile strength of concrete, the rate of
curve will be equal to the effective creep coefficient of
concrete materials (kc).
If after the stress is considered to be in force (not external load) for practical design rules, the
calculation of the cutting is done with the main force behind the force added to the count of its cross
section.
ECR value possible, though unusual, smaller creep coefficient of concrete materials (kc). These cases
happen if heavily reinforced that cracked stiffness (including concrete creep strength) greater than the
total hardness (including creep strength concrete).
The ECR value is determined on the curvature of the cross-sectional area - need to convert them to the
rhythm of the deflection design facilities.
Span deflection corresponding to elastic energy in the rhythm. Just consider the bending energy of the
entire cross-section:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
ECR is considered "softening" of the entire hardware section, this equation would
be:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
From these two equations, we can create the beat for ease of deflection design:
Number of deflection =
Number of deflection =
Note that some people have the ability to moderate the amorphous structure due to the bending
moment in the structure will be rearranged (sections harder to attract more torque) concession Δecr.
Note: The number of deflection will always smaller than the largest value in the
ECR rate.
Note: Drawings deflection L.T. use of this material. See "Using the drawing deflection by the term "on
page 475.
Unless the code is designed to use calculations to determine the width of crack assessment, Ram
Concept program will predict crack widths based on documents Frosch [Frosch, R. J., "Another Look
at Cracking and Crack Control in Reinforced Concrete," ACI Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 3, May-
June, 1999, pp. 437-442].
In cracked concrete, the concrete is assumed to be only a small bending tensile stresses, crack widths can
be calculated as:
wc =εc sc in
which:
wc = width of
crack
εc = Cross-sectional deformation at the crack sc =
projection distance cracked
Cross-sectional deformation (εc) at the crack projection can be calculated easily cracked section
analysis by assuming "the section plane is always the plane."
For no adhesive reinforced with concrete, cracked distance can be expressed as: h ≤sc ≤2 h
in which:
For reinforced "non-slip" with concrete, cracked distance can be expressed as: d * ≤sc
≤2 d *
in which:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For deformed bars do not have the special coating (such as epoxy), Frosch said: sc = 2 d *
leads to the prediction largest crack width reasonable. Ram Concept program using this assumption,
but Hans d * to the maximum value of h (height cracked) only limited value in the control case without
adhesion to the reinforcing steel. The last equation Ram Concept program used to calculate the crack
width can be:
wc = 2 εc d * (D *
≤h)
For bars and the reinforcement layer, the reinforcement can be set so
that:
=
in which:
Ram Concept Program for the treatment consecutive d * (in 1 mm), with reinforced concrete adhesive
with which they have been reviewed to minimize the value of d *. When using the rear power stick with
concrete, each tube containing prestressed reinforcement is considered equivalent rebar. Skip tensioned
after the concrete from sticking and then stressed out. The prestressed reinforcement at less than 45
degree angle to the cross section are also ignored.
Many design codes require cross-sectional area must have a capacity of at least minimal torque
multiplied factor (usually 1.2) compared to the load of the cracked cross section. Cracking load from:
in which:
ML Solutions, we have:
Suppose PL zero: ML =
(FCR + PB / A) S - MB
+ MH)
in which:
Simplified:
Typically (but technically incorrect) 0.2 MH ignored, torque equation final design:
• See "Core Cutting" on page 91 Chapter 21, "Defining The designs range" to interpret the the
core.
o Any horizontal line through the core that will be tested to determine the overall width of
the tube containing the largest prestressed reinforced through cutting range. Width tubes
reinforced with prestressed concrete adhesion with wide tubes and reinforced
prestressed no adhesion to the concrete with different coefficients for each code. For
example, in 8110 BS, considering 2/3 of the width of the tube is prestressed reinforced
with concrete adhesive, and full width of the tube reinforced prestressed no adhesion to
concrete. For ACI, the coefficient is zero, so the width of the tube reinforced prestressed
not included.
• Width equal to the width of the core sheet and the total width of the largest pre-stressed
reinforced tubes Power cut through the scope.
Ram Concept Program may consider twist on the cross sectional area in four different ways, depending
on the characteristics of the design range segment or section design. The four ways are:
• Beams
o Assumptions must be fully twist by changing the shear length L through "core" cross
section.
o Cutting force on a unit length of the v = 6 T / L2
o Shear design is Vd = V + / - 6 T / L
• As flexure
o Considering twist by adding torque to bending moment and flexural design for total
combined Md = M + / - T.
• Wood-Armer
• Not
Force selected this new twist design allows designers to use methods "Wood-Armer" to handle the
torque of the publication.
To have this twisted design options, a new cross-sectional analysis of, Absolute Twist,
were calculated.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Absolute Twist can draw, as shown in Figure 29-5,Chapter 29, "Drawing Results".
When selecting Twisted Wood-Armer design, each group of design capacity is converted into two
groups of design capacity, similar to the original except for the torque group design was changed to:
Md = M + AT, and
Md = M - AT
Wood-Armer Measures (previously developed by Wood and Armer) will be applied at each point on
the; methodology of Concept program is to extrapolate the measures used in the cross-sectional area.
Measures Wood-Armer NOT apply for girders, and not recommended to apply strips beams.
References
48.1 Zhejiang reduce load on the load, the load combination and the rules
Ram Concept Program rebate applied load for each load of each column, puncture test, strip segment
designs and design section. For example, the system can be reduced when the other column for Live
Load (Maybe rebate) compared to the activity load (cumulative).
48.1.1 Load
But Ram Concept Program rebate calculation load for a load (and a component), but the concession
does not affect the analysis of load. The analytical results show that Concept program to load is not
reduced by reducing load extraction methods.
When Ram Concept program combined load on the load combination, the program takes into account
the issue of concession load each load is added to the load combination. The analytical results show
that Concept program for the load combination is always a concession by concession load method.
Similarly the Concept program covering the load combination of the rules, taking into account the
extraction trinhit load reduction due to all the load combination which has been adjusted by the
discount factor reduced. The analytical results show that Concept program for the rule is always a
concession by concession load method.
Note: Keep in mind that the only concession Concept program load on the column, puncture test, the
strip segment designs and design section.
Note: See the "Watch see the results concession load" on page 131 for more information.
When the load on the structure, it is usually assigned to each structural parts a "cross-arm" that the
prop department (alone). The determination is made by analyzing the simple to the naked eye. Fixed
cross-sectional area is not really supported by only one department which it is assigned. The impact of
load synchronous (real) parts similar to the effect that the entire load of the branch section shall apply
to the department. Most designers use code branch section as the main parameter when calculating
load concession.
Ram Concept program calculates the branch section by applying the load to the unit and analyze the
entire flow of the vertical force. The branch section for the following parts from the unit load as
follows:
Walls - (currently no
concession).
The designs range segment - the absolute value of the difference between the longitudinal force
at both ends. When the distribution
forming the rhythm, then the calculation, using the combined segments of branching section.
With the above calculations, the total cross-sectional area of the arm and the column wall as possible
(but not common) exceeds the total cross section of the floor. This occurs when one or more of the
moisture jet.
ASCE-7 and IBC 2003 uses "section affected" instead of branching section when calculating load
concession. Impact cross sections are defined as "more of the floor surface effects to influence other
structural zero".
Ram Concept program using manual methods seek to calculate the effects section. These measures tend
to identify the same section as the section that engineers can see, but these measures are not calculated
cross section is identical to measures that engineers calculate by hand. The affected section of Concept
program can be shown on the plan view should be able to check the details of the program concept
using the rebate calculation load.
According to ASCE-7 and IBC 2003, the Concept section limits the impact larger multiples of the
section following branches:
Check pierced 4
Figure 48-2 to Figure 48-6 section shows the impact of program RAM Concept and the effect section
engineers often use the conditions for a few.
Many engineers can recommend (mistakenly) that branch of the cross section of the column Figure 48-
2 is 600 square feet, but the obvious effect continuously increasing values. From these results suggest
that the fact that section 952 branch square feet.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 48-2 The layout with dimensions in feet from the center line between the column wall. The
engineer will affect that section of 2400 square feet.
Figure 48-3 The affected section of the column and puncture test as calculated by Ram Concept
Program
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 48-5 The affected section segments are designed to strip by Ram Concept Program
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 48-6 The affected section of the column and puncture test for uneven floors.
Concession ASCE-7 load is defined in section 4.8 code. The load on the affected parts with smaller
cross-sectional area affected 400 square feet is not adjusted by reducing load extraction methods.
ASCE-7 requirements that exceed 100 psf live load and the load from the garage will not be a
concession, except for parts of two or more floor support may be reduced to 20% discount on code
sections 4.8.2 and 4.8.3. Two types of loads must be drawn on a load of "Works loads (cumulative)" to
be considered appropriate.
ASCE-7 requires that the load is less than 100 psf in the public sector can not use the rebate under
section 4.8.4. The load must be drawn on a load of "Works loads (not concessions)" to be considered
appropriate.
Sectional area of the branch as a method is not limited by section 4.8.5. However, if the bandwidth
limits designed to span 1.5 times the length, and behave in a way that's written, it will meet the
requirements of this code.
Note: In practice, ASCE-7 define "factor applies" not "rebate factor" (factor rebate = 1 - factor
applied).
IBC 2003 rebate load is defined in the code section 1607.9. The load on the affected parts with smaller
cross-sectional area affected 400 square feet is not adjusted by reducing load extraction methods.
IBC 2003 requirements that exceed 100 psf live load and the load from the garage will not be a
concession, except that the department supports two or more floors can be a concession to 20%
according to the code section 1607.9.1.1 and 1607.9.1.2. Two types of loads must be drawn on load
"Works loads (cumulative)" to be considered appropriate.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
IBC 2003 requires that the load is less than 100 psf in the public sector can not use the rebate under
section 1607.9.1.3. The load must be drawn on load "Works loads (not concessions)" to be considered
appropriate.
Do not allow the load concession to a local copy on the 1607.9.1.4. Ram Concept program never loads
the concession as a means if chosen IBC 2003.
Note: In fact, IBC 2003 determining "factor applies" not "rebate factor" (rebate coefficient = 1 -
factor applied).
UBC 1997 rebate load is defined in code section 1607.5. The load on the affected parts with sections
150 square feet smaller branches are not adjusted by reducing load extraction methods.
Do not consider equation (7-2) [R = 23.1 (1 + D / L)] when calculating load concession. The user
should calculate and report placed the value of the largest concession.
1997 UBC requires that the cumulative load exceeds 100 psf will not be a concession, except that the
load on the column can be reduced to 20% discount. The load must be drawn on the load weight
(cumulative) to be considered appropriate.
1997 UBC requires that the other load exceeds 100 psf or in public places can not use the rebate. The
load must be drawn on Live Load weight (can not concession) to be considered appropriate.
UBC may use 1997 as alternate IBC 2003 by IBC concession load of 09/02/1607. For small loads of
parking in UBC 1997 higher loads smallest parking IBC 2003, the application of the provisions of the
parking concessions load UBC IBC 1997 to 2003 is probably not appropriate. For this reason, the load
garage will be painted on the load weight (cumulative) and would therefore be a maximum of 20%
rebate on the rebate column and load up the other parts.
When using the AS / NZS 1170.1 to make concessions load, load only the category "Works loads
(Maybe rebate)" new concessions. Load load (cumulative) is assumed to have the bigger load of 5 kPa
and therefore can not rebate under 3.4.2 (ii).
For the other parts, a concession was calculated using the formula in 3.4.2 (b).
Note: In fact, the 3.4.2 define "factor applies" not "rebate factor" (factor rebate = 1 - factor applied).
Concession load is defined in BS 6399 code sections 6.1 to 6.3. Only load the
For columns, the values from Table 2 and Table 3 codes and two concessions are larger are used. For
other parts, the value of Table 3 are used.
For the column, the moment and shear values are concession by concession as the coefficient value of
axial force, which is different from what has been identified in the note in section 6.2 BS 6399. This
does not affect any of the programs designed to Ram Concept (or structural system RAM), but it
affects the jet column values are reported.
For the column, just load the category "Works loads (Maybe rebate)" are concessions. For beams, the
load "Works loads (Maybe rebate)" and "Works loads (Cumulative)" are concessions.
For columns, tables in section 3.2.1 is implemented. The 5 kN/m2 specified in section 3.2.1.1 is not
done.
For the column, the moment and shear values are concession by concession coefficient values as axial
force.
For beams, the concession in section 3.2.2 is implemented. The limitations of the "a" to "d" is not done
because the load on the load layer "Works loads (Maybe rebate)" or "Works loads (Cumulative)" can
be assumed rebate .
Concession load is not used for a local copy, the two methods and the puncture test.
In support of the foundation design column (and / or wall) supporting the upper deck, concession
should apply load to the load instead of the power department. The load should be reduced when the
force instead of division for two reasons: 1) have a clear understanding of the branch section for the
load though (rong most cases) there is no clear understanding of branch section for the design range,
and 2) the need to perform repetitive reaction of ground zero tensile load with the rebate.
For the foundation, rebate code load is always reported as "None". If the load can not be reduced when
twice.
The base load is entered from the structural system RAM will be automatically reduced when
appropriate (by RAM Structural System). The user loads due to the rebate drawing by hand.
The column on the branch section will be zero and zero impact section assigned to them in the cross
section calculations automatically. If you want to apply to the concession load on the column, you need
to define sections manually.
When the jet on the top and bottom of the column are reported together, the rebate under the column
load to be used.
Because of this, the reaction should be reported as separate columns and columns will not necessarily
sum to the reported jet upper and lower columns.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
49 The reinforced
Note
This chapter provides information on the Ram Concept Program details using rhythm, calculate the
length of the reinforcement and development of layout and details of how reinforcement.
49.1 Details
rhythm
"Details rhythm" is the process of determining the maximum required reinforcement area (usually
between metric or rhythm) and then reinforced by expanded codes or rules defined by the user .
Details on the code rate of the rules by the current building code regulations. Reinforcement details for
this rhythm may be asymmetric, depending on whether continuous rhythm. Selection rate code details
rules using the current code for the rate constant and finally (as well as the cantilever), if possible.
Details of the program code rhythm Concept generally done a few, but not all, of the detailed rules for
determining code. See detailed rate code for more information (Sections 49.1.3,49.1.4,49.1.5 and 49.1.6
inpage 342).
The detailed rules of rhythm defined by the user is controlled through the following screen by Criteria>
Detailing The TACS.
A, B, and C are the different reinforcement details used to support local rebar. E, F, and G are the
different reinforcement is used to rate the details of the rebar. Each set comes with reinforced
"fraction" of reinforcing steel is fixed to the top of it. Total three fractions always between 0 and 1.
The value of R1, R2 is the coefficient multiplied by the length of span to achieve the desired length of
the bar.
The detailed rules on the use of rhythm is always symmetric in a rhythm (but not in the cantilever).
Value "R1" is applied to the cantilever to cantilever assumed as part of a full rhythm to resist bending
point, is assumed to be 20% of the length of a continuous rhythm (hence application of the Luke 5).
Details rhythms are controlled by rhythm dialog segments. See 21.5,Chapter 21, "Defining The designs
range ".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Two sets of results are included in the Design Concept program - there are no more details rhythm and
beat.
No more simple beats review the results have not extended any more reinforcement for rhythm. Call the
raw reinforced.
There are details to consider rate results, as the reinforcement details as a minimum
requirement.
Much has been edited for profile chart "rate details". Inside the zone does not require development
assistance (the reinforcement has been developed to assist in the system). Also, for the cantilever,
require detailed rhythm section was removed from the final cut to the beat. In addition, the reinforced
profile, at the end of each pass, the reinforcement of development were calculated from assumed
AsRaw and length requirements is to develop and apply the most AsDenho as required in each cross-
sectional area.
• Reinforced peak in each region is determined by taking the largest reinforcement required in
each cross section in the following areas:
• For the cantilever, the whole rhythm is considered to be located in that area, and there is no
rhythm to be considered in the rhythm
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• For systems not supporting rate is determined, the whole rhythm is considered to be located in
the rhythm, and the rhythm does not have to be considered in the support
• The calculations consider gauge length interest rate to help us, or stride rate, depending on the
rules of code (see the code for more specific details: the section 49.1.3,49.1.4,49.1.5 and
49.1.6).
• The bar length is calculated considering the width needed support system (see code for more
specific details)
• In support system, spans the length of the bar close to be considered to keep the bar in the middle
of details can help us. If the rate is close to the other fractions with fractions will be discussed in
detail, the length of the bar for this rate is determined by selecting a fraction longer than the
length of the following:
o beat length and the fraction length of the bar corresponds to the
o beat length and the fraction length of any bar that spans close with fractions Knee
overlap fraction of the bar
Details beats are made in excess 0 before the start of the design stage. The following outlines the
process exceeds 0:
1 The reinforcement determined by the user are canceled from the cross-sectional area of
rhythm.
2 The first pass is usually designed in rhythm (with the reinforcement determined by the user are
canceled).
3 From designs created, reinforced peak in each area (system support and rhythm) are detailed
according to user defined rules or more rate codes.
4 The reinforcement determined by the user's request from step 3, resulting in the required "rate
details" beyond the last 0. Design creates the excess 0 can be approximated if the reinforcement
determined by the user is drawn not have the same characteristics as reinforced by the design program
at that location. Reinforced the final design for each cross-section, which will be determined later in
the over, always accurate.
The detailed design requirements exceed the rate 0 is used as the starting point for the detailed design
spans beyond 2.
49.1.3 The rules detailed rate code ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02 and ACI 318-05
RC beams and in a way the Rule 12.12.3 be done in that area. For this regulation, the inflection
point is assumed to be 30% rate from the system navigation support. ACI 12.11.1 done in the
rhythm.
The way the two RC Figure 13.3.8 (no drop panel) was carried out in the region and help us
beat.
Beams PT, according to a local copies, and the two-way rule 18.9.4.2 is done in that area. Rule
18.9.4.1 is done in the rhythm.
RC beams and PT Rule 8.1.8.6 (a) and (b) is performed in the rhythm generation
and support.
The version in an RC and PT Figure 9.1.3.2 are supported and implemented in the regions
pace.
The two copies in Figure 9.1.3.4 RC and PT are supported and implemented in the areas of
rhythm.
And the RC beams, beams PT and in a way the Figures 3:24 and 3:25 are supported and
implemented in the areas of rhythm.
The way the two PT TR-43 6.10.6 rules are implemented in the region and support the rhythm.
RC beams and PT and in a way the rule 26.2.3.4 is done in that area. For this regulation, the
inflection point is assumed to be 30% rate from the system navigation support. Rules
26.2.3.3 is done in the rhythm.
The two copies in the RC and PT Figure 16 (without drop panel) was carried out in the region
and help us beat.
Note: The term length is used in the development of this program. In many countries, the term is used to
keep the anchor length is more developed.
This section presents an overview of the development length calculation is done in Ram Concept
program.
The calculated length of program development concept can be processed according to the rules of code,
or length can develop user-defined for special rebar as multiples of the diameter bar.
• Distance of not more than twice as loud protection smallest class. It is the responsibility of the
user, not Concept and implementation of program control.
• Each ID code is desired length expansion outside the limits of reinforcement theory.
• Expand the desired length of ACI 318, BS 8110, IS 456 and is the largest length d (effective
depth) or 12 times the diameter of the bar. This is required primarily for demolition drag curve
cross-sections without horizontal shear reinforcement can move the location of the tensile stress
is calculated at the bar near d (effective depth) to the zero moment point . See section 12.10.3
ACI 318, BS 8110 3.12.9.1, and IS 456 26.2.3.1.
• For audio user-defined, the effective development of any point along the bar are the following
chart. Do not apply this method to AS 3600 - see 49.2.2 page page 344 for more details.
o First used by the user to identify close to the edge can not be used to expand the length
desired expansion is zero.
o For any length less than the length of any extension, the development is effectively
zero.
o For any length greater than or equal to the length desired expansion, but the length is
less than fully developed, the percentage of development is effective (provided length)
/ (length play fully developed) x 100%. Then consider the fraction of each bar to be
developed.
o For any length greater than the length of full development, the development is 100%
effective.
Figure 49-3 The development effectively at any point along the bar. (Not applicable to AS3600 - see
Figure 49-4)
• When the bar layout designed by the program, the program will use the concept of choice First
on the list match the following:
o Head straight to the bar length fully developed and fully extended length.
o Head straight to the bar length fully developed and extended length part (or none)
o hook the bar with a length of 180 degrees 180 degrees hook development
• If the bar near the edges than the topcoat is determined, the radio will automatically be labeled
"neoed" Concept of the program and is considered to be fully developed.
• Do not consider the length of audio compression development. Tensile development length used
in
all positions if required reinforcement development regardless of the actual stress on the rebar.
Tensile development length straight base is calculated by Equation 12-1. The following coefficients
used in this equation:
= Coefficient of government
• 1.5 for epoxy-coated bars with protective layer (the middle bar) less than 3dB (distance not
included)
• 1.2 bar for other epoxy
• 1.0 for non-stick coated
c = protection class size, the vertical distance from the middle bar to the nearest concrete surface
(distance not considered)
For the development of standard equipment, tensile development length are essentially the following
equation:
The following factors are used to adjust the length of the base:
According to ACI 318 12.10.3, extended length is used for this code is 12 db or effective depth of the
section, is the largest vertical distance between the rebar from the concrete surface to farthest.
• For audio user-defined, the effective development of any point along theothanh are Figure 49-
4.
o First bars defined by the user closer to the edge so that it can not be expanded will be
used to expand the desired length is zero. In other cases, dimensional expand the
desired length is D, the overall depth of the section
o For any length that is less than desired length D expansion, the development of
effective zero.
o For any length greater than or equal to the extension length, but the length is less than
fully developed, the percentage is the effective development (provided length - the
desired length expansion) / (full grown length) x 100%. Then consider the fraction of
each bar to be developed.
o For programs designed by the bar, the bar is presented in detail, the development
length of the bar is fully extended length plus the desired extension. If the bar can not
extend the full length of this desire, the program will attempt to expand the concept just
straight development length of the bar, then the length of the 90 development
equipment, and machinery development length of 180 degrees . If there is not enough
space to expand to meet any of the conditions, "anchor" will be placed at the end of the
bar and will be treated as if they were fully developed from that point.
Figure 49-4 The development effectively at any point along the bar to the torque chart can not be
moved (for AS3600 ONLY)
Length straight tensile development are fundamental equation 13.1.2.1 (a). The following factors
it is used in this equation: k1 = coefficient
Position Reinforced
o "Concrete under" the depth of the middle bar to the bottom section of concrete
o 1:25 to concrete under> 300 mm o
1.0 for concrete under < 300 mm o
k2 = 2.4 (moderate)
o fsy = elastic stress of the bar
o Ab = cross-sectional range of rebar
o 2a + db = double vertical distance from the concrete surface closest to the middle bar
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• system of government
o 1.5 for epoxy-coated bars with protective layer (the middle bar) less than 3dB (distance
not included)
o 1.2 bar for other epoxy
o 1.0 for non-stick coated
For the development of standard equipment, tensile development length is basically half the length of
the straight tensile developed under Article 13.1.2.4.
According to 8.1.8.1, extended length is used for this code is the overall depth of the section. This
expansion is applied in addition to the length of the development as required. Concept Program length
extended to apply to meet code requirements prescribed displacement boundary bending moment by the
distance D. There are many differences between the methods of Concept program code and regulations:
• In most cases, the bars extend the distance D exceeds the length of the development as required
to meet the purposes of the code.
• Near the top part, where the torque graph will move designed to increase torque, the program
will design Concept to torque chart is not adjusted, but will still ensure it meets the proper
development.
in which:
Note: If using the outside bar type 2 deformed bars or if no such smallest links in Table 3.7, the length
of the development will need to be determined by hand with the aid of Table 3:27.
• system of government
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
o 1.5 for epoxy-coated bars with protective layer (the middle bar) less than 3dB (distance
not included)
o 1.2 bar for other epoxy
o 1.0 for non-stick coated
For the development of machinery, inside bend radius is assumed to be 2 dB for the bar diameter less
than or equal to 18mm and 3.5dB for bars larger than 18mm in diameter.
For the 90-degree hook, the hook anchoring effect of 4 times the radius of curvature of not exceeding
12db in 3.12.8.23 (b)
For the hook 180 degrees, the effect of mechanical anchoring 8 times the radius of curvature of the
parties does not exceed 24dB in 3.12.8.23 (a)
According to 3.12.9.1, extended length is used for this code is 12 db or effective depth of the section, is
believed to be the largest vertical distance between the rebar from the concrete surface to farthest.
in which:
For deformed bars with high intensity, stress can stick them up 60 percent. Assuming rise to any
public bar with fy> 250 N/mm2.
• system of government
o 1.5 for epoxy-coated bars with protective layer (the middle bar) less than 3dB (distance
not included)
o 1.2 bar for other epoxy
o 1.0 for non-stick coated
For the development of machinery, bend radius is assumed to be within 2dB to stick with elastic stress
less than or equal to 250 N/mm2 and 4dB to stick with elastic stresses greater than 250 N/mm2.
For the 90-degree hook, the hook anchoring effect of 8 times the diameter of the bar
26.2.2.1 (1).
For the hook 180 degrees, the effect of mechanical anchor 16 times the diameter of the bar
26.2.2.1 (2).
According to 3.12.9.1, extended length is used for code Nayla 12 db or effective depth of the section, is
believed to be the largest vertical distance between the rebar from the concrete surface to farthest.
Note: This section describes the layout of reinforced vertical programs of Concept program. Do not
consider horizontal reinforcement or SSR.
Program Concept design review of all the rhythm section and all the layout design of reinforced
program. Algorithm Concept layout of the program made the following 5 steps:
Concept sharing program requirements reinforced the rhythm and form similar groups according to the
following characteristics:
• User reinforced - see the direction of the reinforcing steel (always perpendicular to the cross
section section)
The requirements with similar characteristics are grouped together for further
processing.
Step 2 Find the area and the pillows stacked near the required
For each request, the program will search the Concept of the requirements can be met by the same
reinforced callout.
For the requirements of each region and create a program Concept of optimum rebar callouts have to
consider the cost factor is defined in the Options dialog box Calc. The callout this preliminary review
length development.
For each callout Preliminary Concept program will check all cross-sectional area and identify relevant
(to examine the cross section of the reinforcement and development of cross-sectional area of
reinforcement required in each cross section) the need to expand outside the bar cross-sectional area
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
concerned.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
If you can not stick with the extension request (due to the required side or the top layer of sound
protection), examined the scope expanded concession machines use 90-degree or 180-level. If the
hook does not have a fully developed, the "anchors" will be placed at the end of the bar.
Note: Any bar is required to expand within the protected class, the distance of the next version will
have the "anchor".
As this is the final step, the program conducted Concept convert audio callouts (including length and
develop the audio terms) the reinforcement program focus.
See "Reinforcement layout and the detailed parameters" on page 127,Chapter 27, "Calculation results".
49.4 Program Concept detailed user reinforcement and reinforced how the program
Program Concept create reinforcement bars from centralized and distributed by the users, making it
ever sound consideration when calculating a cross-sectional design and rhythm.
Also, the sound created by Concept program enables display rebar or programs used in perspective
drawing.
The bar has been tagged as "users" because they are directly generated from the use of reinforcement.
Concept program also generates sound from reinforced design focus. The radio program is only for
display and not used to calculate.
Reinforced focus and distribution is presented in detail in each bar in 5 steps as follows:
Using the shape of the reinforcing steel (rectangular or parallelogram bars for focus, and polygons for
distribution bars), reinforced the direction and distance / number of bars, Concept determine program
the preliminary layout of the bar parallel position.
For the Focus bar, the first bar and the last bar from the edge always be paired with a half bar spacing.
Each callout reinforced centralized or distributed with a high reference point. For reinforced focused,
high-level reference point is the location where the bar (symbol) and arrows intersect range. For
reinforcement distribution, elevation reference points are shown as circles in the middle of the bar
(symbolic).
Surface elevation and lower arches are determined at the reference point and elevation information,
along with reinforced high reference (absolute, on the surface, the roof, the upper mantle or lower
mantle) and the determine the value of absolute pitch of the sound generated by the callout. View the
picture 49-5 and 49-6.
For each of the high bar, Concept program will determine the shape of the. This shape can be
contiguous or shape of the individual shapes.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Preliminary layout of the bar is in the shape of the tune is defined in step 3. In addition, the coating
upon request (as defined in the Options window Calc) can shorten the bar. This tweaks can transform
into a sound bar, or can be completely removed a stick.
Note that the first bar of "anchor" does not consider the required cover. We just tweaked the shape at
the height of the bar.
Finally, the conversion program Concept preliminary layout of the bar is tweaked into liquidation. The
conversion declare each one is created from sound reinforcement "users" into the "user" and the sound
generated by reinforcement "program" in the "program".
Note: Details of reinforcement using calculations take place before the detailed design and
reinforcement program takes place after the design calculations.
Figure 49-5 The ladder as a means of reinforcing steel with two identical objects unless the
corresponding position of the high points of reference.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 49-6 The program rebar by Concept detailed from Figure 49-5
49.5 Program Concept and the horizontal handle bar reinforced how
Program Concept and create horizontal reinforcement bar from the calculation results of shear and
torsion. Reinforcement was created to display only - not used in the calculations and can not be
changed reinforced "the user".
In the geometric complexity location (such as a multi-span beams in the design, or the curved beams),
Concept program can not be presented properly reinforced as required by the design calculations. Can
always see the exact amount of design drawings Design Selection of design layer status.
Note: spiral reinforcement required 2 feet always be chosen in the design rate. If not, the program's
design concept will be the exact number of overall reinforcement, but will not show the correct
selection of the opening and closing Reinforced belt.
Note: horizontal reinforcement as required by the design section is shown on the reinforcement layer.
This is another reason why the rhythm section designed like the design better.
The introduction of reinforced layers and details that the program reinforced Concept becomes
stronger and more complex.
The following example shows the effect, due to the two beats against the wall, of:
This section shows the results relate only to the intensity rule.
The following figure shows the influence of the detailed code for the reinforced layer design status.
Note: for example, "no detailing" very similar to the results with version 2.1.
Reinforced Layer
The following figure shows the detailed effects of the code on a layer of reinforced rebar.
Note that:
• This program is the sound rational to the sound of the density is consistent with
• the radio program can be changed to bar users
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters affecting rebar layout, Figure 49 - 9 presents the
results reinforced the other with Figure 49-8 when changing a parameter (in this case, the number 3 Bar
Length Cost is not 1). See "Reinforcement layout and cost parameters Details "on page 127,Chapter 27,
"Calculation results".
Reinforced Figure 49-9: The standard reference for the declaration of Bar Length Cost is 3.
For this drawing, detail design spans the range declaration code has no effect.
Figure 49-10 The layer drawing on Design Status: under [no details rhythm]
Note: See the 29.6,Chapter 29, "Drawing Results" for more information about the reinforcement
drawings.
Layer design with the drawing status: Detailed below are the rhythm:
Figure 49-11 The layer drawing on Design Status: Under [have more rhythm]
Note that the details of the rhythm strip design code declaration creates more reinforced.
Layer design with the drawing status: Under (Developed) have more rhythm:
The drawing is identical with "Under no details rhythm" (ie crude steel rod) for this example only uses
rule strength and reinforcement must be developed.
Figure 49-12 Status Design The drawing layer: this (development) have more rhythm
This section presents the results that the smallest code rules and intensity are considered.
Reinforced Layer
The following figure shows the code minimum reinforcement and strength.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note that the smallest design increases sidebar rhythm duo in no case left for detailing. View 49-8.
For this drawing, detail design spans the range declaration code has no effect.
Figure 49-14 Status Design The drawing layer: bottom [No details rhythm]
Layer design with the drawing status: This is the rhythm details:
Figure 49-15 The layer drawing on Design Status: Day [There rhythms Details]
Note that the details of the rhythm strip design code declaration creates more reinforced.
Layer design status with the draw: Day (Developed) no more rate:
The drawing is different from "Under no details rhythm" (ie crude steel rod) as the smallest
reinforcement not required to be developed.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 49-16 The layer drawing on Design Status: Day (Developed) No details rhythm
Layer design with the drawing status: Under (Developed) have more rhythm:
The drawing is different from "Day with details rhythm" (ie crude steel rod) for at least the first
reinforced support
not been developed, and thus rendering the value zero.
In addition, the crude steel rod was developed for detailed process design layer rate for continuous
deemed status, whether they have been developed or not, but at least partially developed.
Figure 49-17 Status Design The drawing layer: this (development) have more rhythm
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
53 Design AS 3600-2001
This chapter presents the detailed implementation of the 3600-2001 program AS RAM Concept.
• Load factor
• Conduct materials
This type of load is temporary load present in the building when the contractor effects of stress
prestressed reinforcement. Since this is a temporary load, so generally only in the load combination
used initially.
If the presence of fixed load when stretched, should determine the layer payload temporary
construction loads (when stretched) and fixed layer load appropriately. Or, may be fixed taking into
account the present load when stressed with the proper use of the load factor.
The program uses the concept of load factor to determine the appropriate load combinations. In the case
of short-term, the coefficient ψWorks with 1.0 for download (no rebate can be) and Live Load
(Cumulative) and 0.7 for another load. For the case of long-term combined ratio ψWorks with 0.6 for
download (no rebate can be) and Live Load (Cumulative), Works 0.4 for download (concession can
be), and 0.0 for Live Load (Tran).
Note: Many load combination in the file (friends) is a Lateral Group and analyzed using "zero
tension". Because load combination analysis using "Accept zero drag" Alternate Envelope Factors
NOT use, so load combination in the file is expanded into multi-load combination. See Chapter 11,
"Defining load combination" for more information.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
This load combination synthesize all the static load, the load factor of 1.0, while activity in standard
conditions of use. This load combination information is for reference only - not programs use RAM
Concept to design.
Load combination is expected to examine the requirements for pre-stressed effects. The load factor
used are:
Load balancing: 1:15 (std & alt) (including an increase of 15% for the long-term loss, which usually
does not happen at this stage)
Note: Although born shrinkage of concrete short-term loss, but the program RAM Concept of loss due
to shrinkage of concrete is considered as a part of the overall long-term losses.
Temporary construction loads (when stretched): 0.8 (std) & 1:15 (alt)
53.2.3 LC used: D + ψL
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use. The load factor is used:
Load (concessions may be): 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Work load
(no rebate can be): 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt) Work load
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use. The load factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited intensity. The load factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited intensity. The load factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the long-term deflection without regard to the issue of cracks.
The load factor is:
Load balancing: 3:35 (std & alt) [1.0 + 2.35 initial creep] Static load:
Load (concessions may be): 1.64 (std & alt) [0.4 (3.35) + (0.7-0.4)] Live Load
(concession can not be): 2:41 (std & alt) [0.6 (3:35) + (1.0-0.6)] Work load
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use to the wind and the applied load. The
load factor is used:
Load (concessions may be): 0.4 (std & alt) Work load
(no rebate can be): 0.6 (std & alt) Work load
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use to the wind load applied. The load
factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use with seismic activity and applied load.
The load factor is used:
Load (concessions may be): 0.4 (std & alt) Work load
(no rebate can be): 0.6 (std & alt) Work load
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use to the seismic load applied. Currently
the program only creates the foundation / basement friends. The load factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the status of the wind strength limit and the load applied. The
load factor is used:
alt)
Load (concessions may be): 0.4 (std & alt) Work load
(no rebate can be): 0.6 (std & alt) Work load
Load combination is expected to check the strength limit state for wind load applied. The load factor is
used:
alt)
Load combination is expected to limit state check with seismic intensity and the applied load. The load
factor is used:
alt)
Load (concessions may be): 0.4 (std & alt) Work load
(no rebate can be): 0.6 (std & alt) Work load
Load combination is expected to check the strength limit state with seismic loads applied. The load
factor is used:
alt)
• the load on layer assembly Live Load (concession can not be)
• the load cap is used for the active layer of the floor on Live Load (concessions may be) or
download Active Layer (concession can not be)
Note: However, if the paint layer payload parking on Live Load (Cumulative), RAM Concept
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
application program load factor (peacefully) in the LC 1.0 user, load factor (mild) 0.6 in load
combination due to wind and seismic (both used and finally), and load factor (mild) 2:41 in LC LT
hammock is not cracked.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: However, if the load assembly drawing layer on Live Load (concession can not be), RAM
Concept program application of the load deflection 2:41 in LC LT is not cracked.
53.4.1 Concrete
Conduct
Determination of elastic modulus of concrete in the window material. You can use code 6.1.2
equation, an equation from another code, or a theoretical value.
When specifying the value directly, need to have two elastic modulus
If you select the 6.1.2 code AS 3600-2001, the following values are used:
In that
For the calculation based on the total cross section, assuming concrete is a linear elastic material
perfectly without stretching the limits or distortions.
To analyze the cross section details the general stress - strain is presented in "The curve of stress -
deformation of concrete," on page 324,Chapter 47, "The designers note section ".
The intensity curve stress - strain was shortened at 0.003 strain. The stress curve - no other deformation
strain limit.
The material is presented in section "The stress curve - not the deformed reinforcement strain "on page
321,Chapter 47, "The cross-sectional design note".
The material is presented in section "The curve of stress - strain deformation following material" on
page 321, And "The relationship of stress after deformation with adhesion to concrete for the
deformed cross section "on page 322,Chapter 47, "The cross-sectional design note".
For conditions of use, RAM Concept program assumes that stress is not prestressed reinforced with
concrete adhesive is not affected by the cross section deformation.
For calculating the final torque resistance, common mode for curve stress - deformation of reinforced
prestressed concrete does not stick to the program RAM Concept is presented in detail in "The curve
of stress - stress after deformation from sticking Concrete - How to program "on page 323 Chapter 47,
"The cross-sectional design note".
For AS 3600-2001, the maximum deformation of prestressed reinforced with concrete does not stick,
fgioi term is defined in section 8.1.6. In calculating befdp, RAM Concept program assumes the
prestressed reinforcement is placed in the central cross section is more beneficial (limit values similar
deformation is used to calculate the negative torque capacity and positive at each cross section).
• Structural system (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered
(beams, according to the method, the two methods).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• Sort reinforcement based on choice "position reinforced minimal amount" for distribution
section or sections designed range of design:
o The Advanced - Reinforced support system above and below near near mid-span.
o The nails - close reinforcement system below and above support near the center span.
System design RC PT
Beams 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
The method according 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
to a
The two methods 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
RAM Concept program allows us to identify the function of reinforcement rate minimum rate for each
period.
Specified minimum amount of reinforcement users of Concept program uses this value to design
reinforced at each cross section. These values can not be calculated in reinforcement of other rules.
For example, rebar bending strength were reported in the intensity rules out no reinforcement in
reinforced Regulations minimal amount of users.
The calculated minimum amount of reinforcement users of Concept program based on the total cross
section (after refining) and the rate determined by the user. For example:
The
requiremen
ts
Specified minimum amount of reinforcement will not be designed to use ferro unless the rule is used
at least in the load combination.
The ex files
The Pre-Concept 2.0 files required to rebuild and load combination rules to supplement the regulations
reinforced the minimum levels of users. See "Rebuilding consortium download important "on page
35,Chapter 11, "Defining load combination" for more information.
• The prestressed reinforcement are considered external loads (load balancing and is assumed is
included in the load factor).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• The deformation of the structure is determined by the torque envelope for the rules (Can be
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
System design RC PT
Beams (Not 8.1.4.2
available)
The method according (Not 8.1.4.2
to a available)
The two methods (Not 8.1.4.2
available)
• .
53.5.4 Use
• The prestressed reinforcement are considered external loads (load balancing and is assumed is
included in the load factor).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• The deformation of the structure is determined by the torque envelope for the rules (Can be
reinforced on both sides).
System design RC PT
Beams 8.6.1 (parts) 8.6.2
The method according 9.4.1 (parts) 9.4.2
to a
The two methods 9.4.1 (parts) 9.4.2
• .
• The prestressed reinforcement are considered external loads (load balancing and is assumed is
included in the load factor).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• The deformation of the structure is determined by the torque envelope for the rules (Can be
reinforced on both sides).
System design RC PT
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• The prestressed reinforcement is considered in its side profile (and super static load is assumed
to be in the load factor).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• The deformation of the structure is determined by the torque envelope for the rules (failure can
occur on both sides).
System design RC PT
Beams 8.1, 8.2, 8.3 * 8.1, 8.2, 8.3 *
The method according 8.1, 8.2, 8.3 * 8.1, 8.2, 8.3 *
to a
The two methods 8.1, 8.2, 8.3 * 8.1, 8.2, 8.3 *
Note: * - 8.3 only applies if you choose "beams" twist (see the note design twist)
53.5.7 Viscosity
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• Reinforced vertically from the other designs (other than ductility) is considered to be in place
before further reinforced plastic.
• Symbol (or symbols) bending moment is determined by the boundary layer momentum against
the rules (there may be flexibility for both positive and negative torque).
System design RC PT
Beams 8.1.3 8.1.3
The method according 8.1.3 8.1.3
to a
The two methods 8.1.3 8.1.3
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Fcm value in the calculation were taken from Table C6.1.2. Linear interpolation is used
between the values in the table. The table values are interpolated out peacefully (if f'c <20 MPa,
fcm
= 1.2 f'c, if f'c> 50 MPa, fcm = f'c + 6.5
MPa).
53.6.3 The curve of stress - strain deformation after the concrete from sticking
• The curve of stress - strain deformation following adhesion to concrete is used, but modified as
detailed below.
• For the analysis of the level of use (elastic), reinforced stress prestressed concrete from
sticking is assumed to be independent of the cross-sectional deformation.
• Prestressed stress is limited by equation (a) or (b) if code section 8.1.6 can.
Note: The program does not consider the 19.3.5 shows that the prestressed reinforcement without
adhesion to concrete will only be used according to label; engineers need to consider before you start
designing.
• Design compatible strain used. See "General Design Method" in page 321 to know more about
the design compatibility of deformation RAM Concept program.
• See "The curve of stress - deformation of concrete," on page 324 and for the
curve stress - deformation of reinforced prestressed, reinforced concrete and soft.
• For many sections f'c value, of each concrete f'c used appropriately.
• Design Concept of the RAM program may exceed the maximum amount allowed
reinforcement, and so can create a section with too much reinforcement. See "Viscosity" to
apply the ductility requirements.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• If sections or panels that are not declared as follows stress, then skip the pre-stressed
reinforced its force after
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• The axial force (loads) on the cut surface or give consideration based on the qu section of the
report design or design segment band under consideration. If you choose the axial force is
included, the cross section is designed to provide torque required axial force at the same time
given.
• At the beam "T", "L" and "Z", beams and side beams themselves may have significant tension
and compression (at different altitudes) required to balance the torque. If the cross section over
the entire beam, then these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment).
However, if the cross section is only one direction through the expanded beam is off, then the cut
could have a significant axial force required to balance the torque, the design for axial load (by
select the design features section or segment of the appropriate design range) necessary to ensure
safe design.
• For cross sections with very little torque, reinforced by the content of the program can
calculate RAM Concept beyond overkill. That is because the program RAM Concept will not
allow the cross section deformation is greater than 20%, the level required to create a smaller
compression zone. Reinforced that the program needed to select RAM Concept axial force
balance in cross section.
• Deviation of the tension in the system following the support (and other structural areas) cause
tensile indeterminate (s) in the cross section, as appropriate.
• RAM Concept Program does not consider that section 19.3.5 presents the application of
reinforcement no adhesion force with concrete will be used only as labeled, the engineer should
consider before starting the design.
• Do not make the 8.1.8 (Details of curved reinforced and prestressed reinforcement).
• The cross section of the sixth rhythm support from us or sixth beat of the rhythm between being
considered "at critical sections ".
• Assumptions on crack (negative torque) or below (positive torque) based on the "Model
Minimum reinforcement content" is selected in the range of fractional sectional design or
designs.
• See "" Torque cracking "is used in the design calculations" on page 329 for more detailed
theory of "cracking load".
• The cross-section analysis is cracked. This analysis is somewhat more moderate total cross
section calculations in the proposed code.
• If the rate limit is exceeded, then further reinforced as required in order to limit the
performance concrete, depending on the bending moments and axial forces, additional
compression reinforcement, reinforcement tensile steel, or both.
• For more sectional concrete strength, cross-sectional stress limit is reported minimal stress
limit (absolute value) of all of the concrete section.
• See "General Design Method" on page 321 for more general information about the calculated
cross section.
• Limit depth of neutral axis (ku) in section 0.4 8.1.3. Reinforcement is added to minimize the
depth of the neutral axis.
• If the protective layer of reinforcing steel bar is the bar outside the pressurized area 0.4 d, the
solution is not effective.
• In certain cases, can not simultaneously provide positive torque viscosity and viscosity negative
torque. This usually happens if there is a prestressed reinforcement after large near the center of
the cross section.
• See "Identify" core "Concrete" on page 330 to calculate the plate width (bw).
• Half the width of the tubes reinforced with prestressed concrete and adhesion to all the width of
the tube containing prestressed reinforcement without adhesion to concrete in the core subject
cutting width to determine the width bw bv. In which the tube at different altitudes in the core,
with the use of highly efficient large tubes to determine maximum bv.
• If the section is declared as "stress after", d0 is the maximum depth of the tensile
reinforcement or 0.8D. No test conducted to confirm that the structure is indeed following
stress.
• If the section is not stressed then, d0 is the maximum depth of the tensile reinforcement.
• Ast is the cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement (except PT) in the tensile zone for
its cross section is considered.
• Vertical structures of prestressed reinforced front tilt, ignoring Pv, (reported as zero).
• Cutting forces are bent area 8.2.7.2 (a) (for the non-prestressed structures, Apt
and V0 is zero).
• V0 is calculated as M0 / (M * / V *) for determining the structure and amorphous.
• β3 is 1.0.
• Apt is the sum of the following forces (adhesion to concrete with and without adhesion to
concrete) in the tensile zone. The vector components of the scope of prestressed reinforcement is
used for the non-prestressed reinforcement perpendicular to the cutting surface design.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Shear scope are 8.2.7.2 (b) (for both pre-stressed structures and the stress). Perform calculations
of the structures at the center, but the width of the plate to (bv) are used to determine the shear
stress at the center. Equilibrium analysis of pre-stressed force and the the total cross-sectional
characteristics are used to determine the axial stress at the center.
• No consideration for increased capacity or payload section near the support system.
• If you choose the "twisted beams," designed and conducted twist (see "Section 8.3 Design for
torsion beams "). The maximum shear rate is reduced under section 8.3.3. If torsion
reinforcement requirements, the use of Section 8.3.4 (b) to reduce the shear capacity is.
• No spiral reinforcement provided if they meet the requirements 8.3.4 (a) (i) [T * <0:25 φTuc].
Ignore requirements 8.3.4 (a) (ii) and (iii).
• Assuming twisted take the word "core". See "Identify" core "Concrete" on page 330 for
calculating core.
• In many near the core, the calculation based on the average near (and then multiplied by the
coefficient with the tendon).
• At the Once and ut, the coating surface to the center of the vertical bar is assumed to be the
maximum upper mantle and the mantle beneath the center of the vertical bar of the
corresponding vertical bars, respectively.
• No report output torque; instead shear capacity is reduced so that it fits, etc.
be used to provide the required torque capacity.
• When cutting forces operate simultaneously with torque, part 8.3.4 (b) to be considered when
designing a closed transverse reinforcement belt.
• Closed horizontal reinforced belt (ASW) is provided to reduce T * and Tu, max. If T * is
greater than Tu, max, the section will be reported as non-response sections 8.2 and 8.3. The
minimum requirement 8.3.7 (a) are met.
• Provides longitudinal reinforcement based ASW values calculated for T * and Tu, lower max.
• Distance reinforced belt is closed down by a factor of 0.8 in 8.2.12.4 (c), whether section
purely cross twisted (no shear stress).
"The critical tension" is considered the cross sectional area of stress is equal to or more sections 3 MPa
to force cross-section is considered (slightly different - and less benign - more code M * S.1).
Compressive (or tensile) axial considered in the calculation of this stress.
Cross-sectional area is considered "tensile structures" if both sides are based on the total tensile stress
on the power section cross section will be considered. (Code code using "fundamental tension".).
Reinforced only fully designed on structures with high tensile stress (stress on the total cross section).
In some cases, tensile structures, can further reinforced in the "compression" to meet the balance, but
reinforced the "compression" that will not define the scale to meet section (i) and ( ii).
Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components perpendicular
cross-section is considered.
Part (i) - For design work, use this section if the cross-section tensile structures or critical tensile zone.
For maximum design activities, this section is used only for the critical tensile zone. Never use this
part of environmental protection.
• Using 0.8 ks values for tensile structures, otherwise ks value 0.6 is used.
• fs is determined from Table 8.6.1 (A). Maximum diameter of the steel rod fixed to the surface
tension is used in table 8.6.1 (A).
Part (ii) - Always use this part of the design, but do not use the maximum design activities.
• Reinforcement is added to limit the maximum distance is 300 mm. The bar on the right side
(including the small components for the bar at the corner of the cross section) is considering the
distance requirements, including small bars than half the diameter of the largest bar in the cut.
Can not use the original sound and distance.
Part (iii) - Use this section if the cross-section tensile structures and environment
protected.
o Reinforcement is added to both sides to maintain the reinforcement stress the limits of
Table 8.6.1 (A).
o Maximum diameter of the steel rod fixed to a particular surface used in table 8.6.1 (A).
o Reinforcement is added to both sides to maintain the reinforcement stress fsy less than
0.8.
Part (iv) - Use this section if the cross section is not tensile structures and unprotected environment.
Monday Use code option (code beginning with "Alternately, ...").
o Reinforcement is added to both sides to maintain the reinforcement stress the limits of
Table 8.6.1 (B).
o The distance is calculated in the audio bar on the right side (including the components
small bar in the corner to the cross sectional area), including more than half of small
bars largest diameter of the cross bar. You can use the few bars and some distance.
o Reinforcement is added to both sides to maintain the reinforcement stress fsy less than
0.8.
• If the tensile stress in the concrete shall not exceed reinforcement does not need to
control the cracks and do not apply to the following.
• Reinforcement is added to maintain the stress changes on the tensile mild steel up to 200 MPa
for torque changes from compression to the user.
o In rare cases (in which stress is to use compression reinforcement, although concrete
stress exceeds ) This condition is ignored by additional reinforcement will
reduce compression (pull up), so I can not meet the conditions by increasing
reinforcement.
o Reinforcement stress force is the total cross-section traction, while stress reinforcement
is calculated by using traction cracked section.
o For this requirement, each tube containing prestressed reinforced with concrete
adhesion to the tensile zone (based on the total cross-sectional stress) is considered
equivalent to mild steel bar (though far from the tensile). In calculating distance, the
tube containing prestressed reinforcement is assumed to be placed in the optimum
position to reduce minority mild steel bar requirements - ignoring the pipe layout
o Can identify the few bars and some distance to meet spacing requirements.
• Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components
perpendicular cross-section is considered.
• Use 8.1 to calculate the magnitude of the bend. The request was reinforced by reports 8.1. See
"bending beam intensity of 8.1" above for detailed how to implement 8.1.
"The critical tension" is considered the cross sectional area of stress is equal to or more sections 3 MPa
to force cross-section is considered. Compressive (or tensile) axial considered in the calculation of this
stress.
Reinforced only fully designed on structures with high tensile stress (stress on the total cross section).
In some cases, tensile structures, can further reinforced in the "compression" to meet the balance, but
reinforced the "compression" that will not define the scale to meet section (ii) and ( iii).
Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components perpendicular
cross-section is considered.
Part (i) of this section-not done here. 9.1.1 Implementation of the designed minimum levels through
the reinforcement of 8.1.4.1.
Part (ii) - In the design activity and design activity maximum, use this section if the cross section in
the tensile zone is not critical and the environment are protected.
• ks = 0.6
• fs is determined from Table 9.4.1 (A). Maximum diameter of the steel rod fixed to the surface
tension is used in table 9.4.1 (A).
Part (iii) - Always use this part works as designed, but are not designed to use when working
maximum
mobility.
• Reinforcement is added to limit the maximum distance up to 300 mm or twice the depth of
cross section. The bar on the right side (including the small components for the bar at the corner
of the cross section) is considered the distance requirements, including small bars than half the
diameter of the largest bar in the cut. Few bars and the distance can be used.
Part (iv) - This section is used for design work, but not used in the protected environment. Monday
Use code (code beginning with "Alternately, ...").
• Reinforcement is added to both sides to maintain the reinforcement stress the limits of Table
9.4.1 (B).
• The distance is calculated in the audio bar on the right side (including the small components
the bar at the corner to cross-sectional area), including the bar diameter less than half of largest
cross bar. Few bars and the distance can be used.
Section (v) - This section is used for maximum design used, but not used in the protected environment.
• Reinforcement is added to both sides to maintain the reinforcement stress fsy less than 0.8.
• If the tensile stress in the concrete shall not exceed reinforcement does not need to
control the cracks and do not apply to the following.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Part (a) the limit is ignored because there is no guidance on the amount of reinforcement
needed how much. Part (b) is always used instead.
• Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components
perpendicular cross-section is considered.
• Reinforcement is added to maintain the stress changes on the tensile mild steel in the range 150
MPa for torque changes from compression to the user. In rare cases (in which stress is to use
compression reinforcement, although concrete stress exceeds ) This condition is
ignored.
• Applying this condition as part of the design of reinforced minimum levels because no depends
on the intensity of the cross-cut force.
• Applying this condition for both the beam and, although not AS 3600 requirements apply to
beams.
• Crack is assumed above (negative torque) or below (positive torque) based on the "model
reinforced minimal amount" is selected in the range of fractional sectional design or designs.
• Reinforcement can be applied to both sides if the cross section depends on the negative torque
and select the location and positive reinforcement, "The Tension".
• Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components
perpendicular cross-section is considered.
• The amount of reinforcement is provided in 0.75 (according to 9.4.3.2 (b)) times the amount is
determined by 9.4.3.4 (a) (i), 9.4.3.4 (b) (i), or 9.4.3.4 (c ).
• For the environment "normal" amount of reinforcement is provided: As = (0.75) (3.5 - 2.5
σcp) (Ag) / 1000
• For the environment "destroyed" or "are destroyed", the amount of reinforcement is provided:
As = (0.75) (6.0 - 2.5 σcp) (Ag) / 1000
• For the range of designs and PT are not sectional design, σcp is zero.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
• Load factor
To completed the required review of Load "disadvantage" and "Beneficial" code requirements in
section 2.4.3.1, RAM Concept Program using the form factor of the load. For static load, RAM Concept
program using the form factor of 1.0 and 1.0/1.4, or 0.71. For load, RAM Concept program using the
form factor of 1.0 and 0. See "Load Model" on page 32 to more information.
This type of load is temporary load present in the building when the contractor effects of stress
prestressed reinforcement. Since this is a temporary load, generally only in the load combination used
initially.
If fixed load when stress is present, to determine the layer payload temporary construction loads (the
stress) as well as the fixed layer load appropriately. Or, maybe the load fixed to the presence of stress
with the use of the appropriate load factor.
Note: Many load combination in the file (friends) is a Lateral Group and the analysis of "zero
tension". Because load combination analysis using "Accept zero drag" is not used
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Alternate Envelope Factors used, the load combination of files has been extended to the load
combination. See Chapter 11, "Defining load combination" for more information.
This load combination synthesize all the static load, the load factor of 1.0, while activity in standard
conditions of use. This load combination information is for reference only - not programs use RAM
Concept to design.
Load combination is expected to examine the requirements for pre-stressed effects. The load factor
be is used:
Load balancing: 1:15 (std & alt) (including an increase of 15% for the long-term loss, which usually
does not happen at this stage)
Note: Although born shrinkage of concrete short-term loss in program RAM Concept of loss due to
shrinkage of concrete is considered as a part of the overall long-term losses.
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use. The load factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited intensity. The load factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the long-term deflection without regard to the issue of cracks.
The load factor is:
Load balancing: 3:35 (std & alt) [1.0 + 2.35 initial creep] Static
Load (concessions may be): 1:59 (std & alt) [0.25 (3.35) + 0.75 (1.0)] Live
Load (concession can not be): 1:59 (std & alt) [0:25 (3:35) + 0.75 (1.0)] Work
load (cumulative): 2.76 (std & alt) [0.75 (3.35) + 0.25 (1.0)]
Load (Tran): 1:59 (std & alt) [0.25 (3.35) + 0.75 (1.0)]
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use to the wind and the applied load.
Currently the program only creates the foundation / basement friends. The load factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the status of limited use to the wind load applied. Currently the
program only creates the foundation / basement friends. The load factor is used:
54.2.8 LC by wind finally: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2W (due to wind load used)
Load combination is expected to check the status of the wind strength limit and the load applied. The
load factor is used:
Load combination is expected to check the strength limit state for wind load applied. The load factor is
used:
alt)
Load combination is expected to check the strength limit state for wind load applied. The load factor is
used:
alt)
54.2.11 LC by
accident
Load combination is expected to complete the requirements of the code section 2.4.3.2 and TR 43
6.10.4. The load factor is used: Static load:
• the load on layer assembly Live Load (concession can not be)
Note: However, if the paint layer payload parking on Live Load (Cumulative), RAM Concept
application program load factor (peacefully) in the LC hammock 2.76 LT is not cracked.
54.4.1 Concrete
Conduct
Elastic modulus of concrete is determined by the user in the window material. Users can use the code
BS8110 Figure 2.1, the equation from the other code, or a theoretical value.
When the value is determined directly, two elastic modulus values have been identified:
In that
days
To cross-section analysis in detail, using four strain curves - different deformation. The four curves of
stress - strain curve is linear parabolic shape as shown in detail. The transition from deformed parabolic
curve to curve is linear 2fc/Ec, including peak stress fc and Ec is the elastic modulus at zero strain.
For w i t h t h e i n i t i a l c o n d i t i o n s o f s t r e s s , t h e p e a k s t r e s s i n t h e s t r e s s c u r v e - i s
0.67fcui deformation.
For w i t h t h e s t r e s s c o n d i t i o n s u s e d , t h e p e a k s t r e s s i n t h e s t r e s s - s t r a i n
curve is 0.67fcu.
For with the conditions of intensity, peak stress-strain curve is deformed 0.67fcu / 1.5
For w i t h t h e i n t e n s i t y o f a c c i d e n t c o n d i t i o n s ( d a m a g e i s l o c a l i z e d ) , t h e p e a k
stress in the stress -strain curve is 0.67fcu / 1.3.
The stress intensity curves - shortened deformation strain at 0.0035. The stress curve - no other
deformation strain limit.
For to calculate the ECR, the maximum tensile stress in the concrete is assumed
.
In the crack width calculation designed and used for stress analysis using design cracked, general stress
- strain reinforced concrete tensile be used:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Using similar curves, but technically it is not similar to the provisions BS 8110-2:1985 Figure 3.1.
Comparative chart for stress regulation and code implementation of Concept program is presented as
follows:
Figure 3.1
regulations
Due to the design crack width of Concept program perform stress analysis is cracked (the curve stress
- strain non-reinforced concrete tensile) for 0.8 fy regulations, the concrete results of stress rebar and
concrete structural components that implement the design will crack width corresponding to the range
between the resulting curve stress - strain reinforced concrete tensile and non-tensile. The results stress
the concrete and rebar for the other components will correspond to curves using stress - strain
reinforced concrete tensile.
Tensile steel reinforcement is modeled as elastic materials / flexible perfect, as shown in Figure 2.2
code. Elastic modulus defined by the user in the window instead of material-defined code 200 000
N/mm2.
Prestressed reinforced model was created using the power formula. The curve is defined by four
parameters:
material)
Four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for capacity formula, as described in
Chapter 47, "The cross-sectional design note". Three parameters are:
For with the conditions of use, RAM Concept program assumes that stress is not
prestressed reinforced with concrete adhesive is not affected by the cross section
deformation.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For with the intensity conditions "accident", RAM Concept program assumes that the
prestressed reinforcement without adhesion to concrete without stress.
For t o c a l c u l a t e t h e u l t i m a t e m o m e n t r e s i s t a n c e , c o m m o n m o d e o f
program RAM Concept for general stress - deformation of reinforced
prestressed concrete from sticking
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
tones are presented in detail in Chapter 47, "The cross-sectional design note". For BS 8110-1997, the
maximum deformation of prestressed reinforced with concrete does not stick (FPB, called flimit in
Chapter 47, "The cross-sectional design note") Is defined by equations 52 and 0.7fpu.
When Equation 52 is used in many cross-section prestressed reinforcement, the following terms are
used to calculate:
FPU FPU Aps = sum of the prestressed reinforcement is the vector with components of
Aps.
FCU three bd = compressive strength of concrete squares is multiplied by the width and depth of
compression to the center of the scope of prestressed reinforced component vector
For with BS 8110: 1997, the value is used as the distortion coefficients concession for
prestressed reinforcement without adhesion to concrete is: k = 5d / L
In that
Equivalent to assuming neutral axis depth d and 0.5 "inelastic region" ten times this length [see BS
8110 code code with equations 52].
In equation 52, RAM Concept program to determine "d" and "b". RAM Concept program assumes that
each prestressed reinforced the emphasis placed on the cross-section is more beneficial (limit values
similar deformation is used to calculate the positive and negative moment capacity at each cross
section). This assumption does not affect the ultimate capacity of prestressed reinforced because the
prestressed reinforcement is located in the "wrong" side cross section of heart, stresses in prestressed
reinforced smaller FPB, by small tensile strain (strain can be compressive) in the cross section at high
prestressed reinforcement.
Length prestressed reinforced "l" in equation 52 is not adjusted (moderate) to the elastic constant
regions.
• Structural system (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered
(beams, according to the method, the two methods).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• Sort reinforcement based on choice "position reinforced minimal amount" for distribution
the strip design or design section:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
o The Advanced - Reinforced support system above and below near near mid-span.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
o The nails - close reinforcement system below and above support near the center span.
• .
RAM Concept program allows us to identify the function of reinforcement rate minimum rate for each
period.
Specified minimum amount of reinforcement users of Concept program uses this value to design
reinforced at each cross section. These values can not be calculated in reinforcement of other rules.
For example, rebar bending strength were reported in the intensity rules out no reinforcement in
reinforced Regulations minimal amount of users.
The calculated minimum amount of reinforcement users of Concept program based on the total cross
section (after refining) and the rate determined by the user. For example:
The
requiremen
ts
Specified minimum amount of reinforcement will not be designed to use ferro unless the rules are used
by at least the load combination.
The ex files
The Pre-Concept 2.0 files required to rebuild and load combination rules to supplement the regulations
reinforced the minimum levels of users. See "Rebuilding consortium download important "on page
35,Chapter 11, "Defining load combination" to more information.
• The prestressed reinforcement are considered external loads (load balancing and is assumed is
included in the load factor).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• The deformation of the structure is determined by the torque envelope for the rules (Can be
reinforced on both sides).
System design RC PT
4.3.5.1
Beams (Not
4.3.5.2
available)
4.3.5.1
The method according (Not
4.3.5.2
to a available)
4.3.5.1
The two methods (Not
4.3.5.2
available)
• .
54.5.4 Use
• The prestressed reinforcement are considered external loads (load balancing and is assumed is
included in the load factor).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• The deformation of the structure is determined by the torque envelope for the rules (Can be
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
It destroyed: Type 1
System design RC PT
3.12.11.2.1
Beams 3.12.11.2.1 4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
3.12.11.2.1
The method according 3.12.11.2.1 4.3.4.2
to a 4.3.4.3 / TR 43
4.3.4.2
The two methods 3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
54.5.5 Intensity
• The prestressed reinforcement is considered in its side profile (and super static load is assumed
to be in the load factor).
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• The deformation of the structure is determined by the torque envelope for the rules (failure can
occur on both sides).
• See "The problem twists" on page 330 to learn how to make twisted.
System design RC PT
3.4.4 4.3.7
Beams 3.4.5 4.3.8
3.4.5.13 * 4.3.9 *
3.4.4 4.3.7
The method according 3.4.5 4.4.1 / 4.3.8
to a 3.4.5.13 * 4.3.9 *
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
3.4.4 4.3.7
The two methods 3.4.5 4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13 * 4.3.9 *
Note: * - 3.4.5.13 and 4.3.9 apply only if you select "beams" twist (see the note design twist)
54.5.6 Viscosity
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• Reinforced vertically from the other designs (other than ductility) is considered to be in place
before further reinforced plastic.
• Symbol (or symbols) bending moment is determined by the boundary layer momentum against
the rules (there may be flexibility for both positive and negative torque).
System design RC PT
Beams 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
The method according 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
to a
The two methods 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
54.5.7 Accidents
• The prestressed reinforcement after no adhesion to concrete is assumed to have zero stress.
• Type of reinforcement (as defined in section design or designs range segment) is considered is
(PT or RC).
• The deformation of the structure is determined by the torque envelope for the rules (failure can
occur on both sides).
• Using the coefficients be concession in the intensity calculations. For the curved
concrete, = 1.3 and for reinforcement, = 1.0. Note that to calculate the shear
reinforcement, the values "0.95fyv" is changed to "1.0fyv".
System design RC PT
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
4.3.7
Beams (Not 4.3.8
available) 4.3.9 * ( the concession)
4.3.7
The method according (Not 4.3.8
to a available) 4.3.9 * ( the concession)
RAM Concept program is not distributed to the torque, but the application "Condition 2" which limits
the depth of the neutral axis, thereby ensuring flexibility.
The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.6 times the effective depth.
Design compatible strain used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035. Do not use
stress blocks the simplified Figure 3.3.
See Materials for the stress curve - materials deformation ( = 1.5 for concrete; =
1:05 to reinforcement).
For with the cross section with concrete, the stress -strain curve of each concrete blocks are
wake.
used appropriately.
The axial force (loads) on the section to be considered or ignored based on the parameters declared in
the rhythm section design or design under consideration. If you choose to axial forces will be included,
cross-section is designed to provide the required torque and the axial force given.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
At the beam "T", "L" and "Z", beams and side beams themselves may have significant tension and
compression (at different altitudes) required to balance the torque. If the cross section over the entire
beam, these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if the cross
section is only one direction through the expanded beam wing, the cross section can have a significant
axial force required to balance the torque, the design for axial loads (by selecting the cross-sectional
design characteristics or design appropriate rate) necessary to ensure safe design.
Design Concept of the RAM program may exceed the maximum amount allowed reinforcement, and
thus can create a section with too much reinforcement. See section on plasticity in the previous section
to apply the requirements of flexibility.
For wit h t he cross secti on wit h ver y li ttle torque, reinf or ced by the cont ent of the
progr am can cal cul at e RAM Concept beyond over ki ll . That 's because RAM
Concept progr am wil l not al low the cross section defor mati on is gr eat er than 20%,
it i s necessar y t o mak e a small er compressor . Rei nforced t hat t he pr ogram needed
t o select RAM Concept axi al force bal ance in cr oss section.
Excluding code sections - 3.4.5.5 (a part), 3.4.5.6 - 3.4.5.11, 3.4.5.13 (considered separately)
Reinforced vertically designed by minimum functional design, use and intensity to be considered when
determining the calculations used in the vc.
For with the cross section with concrete mix, using minimal FCU.
The Deep efficiency was determined by analyzing the cracked section using bending moment and
axial force in place during shear testing. If the reinforcement in the cross section is compressed, the
effective depth is calculated as the distance from the compressor to the farthest reinforcement
activities (in the case 100As / bvd is 0:15).
vc 'is calculated as the minimum of equation Equation 6a and 6b, but not less than zero. fyv is limited
to 460 N/mm2.
The ramp is provided in Table 3.7
The ramp is provided in the required area calculation, not the entire length of the beam.
Distance along the seam of the rate is 0.75 d. Distance through rate is not considered.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Do not look at the bar and bend the nearest support system. Do
Only the "core" of the cross section is used to design twists. See "Identify" core "concrete tone "on
page 330.
Maximum combined shear stress was calculated according to VTU table 2.3, note 2 including
adjustment coefficients y1 and compared with vt. The remaining capacity is used to calculate the
remaining capacity of maximum shear.
Scope and twisted seams reinforced vertically by section 2.4.7. The maximum distance of
If you choose to design spiral, at least the smallest seams will be provided at the location.
Note: Assumptions in the equations in Table 2.3, note 2 is incorrect in error, and must be .
more details.
sections - no
Video 3.4.5 is used to determine the shear r esistance of the hard copy, except the Table
3:16 (with bv is determined by the "core shear") is used instead of Table 3.7.
reinforcement
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: This will not be used for the following stress components which basically adhesion to concrete.
See "Identifying The cross section is adhesion to concrete with no section Adhesion to Concrete " for
more information.
sections - 3.12.5.4
Reinforcement is provided in Table 3:25, assuming that the cross section perpendicular to and
dependent on the
ben
ding
.
Reinforcement is provided
as:
For the cross section is not declared after the stress, the reinforcement is tensioned after
bypass
For with the beam and the stress after stress after a method, the adhesion force following the
concrete surface tension of the center cross-section, or the 10% depth of the cross section
height focus, is considered equivalent to the tensile reinforcement is not 460 N/mm2, and
reduce the amount of tensile reinforcement is not required. The prestressed reinforced with
concrete adhesive to the corner
to c r o s s s e c t i o n w i l l b e t h e v e c t o r c o m p o n e n t s o f t h e r e i n f o r c e d s e c t i o n i s t o
consider the request. The interpretation of this is somewhat more moderate
code requirements.
Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components perpendicular
cross-section is considered.
Note: Do not use this section to stress the following two methods.
For with the structure RC, and PT, the beam and the version in a way, inspect cracks
in Part 2, 3.8.2 and limit crack width to 0.3 mm. This desi gn crack widths replace
other requirements of this section.
Calculation of crack widths of program RAM Concept is presented in detail in "Part 2, Section 3.8.3."
The sound defined by the user are considered to meet the maximum required distance. The bar at the
corner of the cross section as the sum of the vector components are divided by the total cross section of
the bar is the total number of bars are provided to calculate the distance.
Note: This section is not used for the main girders are tensioned after the concrete adhesion. See
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
"Determination of the cross section with adhesion to concrete cross section is not with adhesion to
concrete " for more information.
In the beam, not the distance between the bars is limited to 300 mm. Apply this code even if the code is
not required because the crack width is controlled by 3.12.11.2.1.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
In the following tensioned beams, pipe stress following the adhesion to concrete (grouting filled the
lumen) surface tension of the mind cross section, or in the depth range of 10% of the cross sectional
area focus is highly regarded as equivalent to not drag bar. Assuming the tubes are spaced - ignore
layout position. The way this is done the more temperate parts of the code requirements.
The sound defined by the user are considered to meet the maximum required distance. The bar at the
corner of the cross section as the sum of the vector components are divided by the total cross section of
the bar is the total number of bars are provided to calculate the distance.
Note: This will not be used for the following stress primarily with concrete adhesive. See
"Determination of the cross section with adhesion to concrete with no cross-sectional area Adhesion to
Concrete " for more information.
In the RC and PT, the copy in a way, not the distance between the bars is limited to less than 750 mm
or 3 d. Apply this code even if the code is not required because the crack width is controlled by
3.12.11.2.1.
In the copy in a way, the tube is tensioned after the concrete adhesion (the grouting filled lumen) on the
surface tension of the cross section of interest, or in the depth range of 10% of the cross sectional area
focus is highly regarded as equivalent to not drag bar. Assuming the tubes are spaced - ignore layout
position. The way this is done the more temperate parts of the code requirements.
The sound defined by the user are considered to meet the maximum required distance. The bar at the
corner of the cross section as the sum of the vector components are divided by the total cross section of
the bar is the total number of bars are provided to calculate the distance.
RAM Concept program is not distributed to the torque, but the application item "c" is limited to a depth
of neutral axis, thereby ensuring flexibility.
The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.5 times the effective depth.
For with the beam and the version in a way, in concrete compressive stress, based on the
concrete section,
be limited to 0.33fcu. Not up to 0.40fcu for the continuity of structures.
For with the beam and the version in a way, in concrete compressive stress, based on
concrete sections, the center section is limited to concrete 0.25fcu.
For with the section more concrete, low FCU is used to determine stresses and stress limits
are reported peak can be approximated.
wrong error.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The interaction of the BS 8110 requirements, the requirements TR 43, the different types and uses of
prestressed reinforced with adhesive with reinforced concrete and prestressed no adhesion to concrete
make limited disclosures of tensile stress and the required use of very messy. In many cases, BS 8110
and TR 43 contradictory, while in other cases there is no rule explicitly consider specific
configuration.
The implementation of our requirements are detailed in the table below. For each combination of
prestressed reinforced type, kind and rank structures, both stress limit and a reinforcement calculations
are listed. The first stress limit is the maximum allowable stress without using additional tensile
reinforcement is not additional. Stresses second limitation is the maximum stress limits allowed.
Calculating rebar detailing how the additional reinforcement required when stresses exceed the limit
stress first.
There adhesion to concrete Beams 3 / 0.1 mm The table 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
There adhesion to concrete Beams 3 / 0.2 mm The table 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
There adhesion to concrete A method 3 / 0.1 mm The table 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
There adhesion to concrete A method 3 / 0.2 mm The table 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
There adhesion to concrete The two All TR 43 Table 2 TR 43 Table 2 TR 43, 6.10.5
methods
No adhesion to concrete Beams 1 0 0 TR 43, 6.10.5
No adhesion to concrete Beams 3 / 0.1 mm 0 The table 4.2 / 4.3 * TR 43, 6.10.5
No adhesion to concrete Beams 3 / 0.2 mm 0 The table 4.2 / 4.3 * TR 43, 6.10.5
No adhesion to concrete A method 3 / 0.1 mm 0 The table 4.2 / 4.3 * TR 43, 6.10.5
No adhesion to concrete A method 3 / 0.2 mm 0 The table 4.2 / 4.3 * TR 43, 6.10.5
54.6.14 Identify cross-section with adhesion to concrete cross-section with no concrete adhesion
For the purposes of this section, cross-section is considered "to be prestressed reinforced with concrete
adhesive" if the majority of prestressed reinforcement in cross section (based on the vector section -
structures) is adhesion to concrete. The cross section is not eligible "to be prestressed reinforced with
concrete adhesive" is considered to be "reinforced with prestressed no adhesion to concrete."
Therefore, no cross-section of prestressed reinforcement is considered as "the prestressed
reinforcement without adhesion to concrete."
Additional reinforced when the limit is calculated stresses "no reinforcement" beyond, even to the type
and the structure of which is not foreseen by BS 8110. For example, if the beam type 1 tensile stress
exceeds 0 N/mm2, it will be annotated not meet the criterion 4.3.4.3 conditions, additional
reinforcement will be calculated for type 1 though reinforced beams can not solve.
Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components perpendicular
cross-section is considered.
0.625Asfy = F1 for the region in support of the two 0.625 (+ Apsfp Asfy) = F1 to
0.625 (+ Apsfp Asfy) = F1 for the area of the beam and the version in a way that
F1 = traction in concrete
Aps = vector component range of prestressed reinforced with adhesion to concrete (grouting filled the
lumen) of the tensile
Can not pull reinforcement is added in the region will not be pulled if a huge concrete overlay to be
determined.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: For the rhythm of the areas under the two methods, and the area of a local version, to make it
somewhat different narrative codes when considering the possibility of a mixture of core prestressed
with adhesion to concrete and prestressed reinforced no adhesion to the concrete cross section. It may
not require additional tensile reinforcement to the cross section of prestressed reinforced with
adhesion to concrete, which does not require code.
Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components perpendicular
cross-section is considered.
For with the section more concrete, low FCU is used to determine stresses and stress limits
are reported peak can be approximated.
For with the beam and the version in a way, in concrete compressive stress, based on the
concrete section,
be limited to 0.5fci.
For with the beam and the version in a way, in concrete compressive stress, based on
concrete sections, the center section is limited to concrete 0.4fci.
For with the two methods, the concrete compressive stress, based on the concrete
section, is limited to the support and 0.33fci 0.24fci in the rate of [TR 43, 6.10.2].
For with many sections of concrete mixture, the lowest FCI is used to determine stresses
and stress limits are reported peak can be approximated.
For with the beam and the version in a way, tensile stresses in the concrete, based on
concrete cross section, are limited to:
Type 1: 1
N/mm2
Type 2:
.
Type 3:
.
For with the two-way unreinforced no additional tensile, tensile stresses in th e concrete,
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
based on the concrete section, is limited to 0 in the support and in the rhythm [TR 43,
6.10.2].
For w i t h t h e t w o m e t h o d s i s n o t r e i n f o r c e d t e n s i l e a d d i t i o n a l t e n s i l e s t r e s s e s i n
the concrete, based on concrete cross section, are limited to .
Reinforcement with concrete adhesive is supplied as follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]:
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
As = Fi /
(0.625fy)
For with many sections of concrete mixture, the lowest FCI is used to determine stresses
and stress limits are reported peak can be appro ximated.
The way the two never exceeded While there is no limit to the beam and in a way that the type
2 or 3.
Note: 4.3.5.2 is not clear in this stress limits for Type 2, because it provides that additional
reinforcement will be provided "if necessary". This interpretation that reinforcement is only necessary
if the tensile stress exceeds (Due to smaller stresses cause stress cracks). Thus stress can
exceed this limit if additional reinforcement is provided.
See paragraph 3.4.4 of the general method. Note that if the axial force in the design (according to the
report design or rhythm section design), the deviation of the tension later on in the system that is
causing a static tensile super (sub ) for the design section, as appropriate.
There are prestressed reinforced later. See "The curve of stress - strain deformation of materials later
"on page 321 for curve with the stress - strain prestressed reinforcement.
Application prestressed reinforcement rate did not stick to the concrete by means of
distortion coefficients concessions (see detailed description in "The curve of stress - stress
after deformation concrete from sticking General Theory "on page 322).
If the center near prestressed reinforced with fiber compression far from compression reinforcement,
there is no possible solution.
Torque How to Vc
Vc = VCO
M <Mo
Vc = (Stress) BVH
M> Mo Vc = Min (VCO,
Take scissors and is on the "Accept" pull VCR) Vc =
face * (Stress) BVH
Vc = Min (VCO,
VCR) Vc =
M> Mo (Stress) BVH d =
and there is no tension on the "Accept drag" dt (Included)
* As = 0 (not in "The Tension") Aps = 0
(not in "The Tension")
Note: * The calculation of the Mo only 80% using pre-stressed due to stress. With this measure, in fact,
rarely cracked section and not have different tensile surface were calculated with Mo. In the case of M>
Mo and section really cracked (before considering the full force), moderate assumptions made by the
fourth column.
"D" is defined as the depth to the center of tensile tensile region (including rebar and after stress).
There are somewhat different (and more plausible) and compression distance away from the center
fiber of prestressed reinforcement as defined in the code.
"Dt" is defined as the maximum depth to soft longitudinal reinforcement, or the depth to the center of
the prestressed reinforcement, if that is greater.
For with the section more concrete, low FCU is used when calculating.
Reinforced vertically designed by minimum levels of design, use and intensity are considered when
determining As used in calculating vc.
bv be adjusted when considering the prestressed reinforcement in core shear. Unless the full width of
the prestressed reinforcement without adhesion to concrete, and two-thirds the width of the prestressed
reinforced with concrete is less adhesion bv.
For wi t h t he cr oss secti on wi t h pr est r essed rei nf o r cement , t he aver age val ue of t he
FPU and FPE
be used in the calculation.
Note vc are 2 Table 3.8, including any adjustment FCU, using (Aps + As) instead of As. See
the 3.4.5 for details on how to make this
table.
When the prestressed reinforcement without adhesion to concrete is used, the value of vc is reduced by
a factor of 0.9 [TR 43, 6.11.1].
Distance seams are 4.3.8.10, with the distance requirements are ignored. "Plate thickness" is used in
the calculation of similar width shear core - this may be inaccurate if the width of the core of many
plates. In such cases, the cross-sectional design and the design range can be used, each section has
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The ramp is provided in the required area calculation, not the entire length of the beam.
Prestressed reinforced not be added to the final torque capacity torque causing larger cracks.
Assumptions on crack (torque curve) or below (sagging moments) based on the "core sample content
Minimum steel "is selected in the range of fractional sectional design or
designs.
Only sections in the sixth from the support span length or sixth beat length of span between the test
because they are considered as the potential location of the first cracking of concrete.
See "" Torque cracking "is used in the design calculations" on page 329 to For more information about
the theory of cracking moment (Note that the 1.2 factor is not used in BS 8110)
Application cracking rate is . For the cross section with concrete, the largest FCU
for the cross-section is used.
Tensile steel reinforcement is added to ensure that the stress is still under 0.8fy reinforced.
The Wide cracks are BS 8110 Part 2, equation 12. Using curve stress - deformation of concrete close
to the tensile strength used - see the presentation in "Conduct Concrete". Do not consider creep
strength.
Tensile steel reinforcement is added to keep the crack widths at or below 0.3mm (according to 3.2.4.2).
Applying this condition for the two methods, but with the equation 12 will not predict
exact width of the crack on the two segments as the wide range of design
broad cross-section design is used.
The ability to limit cracking of prestressed reinforced following adhesion to concrete is placed in the
proper position to be considered, and load balancing will be considered if included in the load
combination.
When determining the effectiveness of prestressed reinforced with adhesion to concrete, can perform
the following equation 12:
=εms
c
RAM Concept program assumes that each bar and reinforced with prestressed concrete adhesive to be
placed horizontal to crack the same distance. The bars and prestressed reinforced that - due to their
height - can not crack spacing will be ignored.
3acr ht sc ht +2 Scacr -
2sccmin = 3acr ht sc ht -
2SC)
However, the , Where sb = half the distance between the reinforcement in the
transverse direction
Using this last equation, RAM Concept program to determine the distance to each bar or prestressed
reinforced with adhesion to concrete cracking control effectively. Program RAM Concept for
continuous sc sbs determine total width tensile surface.
For with prestressed reinforced with adhesion to concrete, cmin overlay coating is assumed
to be the center of prestressed reinforcement, and diameter "bar" is assumed to be zero.
Both assumptions are peaceful.
Note: This section is not used for the beams of the stress after a local or primarily with concrete
adhesive. See "Determination of the cross section with adhesion to concrete with no cross section with
concrete adhesive " for more information.
For w i t h b e a m s a n d s t r e s s e d a f t e r a l o c a l v e r s i o n , 3 . 1 2 . 5 a n d 3 . 1 2 . 1 1 . 2
requirements also apply. (Note that "Table 3:27" in reference 43 TR 8110
1985 BS - This table has been re -numbered as 3:25 in the published 1997).
The interpretation is somewhat more temp erate parts of the code
requirements.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For with the following two methods are the adhesion force with reinforced concrete or
prestressed no adhesion to concrete, steel tensile reinforcement is provided in the
following support areas:
As =
0.00075Ac.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For segment spans the range, this standard only applies to the first cross section in the frame
rate support if the rate is less than 0.2.
For with cross design, this standard applies when less than 0.2 percentage rate. No test
Reinforced by the user to determine at which angle cross section will only components perpendicular
cross-section is considered.
Designed corrosion EC2 (EN 1992-2004) is used instead of BS8110. See Chapter 57, "The note
pierced design shear ".
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
56 Rating deflection
Note: This chapter presents the evaluation methodology different deflection, resulting in accuracy and
complexity is also different. Although we recommend reading the whole chapter, but perhaps, the "The
predicted deflection detailed drawings using the strip deflection", And "Drawings of Use hammock in
the band for " is most useful to assess long-term deflection quick and reasonably accurate. The different
methods are summarized in "Summary of the deflection capability RAM Concept program ".
Calculate the deflection of concrete floor very complex. There are many issues to consider, and even
the need to review and complete calculations, the predicted deflection is considered as to evaluate.
The following are tensioned floor design to reduce cracking and thus the method of calculating elastic
deflection is generally accepted. Increase the use of pre-stressed method as part calculate the deflection
becomes more important to stress the following design. The floor must be reinforced floor cracks wider
following stress, is why need more concrete section, and to consider more about deflection.
The design flexibility (that is, with the shallower sections of concrete or thinner) require more rigorous
analysis to determine that the deflection limit state is satisfactory. RAM Concept program allows the
use of simplified measures in addition to measures more detailed and more accurate to determine the
deflection. However, A flexible design must have thorough understanding of the issues and measures to
ensure adequate deflection.
Especially, if the set designers design the floor "to the limit", the problem may occur because the
program can not foresee Concept or not consider issues, including:
Concept of the ECR value (effective rate curve). You can check the influence causing cracks, concrete
shrinkage and creep strength with the ECR value. Concept of the ECR value based on the value of
concrete creep and shrinkage determined by the user, and reinforced sections (Concept by the program
to suit the various design conditions) for each weather cross-sectional area of the design range.
Not considering the load history, but could affect your choice of creep coefficient for calculating ECR.
Do not consider the dynamic effects.
You can use the program to check RAM Concept deflection in several ways, including:
• The predicted deflection is simplified using the load factor and the average plane
deflection map (not considering cracking) [Measure 1]
• The detailed forecast deflection using the scheme of plane deflection and ECR, assuming the
load is fixed [Measure 2]
• The detailed forecast deflection using the scheme of plane deflection, ECR and consider short-
term nature of the work load [Measures 3 and 4]
• The predicted deflection using detailed drawings of deflection under long range combined with
the
elastic deflection and ECR [Measures 5].
The creep can be defined as the distortion increases with time under a constant stress. Do
that related to the creep load fixed.
The creep coefficient can be defined as long-term deformation rate with instantaneous deformation, due
to constant load. This is the definition used in the program RAM Concept.
The fixed load factors similar to the creep coefficient of static load. Work load is usually not 100%
fixed, but somewhat temporary or temporary. Therefore, the creep factor often smaller load factor for
static load.
permLL%) of which
• creep is the creep factor design (basic creep coefficient is adjusted with the age factor of the
load, thickness, environmental etc.)
The formula assumes that the total load deflection is the total load deflection constant creep coefficients
are multiplied by design, plus temporary load deflection.
Note: ACI 209 to report the value of 3:35 is the values average. The Concept RAM files apply default
values.
Depending on the measure used, can use the ECR value as the number of short-term deflection, or as
the load factor for retinal LC LT is not cracked.
ECR = Ce / Cg
which
• Curvature Ce = effective cross sectional area (considering the effects of creep, shrinkage and
cracking of concrete)
For more information, see "Calculate the effective rate curve" on page 327.
Generally easy to find on the rapid rebound deflection by multiplying the largest ECR floor with
appropriate short-term deflection. This is a peaceful measures, and may charge more than the fair
value using the weighted average number of ECR, or the integral average.
Normally concrete will not crack cracked near the inflection point, and the other rhythm section. Also,
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
cracks in between the beats may be more important than the support system, or vice versa. Unless the
rate is not cracked, not capable of ECR is similar throughout the entire span.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
ECR value weighting takes into account differences in the amount of cracking
pace throughout.
In the following discussion, the weighted average is calculated considering only the ECR value at the
left support system, between beats, and the right support system.
The ECR value weighted somewhat subjective. Since the beam energy corresponding to the
perpendicular torque and deflection of the beam near the energy corresponding to the beam, so the
weighted average should consider integer perpendicular torque. See "The use of ECR" in page 327 to
be explained.
The following figure shows the number of square torque for fixed spans and girder end (one end fixed,
the other end is simply supported). The objective of this drawing is to calculate the ratio of the square
torque for different regions (the left support system, between beats, the right support.).
Note: The maximum torque is fixed for the wedding and wl2/24 -wl2/12 respectively. The moment our
square is 0.00694 (WL2) 2 and 0.001736 (WL2) 2, corresponding drawings.
Launch
Integer wL5 prefix out = Ii /
Launch
I1 + I2 + out
I1 (Left) 0.000427 0.001389
I3 0308
I2 (Middle) 0.000535 0.001389 0385
I3 (Left) 0.000427 0.001389 0308
Figure 56-4 Determining the weighting coefficients for fixed end components
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 56-5 torque Drawings and girder square (one end fixed, the other end is simply supported)
Note: The maximum torque respectively girder-WL2 / 8 and 0.0703wl2/12. The moment our square is
0.01563 (WL2) 2 and 0.00494 (WL2) 2, corresponding drawings.
Launch
Integer wL5 prefix out = Ii /
Launch
I1 + I2 + out
I1 (Left) 0.001147 0.003125
I3 0367
I2 (Mid) 0.001978 0.003125 0633
I3 (Left) 0 0.003125 0
The following table summarizes the weighted average value based on the issues discussed above. You
can use them to calculate the weighted average number of ECR for a specific rhythm. We are just a
reference guide.
Use the drawing of RAM Concept program is the simplest way and sometimes to predict full
deflection.
Many designers evaluate the floor deflection after stress in the plane of deflection per map. The
surface map shows average load combination (a few combinations of load factor to consider
increasing creep strength) without any consideration of any cracking problems. Generally this is done
when the stress of the cut does not exceed (Psi units) [ (The units of MPa)].
LC use
LC plane deflection loads used for operations (as defined in the load combination used) and report the
average deflection map based on the total cross section without consideration of creep and cracking.
LC LT crack deflection does not use long loads (as defined in the load combination does not crack
deflection LT) and report the average deflection map based on the total cross section. This measure is
considered "obsolete", in which the influence of concrete creep and shrinkage measured by load factor
(for 3) for the static load and load following stress , and various load factor (for the 1.5) for the load.
As discussed in the "The creep strength computation", The load factor of choice should consider the
type of load.
Note: The load factor is not cracked LT LC hammock is not automatically associated with the creep
coefficient in Calc Options Dialog window.
Note: Do not use the LC proposal is maintained constant (only used for ACI 318) to test deflection
because it actually provides active design rules 18.4.2 (a), requires asked compressive stress for the
fixed load * f'c less than 0:45. The load factor is similar to the system used for LC of use, not cracked
LT LC does not sag.
56.5 The detailed forecast deflection using ECR weighting values for the fixed load
You can use the calculation of the ECR program RAM Concept to predict more accurately the
deflection.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
This method uses surface deflection operations (short term) with weighting ECR important for the
rhythm.
Note: Sometimes the maximum deflection is not in tune with the largest ECR. It is possible to use the
maximum deflection and the maximum weight of the ECR in the floor, or check out the different
rhythms with appropriate weighting ECR
Note: Plane deflection deflection not cracked LT LC will not be used to determine the value of the
weighting ECR.
Continuous beams are analyzed with 3:35 creep coefficient (determined in the calculation options
dialog).
The hammock is 3:14 mm using. The ECR values vary from system support left at 3:35, to 6.65 at the
middle rate, to 5.72 at the right support system.
Weighted average number of ECR = 0.3 * 3.35 + 0.4 * 6.65 + 0.3 * 5.72 = 5.38
= 17 mm (0.67 inches)
56.6 The detailed forecast deflection using the ECR value weighting for temporary
load
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Work load for most of the floor is not 100% fixed. That is, some or all of the load will be temporary.
For this floor, use the ECR value for the fixed load is moderate.
Creep coefficient for the temporary load, or somewhat temporary, smaller coefficient of static load
creep. View the picture 56-1 and 56-2 for more information about load creep factor.
The consideration of lower values for the load will make the calculation becomes more difficult,
because not enough data to consider ECR to load the concession. This is because:
• Concrete cracks can not be extracted due to the reduced load, but cracked on the maximum
load.
Two predicted deflection measures are also presented here. These measures consider the temporary
load. Both have advantages but you should decide what measures are more appropriate.
56.6.1 Measure 3: Edit the maximum deflection with ECR value weighting is considered short-
term nature of the work load
o Application of ECR values from 2 measures such as load factor for static load and load
balancing.
o Apply ECR value is adjusted to reflect the work load of the load ratio is temporary.
Measures 56-2
Example 3
Work load is considered fixed to 50% and the remaining load is temporary.
LC LT crack deflection not been changed to a 5:38 ratio for static loads and load balancing, and 3:50 to
load.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 56-9 long deflection with the load factor based on the
ECR.
Note: Should rename load combination if you change the load factor to detect cracks. Note: If steel
compression significantly present in the cross section, these measures will not be
effect due to the application and use creep 3:35 coefficient assuming that this ratio represents the
percentage of cracked and bent with the curvature creep cracking. This is almost true in the reinforced
section. However, in the case of the compression steel, steel and concrete and the compression force on
the surface, but only reinforced concrete creep and so creep rate coefficient is no longer accurate.
56.6.2 Measure 4: Edit the maximum deflection with "cracking the system" ECR arising from
weighting into consideration the temporary load
• Identify effects cracking for maximum load divided by the weighted ECR values
Calc creep option, one factor causing cracking.
• Applying this factor to cause crack deflection new LC, referred to as "LC creep deflection
without causing cracks"
Measures 56-3
Example 4
For continuous beams similar measure 2, the cracking system is considered: cracking
"LC deflection without causing cracks creep" is changed to 3:35 in the coefficient of static loads and
load balancing, and 2:18 to load.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: If steel compression significantly present in the cross section, these measures will not be
effective due to the adoption and use of creep coefficient 3.35 assuming that this ratio shows the ratio
of crack and curvature is the curvature creep cracking. This is almost true in the reinforced section.
However, in the case of the compression steel, steel and concrete and the compression force on the
surface, but only reinforced concrete creep and so creep rate coefficient is no longer accurate
It is more significant with the program RAM Concept drawings deflection analysis section for the
rules. Using drawings and dialog tab "section analysis" as described in Figure 56-12.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Note: The drawings deflection analysis of this section more useful, because the ECR values are
integrated along the strip and cover for long-term deflection.
Note: The drawing shows the deflection of the waves along the strip. Not the average over the strip
cross-section design.
This method uses the LT plane deflection in the Service (or Maximum Service) Rule Set.
1 Choose Layers> Rule Set Designs> Max Service Design> LT Plan deflection.
For continuous beams similar in measures 2, LT plane deflection shown in the drawings
Figure 56-13.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Permanent deflection in the range of 17.4 mm (0.69 inches). Compared to measure 2 (17 mm) because
there is no measure creep factor to consider concessions to load.
The section Example 56-5 and Example 56-6 presents the analysis of the two deflection method is
presented in Figure 56-14.
Figure 56-14 For example, the flat has presented an analysis of gray
The examples use the LT plane deflection Use of the Code (see "See the drawing long hammock " for
additional instructions). Many flat files present in the Maximum Use rules (depending on the code
used).
Note: The elastic deflection is presented on the same plane by changing the drawing.
Figure 56-15 represents elastic deflection of the column of east-west and north-south strip between.
Deflection at the same place where the strips intersect.
Note: The drawing can not show the same results if not cut with waves range between the mid-point of
the range of the column, or a maximum deflection at mid-span.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 56-15 The flat Example 56-5: Elastic deflection of the column and the range between the
selected
Range and range between beams cracked and so did not have the same deflection at which they
intersect.
Column range (east-west) to be cracked in the middle range (south-north) does not suffer. Hence the
values where they intersect (point "A") is not the same.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 56-16 The flat Example 56-5: Long-term deflection of the column and the range between the
selected
= 22.6 - 7.2
= 15.4 mm
Absolute deflection of the strip between the rational can be turned as follows:
= 28.4 mm
This example load is increased and more shallow edge beams Example 56-5.
Figure 56-18 represents elastic deflection of the column of east-west and north-south strip between.
Deflection at the same place the strips intersect.
Note: The drawing can not show the same result if the waves do not intersect in the range between
the midpoint of the range of columns, or a maximum deflection at mid-span.
Maximum elastic deflection greater than 10% compared with Example 56-5.
Figure 56-17 The flat Example 56-6: Elastic deflection of the column and the range between the
selected
The band cracked and so are the various deflection values in the range where the cross.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 56-18 The flat Example 56-6: Long-term deflection of the column and the range between the
selected
= 26.8 - 9.1
= 17.7 mm
Absolute deflection of the strip between the rational can be turned as follows:
= 33.2 mm
Note: Analysis using the strip deflection column north and south-east-west between the strips may
have different results.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
ECR /
long-term (1) Does not
As the load factor from
deflection require the user
measures 1, and editing
to edit the load (1) Requirements of users who
4 (The load with "cracking
factor changes if long-term sag 'cause cracking
factor coefficient" is derived
ECR coefficient ".
from rational measures 2
based on
the
coefficient
of
Plane (1) Very simply
variation)
deflection
No, if you strip out the (1) Requirement to conduct manual
L.T. (2) No
5 editing is not supported adjustment for the plane to examine
weighting the
(Strip directly the various issues causing cracks.
ECR requires
design) manually
ECR values are weighted less than the largest value in the ECR rate. The designer should consider
editing value for load creep strength.
Generally easy to find on the rapid rebound deflection by multiplying the largest ECR floor with
appropriate short-term deflection.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The Ram Concept performance analysis section cracked by repeatedly solving the deformed cross-
section (deformation above and below) leads to the bending moment cross-section and its axial
direction by the torque and power Axial apply.
In the analysis section is cracked, the program concept as concrete no tensile strength. Because
concrete Obviously some tensile strength, assuming the program's concept is considered concrete
previously cracked by the load conditions other. The assumption of program Concept is peaceful.
Assuming cracked before it is used to determine the stress section section cracked and the moment of
inertia is cracked. This assumption does not affect the calculation ECR by formula Branson does not
consider moment of inertia cracked unless the stress cross-section beyond modulus destroyed.
Program Concept review any compression reinforcement in ECR calculation.
If no cracking, the concrete shrinkage is not appropriate for the total cross-sectional characteristics are
used. If there is cracking, the reinforced concrete shrinkage limit, so the shrinkage is much less
reinforced the less reinforcement. Assuming that the more reinforced than the tensile, stress curvature.
The calculation does not consider the effect of shrinkage and cracking of concrete is limited.
Deformation due to shrinkage of concrete as defined in the Options window Calc calculated only for
the ECR.
Creep coefficient as defined in Calc Options window is used to calculate the ECR. This coefficient is
the value of (total deformation under constant stress) / (strain under the same initial stress); typical
value is 3:35 (1.0 for the initial deformation and 2.35 with variables digging).
Note: For more information, see "The effects of concrete creep and shrinkage" on page 325,"Analysis
cracked section "on page 326,"Branson stress ratio" on page 326 and "Calculate the effective rate
curve results "on page 327.
If you exceed the designed reinforcement, reinforcement defined by the user affect the calculation of
the deflection of the cracked section. Reinforced by the users identified no effect on the cross-section
is not cracked.
See the range of design characteristics is presented in Page 84 the 21.5, And one of the following
for more information:
• page 451 Chapter 55, " Design IS 456: 2000 / IS 1343: 1980 "
reduced.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Characteristics Figure 56-19 range designed for the 56-20 and 56-21.
Characteristics Figure 56-22 range designed for the 56-23 and 56-26.
Figure 56-23 below reinforcement increases (defined by the user) and deflection: U.S. Unit
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 56-24 below reinforcement increases (defined by the user) and deflection: metric units
Characteristics Figure 56-25 range designed for the 56-26 and 56-27
Figure 56-26 Reinforced top and bottom up (defined by the user) and deflection: U.S. Unit
Figure 56-27 Reinforced top and bottom up (defined by the user) and deflection: metric units
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The jet's large support system (or any load any) applicable to the small range of the possible failure
to make the support system in the near belt shear failure. "Anti-puncture cut" is different from the
"shear beam" for positions located around the perimeter of failure rather than along a straight line
through the. The jet bending moment is applied along the direction of the reaction force of lower
load can not be sustained puncture failure. The local thickness of the section may increase puncture
resistance to shear, or maybe just eliminate the position of shear failure to breach the perimeter
outside the scope of the reinvigorated. Shear failure typically brittle and porous suddenly.
The transmission on the punctured complex and changing load path, causing more cracks in the area.
No general simple models to predict the behavior of the breach. Conduct a three-dimensional model
can be most simply be applied to the puncture, but even this model is quite complex to design.
The construction of access rules breach shear behavior by replacing the punctured complex reality
with relatively simple models do not reflect the actual behavior of the breach. The only reason that
this simple model to design safety inspection as they are identified with the test results for the
standard case inside, edge and corner columns.
Always remember that for cases outside the inner standard cases, edges and corners, model building
codes may generate unreasonable results and may be unsafe.
Concept program using the jet boundary on the column to the power lines which define important
cases. The axial forces surrounded the puncture test and consider the following cases: Max Fz, Fz
Min, Mr Max, Min Mr, Ms Max, Min Ms. Boundary control can be displayed by checking the
"controlling criteria" in the list of objects visible under "Breaches Checks" on any flat surface display
layer or Layer Design Design Rule Set Status.
Any load that is applied in the critical section can not be penetrated by the jet they do not contribute
significant forces across the section. Concept program calculates jet breached
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
synthesized by the reaction to the column above and below the point load is applied in column
form. Shaped columns used for this calculation (instead of critical sections) because it ensures a
breach of the jet for each puncture test. The load line and load range are not considered in the
calculation of this total.
The horizontal load of SE in the appropriate puncture jet. The load was applied in the location
column / wall and usually includes at least one external force applied focus plane with a set of
orthogonal moment applied. The force is the overall force applied to the support from the system to
horizontal loads. Jet pierced for exactly this kind of load is simply the load itself. Due to the
elimination of Concept program support columns and wall systems when analyzing horizontal load
SE, pierced jet arises is the summation of any load is applied in column form.
Many building codes allow consideration of the vertical force component before calculating
puncture. Typically additional contribution to the vertical stress before capacity at critical section, or
unless pre-stressed components vertically from jet breached. Program Concept predictable effects
using Calc Option Include Component in Punch Check Tendon Jet. If you choose this option, after
the prestressed reinforcement is converted into concentrated load balancing equal, the program will
modify Concept (usually reduced) jet penetrated by the forces concentrated in shape column.
Note: Due to the prestressed reinforcement become the focus of power balance as well as the
Concept program using shapes instead of the column critical section, the calculations are
approximate. When using this option, it is important to ensure that the model plane position
reinforced and prestressed Concept shape the backbone consistent with the final design and
placement of concrete to be the correct result. Therefore, this option should be used with caution.
Concept test geometry in the porous region radius is determined to find the location of failure. The
calculation of the critical cross-Concept program considering the exact thickness, but simplifying
assumptions about the altitude areas. In certain cases this may lead to the location of the critical
section is not correct.
In the scope of different thickness, the calculated breach of Concept program makes the assumption
that the thick protruding towards applied load. For example, in improving the shear first assumption
will be placed at the bottom, and in the nail bed / friends assume will be placed on the / friends. If so,
the Concept program can not locate the appropriate section is important. See example in Figure 57-1.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Position at many distances (typically depth function effectively, "d") from the column were
considered failures range. At various locations from the changing distance thickness sections were
considered failures range.
If the slab edge / hole treatment is declared as Sector voids, any addition or loss find the radius of
porous region are creating a fan or do not have the puncture resistance.
If the slab edge / hole treatment Planes Failure is declared, the program will examine the concept of
critical sections including sections connected to the edges or gaps (no puncture resistance) to search
The most important section.
If the slab edge / hole treatment is declared Ignore Edges, the location of the critical section is not
affected by the loss, but any part of any sectional cut holes will be deemed not to have breached
resistance. Suggest that the Ignore Edges are used only if the processing Sector Failure Planes voids
and does not generate the desired critical section.
Figure 57-2 The result of failure plane for the next three treatment / loss different
Concept trying to link locations together fail to identify important logical sections. Measures of
Concept program is to find the appropriate section, but does not always find them. You should
always visually check the position of the cross-Concept was important that we check to see if there is
not proper (normal to the naked eye view of the state of design: Shear Breaches Status Plan).
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
57.2.3 Step 3: Determine the stresses on the model-code the column section
Please refer to the code for information specific interpretation of the model code and breached
computing requirements.
57.2.4 Step 4: Determine the stress code - allowing the column sections
Please refer to the specific code is presented for calculating the capacity of the model code breach the
code.
If the column critical section is calculated with higher power requirements (and therefore do not
stress ratio reinforcement (USR)> 1.0), the user can select programs to increase SSR Concept Design
column strengthen them, if possible, by selecting "Design SSR if Necessary 'in the puncture test
characteristics.
1 Check the maximum stress cross-section for maximum allowable stress - many codes codes to use
this provision to prevent the cross-section is high-impact stress from the reinforcement increases.
Please refer to the specific code for additional detail on how to handle this test.
2 Installation The initial rail - much of the original rails were installed to any length. The original
rails were installed to meet the requirements of the maximum horizontal distance of code in the
operating system columns or supports.
3 Expansion of rail - the rail is continuously extended until the stress in the cross section limit stress
code - allowing for non-reinforced sections. The section code is limited to determining the distance
perpendicular to the main road outside the reinforced zone with SSR.
4 Check the nail spacing / design layout of the existing rails. If the distance does not work, the track
will be added and redesigned from step 2.
Note: In testing the next version puncture, Concept Program can expand the distance to the rail
radius puncture test, but the point sticks out perpendicular to the outside edge radius puncture test.
In this case, the concept can not find the section the most important limits. Normally can be adjusted
by increasing the radius puncture test. The engineer should check the appropriate section of the
adjusted limits and test characteristics needed breach.
Finally, a summary of the results. Unable to directly brief the SSR design for a few reasons (for
example, two independent design can be the length of the various rails, and hence different depths,
making different nail spacing ). Therefore, if there are design rules defined shear design
breakthrough, the magnetic force lines around each design rules are combined in a power envelope,
then proceed to the design brief outline This combined force as outlined above.
For each critical section created, calculated stress divided with stress code allows to determine the
interest rate of reinforcement (USR). If the column reinforcement SSR, the program will also report
Concept intensity ratio reinforcement (RSR), is required to break through reinforced capacity. If the
critical section is not consistent with the standard conditions, the column will
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Nonstandard label marked with the Section, which engineers will review the applicability of the code
design process with important sections labeled nonstandard.
57.3 Using the results of Concept program to determine the type of nail
reinforcement system (SSR)
The typical value is determined for the SSR system, including the number and arrangement of the
rail system in the column or support, the first stud spacing, typical stud spacing, stud diameter, and
height of rails outside typical characteristics of nails.
Most of these properties are specified system requirements is available SSR SSR under visible by
drawing objects> Punch Checks. Concept Program does not report the overall height of the rails but
can be easily determined from the geometry. In general, the height of the rails should be as close as
can be determined with the outer surface of the structural components (while observing the
requirements necessary coating and other code). The calculation of the intensity of Concept program
assumes that each type of nail rails have a depth effect, calculated as the depth of the most effective
pieces of any scope are the rail crossings by type nails. Designed corrosion of rails may have many
types of nail depth in the column or support system.
57.4 Type
column
connections
RAM Concept Program shear stress calculations allowed for each section based on the key code to
current codes. Allowable stresses depend on the type of column connections.
57.4.1 Type of
connecti
on
Concept Program to determine whether the column is "inside", "edge" or "corner" kind of connection
based on characteristics of puncture test. If the property type is declared as Auto connection, the
program will fix the Concept of access.
Concept Program try to determine the type of connection with a drum in the corner radius puncture
test. The angle is the angle space is defined between the tangent space to any point in the puncture
test, or the angle between the intersecting points of the edges and perimeter puncture test.
• if the total is less than 180 empty corner, but greater than 90 degree edge
• if not, inner
Due to the complex geometry, the program will not always fix the Concept of proper connection, so
we suggest you use the optional parameter declarations "Auto".
You can see what kind of connection Concept program determined by plane selection by marking
"Column Condition" under "Breaches checks" on any flat surface display Rule Set Design Layer, or
Layer Design Status.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
For the connection of a group does not, you can select multiple edges (ie, if the connection type
somewhere between the edges and corners, you can choose the type of
connection is "conner").
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Methods of analysis and design breakthrough ACI shear provisions of ACI using the 318 as a basis
for implementation. Critical section is defined at d / 2 from human peripheral application. The
important sections are arranged to minimize bod. on the edges of the puncture test, the other
important section will be created by protruding perpendicular to the cutting edge to the original. In
addition, the section will be created for each of the basic shapes (columns, drop cap, etc.).
To calculate the cross stress, the elastic stress distribution caused by the eccentricity between load /
jet and center section causing significant overlap with the shear stress due to the load center to the
cause of different stress distribution on the linear section. In particular, the eccentricity in two
directions
orthogonal, they are considered simultaneously. is calculated for each section around the main axis
of the cross section. For the column cross section, ratio length / width is not used to calculate
adjustment. For the cross section limits, ratio length / width is adjusted according to ACI
421.1R99.
This section presents the calculation of puncture resistance for non-reinforced sections.
The important characteristic sections and the equations to calculate the actual stress
Symbol
b1 = Width of the critical section measured in the direction of the torque rate that is determined, in.
d = distance from compression fiber distance to the center of the tensile reinforcement vertically, as
outlined in ACI 318, in.
Ixx = Bending moment of inertia around the x-axis for all critical sections, IN4
Ixx = Moment of inertia around the x-axis contribution for each of the key sections, calculated for
the heart of the critical section, IN4
Iyy = Bending moment of inertia around the y-axis for all critical sections, IN4
Iyy = Moment of inertia around the y-axis contribution for each of the key sections, calculated for
the heart of the critical section, IN4
Ixy = Product of inertia for the entire critical section, IN4
Ixy = Product of inertia of the contribution for each critical section, calculated for the heart of the
critical section, IN4
MOX = Overall jet (the torque from the column top and bottom) around the x-axis at the center of
the column used
estimated symbol "right hand rule", kip-in
Moy = Jet General (the torque from the column top and bottom) around the y-axis at the center of the
column used
estimated symbol "right hand rule", kip-in
Mux = Jet column, torque around the x-axis at the center of the critical section, kip-in
Muy = Jet column, torque around the y axis at the center of the critical section, kip-in
Vu = Axial jet column, the column in the center of the jet column is positive upward, Kips
= Angle between the surface of the critical section and the positive x-axis
The equations are presented arise from basic structural material. Can find the same formula in the
article "Designing nails for reinforcement of the type" of Ghali & Elgabry, ACI
Structural Journal, May-June 1990. The values and always measured around the axis of the
critical section.
a)
b)
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Note: The equation a) based on the intensity of the standard material, the bending equation for the
asymmetric cross section. If the torque is applied around one or more axes of symmetry, then Ixy = 0
and the equation a) is similar:
Allows shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from ACI-318 (11-33), (11-
34), (11-35) or (11-36).
Equations 11-33 in the regional control prestressed concrete with large proportions of columns. As
the proportion of older columns, shear stress should puncture approach allows a local shear stress
allowed.
Equations 11-34 are expected to correlate shear stress in the region do not allow prestressed rate bo /
d. This equation is generally thinner than the control with the larger column or at the critical section
outside the column.
Equation 11-35 is on the rebound of shear stress allows for the regions
stress, .
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Equation 11-36 is to be applied to the puncture pre-stressed regions. To meet the requirements
stressed before, the area must meet the following
conditions:
1 effective stress before, FPC at less than 125 psi column. Before the effective stress is calculated
by taking the average of the previous compression factor in radius puncture test. It can lead to the
non-prestressed equation will be used in the drop cap of the pre-stressed in the previous sections
drop below 125 psi compression in cap. Also, if the large compression factor is used (ie, shear wall)
deflects the pre-stressed region, then the equation will be prestressed not use it correctly in front of
the compressor average below 125 psi.
2 f'c not be greater than 5000 psi. If concrete strength greater than 5000 psi, f'c the largest is 5000
psi will be used in breach of the pre-stressed, but allows shear stresses will still be calculated by
Equation 11-36.
If you do not meet any of the above conditions, then the equation 11-33 to 11-35 will be applied.
Note: The number of these equations is the code from ACI 318-02 and ACI 318-
05 codes.
Vc + Vs (11-2)
which
(11.12.3.1)
or
Note: This equation can be extended from ACI Equation 11-15 to consider the case where the
different rails at different column height due to irregular geometry.
Other provisions
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
The distance to the first nail is 0.4 d by ACI 421.1R-99 3:12 equations. This distance will be rounded
down to 1/8 in. for 5 mm unit for U.S. or metric units.
Maximum stud spacing is typically 0.5 d according to ACI 318, but can go up to 0.75 d smal
l
than or equal to proposed using the ACI 421.1R-99 for distance higher limit.
Maximum tangential distance of the track in the column are limited to 2d in ACI 421.1R-99 and ACI
318-02 Appendix A.2 11.12.3.3. The distance requirement is not tangential to check out the location
in the column / support system.
SSR is extended until the stress in the cross-section limits are limits
11.12.6.2 by ACI 318-02 (b). For the limited cross section outside the original perimeter columns
first, be adjusted according to ACI 421.1R-99 Appendix B.
Critical section for shear is assumed to be breached in the dom / 2 from the set of load range or
support system, which dom value is due, the average circumference is important. Based on the
source code of the equation codes, dom does not mean including the thickness of the beam. Concept
program using self-learn method to determine the thickness of critical sections in the thickness of
the area / different beams in the direction of puncture test. You can check the section thickness is
important in enabling "visible objects".
Shear model AS 3600 breached the assumption that shear force V * is distributed evenly around the
critical section creates an average shear stress at the v = V * / Udom. Unbalanced torque, Mv * is
hampered by 3-component structure:
1 The difference in the elastic torque at the front and back of the strip.
2 Eccentricity of the shear stress v sync from the center or payload support
In the model, torque at # 3 is converted to the maximum shear stress and be added to the average
shear stress v sync. Mv ratio * added torque at # 3 really different, but is assumed to be constant to
simplify the model. * Mv values obtained in column center / support system.
Shear capacity Vu where Mv * zero (as it is in the range of the surface) is calculated according to
AS 3600 9.2.3a:
In which Mv * is not equal to zero, the model made up of the following design equations in AS
3600
9.2.4a the belt when not wired in twisted braids and no bracing beams:
Declare the upper limit of the combination V * MV * and may be due to the resistance of concrete.
This equation can be rearranged to view the stress limits:
The codes allow increased capacity pierced by placing the minimum reinforced belt twisted strips.
The Concept is the select box of the items included in the calculation of minimum reinforcement
belt according to AS 3600 9.2.4b. The Concept is not the minimum number of required
reinforcement belt, but the engineers have calculated.
When the minimum amount of reinforcement in the belt twisted strips, used in the equation
9.2.4b:
In the case of shear rate for a wide range of small torque and / or twisted to a depth of less efficient,
AS 3600 equations can be used to lower the intensity for reinforced belt than no.
The Concept is not the shear capacity of beams under the provisions of 9.2.4c and 9.2.4d.
Calculate the shear stress and the maximum allowed and the corresponding stress ratio
and the average stress in the area before checking puncture. If create a shear force, it will
reduce the stress allowed. Shear stress is allowed to report the .
For each jet is included, no shear stress maximum reinforcement is calculated as follows: 1
2 Shear stress is not reinforced by the maximum torque range of shear forces and bending of the
combination is to bend the r axis, using the rules reinforced belt if the user selects.
3 Shear stress is not reinforced by the maximum torque range of shear forces and bending of the
combination is to bend the axis s, using the rules reinforced belt if the user selects.
Stress limits the maximum shear is reported from the shear stress is not reinforced for maximum
street violence. Interest rate response to each boundary reinforcement force is not reinforced stress /
maximum stress allowed.
SSR is used to directly resist shear stress, rather than twisting stresses. In the SSR provides puncture
resistance is calculated as follows:
2 Minimum number of rails installed on horizontal rails gaps maximum 2dom. The rails were
installed at a maximum distance allowed. The length of each rail at least 2.5d.
3 As the range of intensities used for up to 4 (2 copies and 2 strips twisted). Determine how much of
the cross sections are important. If there is no significant cross-section on a particular surface, the
surface will not be used to design strength but will put the rails, if possible, ask to use the maximum
horizontal distance.
4 The length of the belt is calculated for both the band and the band twist. The length of the strip is
simple twisted appropriate width of the critical section. The length of the range is calculated as the
length remaining after any length of twisted strips were subtracted. If twisted strip is snapped with
holes / gaps, they can strip the length less than or equal to zero. In this case there is no design and
status will be reported as "failed".
6 As and added, if necessary, the required rail and repeat steps 4 and 5 until you find a satisfactory
solution.
which
an
d
which
and
Puncture shear force can be transmitted up to less than two columns of values :
Which
In the strip,
Other provisions
The distance to the first nail is 0:35 d. This distance is approximately 5 mm rounded to metric units
(or 1/8 inch for U.S. units).
Maximum stud spacing typically 0.75 d. In the application of seismic engineers can typically limited
to distances smaller than the value determined by direct typical stud spacing.
In the strip,
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
When asked SSR reinforcement, reinforcement of minimum requirements on the band intensity.
Method of analysis and design of shear breached the rules used EC2 as a basis for implementation.
Many regulations specific conditions EC2 generalized by CEB-FIP 90. Implementation of the
proposed TR-43 compression prior to processing in the shear strength equation.
Perimeter controls (u1) is defined in 2d outside the scope of its application. Formation of coronary
This control belt to minimize its length. Rounded corners belt.
For the next within the puncture test, another test will ring created by protruding perpendicular to the
belt to control the angle of the edge. In addition, the control ring will be created for each of the basic
shape, the head, etc. This leads to the basic control perimeter.
To calculate the circumference of stress, the stress distribution caused by the eccentricity between
load / jet belt overlaps with controlled shear stress due to the load to the heart causing the stress
distribution the complete circumference. If the eccentricity in two orthogonal directions, they are
considered simultaneously. The coefficient k in Equation 6:39 EC2 torque applied to unbalanced
forces after the column is converted into elastic neutral axis of the belt controls.
EC2 to 6.4.3 (3) requires the calculation of basic control perimeter. Then the same system will be
applied to the calculation of the next cycle. Perform simplification due to the complexity of the
calculation of plastic trim. The concept does not make this assumption, but instead
this calculation and application circumference appropriate for each count. This followed the
of the
limited section of the CEB-FIP 90.
The belt features section and the control equation to calculate the actual stress
Prior to the calculations, carried out the following actions on the central jet column: 1
3 The jet was turned to the axis of the column and the appropriate coefficient k. 4 jets are
Perform calculations remaining elastic around the spindle of the control ring. Do use plastic stress
distribution, if the belt range control "breakthrough" on each side of the elastic neutral axis are not
equal, they have different strength to keep balance along. Handling by multiplying the coefficient is
the ratio of the surface stress on a spindle for stress on the other hand. The figures are presented as
follows:
The stress in each corner (considering the bend around each axis separately) can be presented as:
Equation 1
Equation 2
Maybe set up two parallel equations and solving the stress state around the critical section:
MOX = Unbalanced moment around the x-axis of the critical section (after adjusting k) Moy =
Unbalanced moment around the y-axis of the critical section (after adjusting k) d = effective
We can see these terms as flexible modules and each of the sections of the cubic unit length. Due to
the interaction of αin the above equation and the equation below, the only valid value for that axis is
calculated.
(6:47)
which
d in mm
related with steel tensile adhesion to concrete in the y and z (the user enter
directly as property values puncture test)
k1 = 0.1
(6:52)
reinforcement
Note: Because of the size of the SSR was chosen to ensure 100% relative growth, yield strength of
reinforcement without SSR is used to adjust the depth effect, d. If the engineer to reduce the intensity
of the effective elastic nails so deep, can make adjustments by determining the elastic stress in the
concession "thongs SSR system" in the "Materials".
which
Note: Need to simplify the next column so difficult equation code for irregular cases. This provision
is not required in accordance with codes and engineers should review if necessary.
The corner
columns: u0 <3d
Other provisions
Perimeter control in which shear reinforcement is not required to be calculated by eq. 6:47.
Outermost perimeter of shear reinforcement is not greater than 1.5d of this perimeter.
which st is assumed to be < 2d (should define / adjust the final layout of rails to fit this assumption)
Note: Do not consider arranging SSR in Figure 6:22. Engineers SSR should rearrange if possible or
cover additional rails to meet the requirements of the tangent distance limit. Do not consider
adjusting the control belt in Figure 6.22B.
Note: EC2 has special provisions for column base. These rules have not been implemented in the
program Concept (above provisions are applicable to the puncture test). For the no-stressed before,
this is always peaceful. For pre-stressed Version, engineers will need to assess the validity of the
results.
57.8 Conventional
symbols
The equations presented require using conventional notation "right hand rule". While RAM Concept
program allows you to declare your conventional notation for the jet, the program itself will apply
the correct symbols for the equations.
CIVILAX Civil Engineering Community | www.civilax.com
Figure 57-4 The positive reaction torque generated from conventional notation "right hand
rule".
Concept Program report from jet applied to the column. The jet is the power and torque to be applied
to column joints to keep the system balanced if deleting the column. We can see this by taking out
structural columns and instead report the jet is applied at the center column. See Figure 57-5 to be
explained more clearly.
CGS layers of protection - This is the distance from the top to the focus of highly reinforced
above. Overall, this is the distance from the top to the bottom of the top bar (the bar at the top
or on the bottom bar). Unless this gap for the thickness, we have distance "d".
Angle - The angle that the jet plane is punctured surrounds. For many codes codes, and
determine the angle calculation puncture. Generally, the installation should declare the
column angle or (if the column is an edge) the angle of the edge. You can use the check box
"Check Punch Axis Align with Rectangular Columns" to automatically declare angle.
57.10 Other
Information
Effect of compression
before
For the following stress, allowing affected by Concept program can be smaller than the impact of the
curriculum 2D calculations, because the program concept using pre-stressed values effectively, is the
central average for the breach. Breached this region will reflect the average pre-stressed lower
efficiency in the column and the other areas are filled.
Engineers need to consider the possibility of choosing the important sections of Concept program,
and to assess building performance to determine the choice of Concept program is appropriate and
whether the application model code is appropriate or not.